JP7696609B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that can generate multiple types of specific gaming states that are advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-154684 A

However, there was room for improvement in the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines.

Therefore, the present invention aims to improve the enjoyment of gaming on gaming machines.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine equipped with a gaming control means capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information , the gaming control means can generate a gaming state including a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, and as the variable display game, a first variable display game based mainly on the establishment of a first starting condition by a hitting manner that launches a gaming ball to the left side of the gaming board can be executed, and a second variable display game based mainly on the establishment of a second starting condition by a hitting manner that launches a gaming ball to the right side of the gaming board can be executed. The game machine is provided with a storage means capable of storing a first start memory number, which is the number of times the first start condition is satisfied, and a second start memory number, which is the number of times the second start condition is satisfied, and is capable of displaying the first start memory number and the second start memory number on a display means as a numerical display and an image display. The normal game state is a state in which the first start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second start condition, and the specific game state is a state in which the second start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first start condition, and in the specific game state, A mode display is displayed on a display means, and when the second variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, the state changes from the specific game state to a normal game state, and when changing from the specific game state to the normal game state, a result display is displayed on the display means, the mode display displayed before the result display is hidden and the result display is displayed, an image display of the second start memory number associated with the mode display is displayed in a period until the result display is displayed, and an image display of the first start memory number associated with the mode display is displayed in a period after the result display is displayed, and throughout the display period in which the result display is displayed and the non-display period before and after the display period in which the result display is hidden, the display means displays a numeric display of the first start memory number on the left side and a numeric display of the second start memory number on the right side, and when the display of the result display is completed, an arrow guiding the launch of a game ball into a game area on the left side of the game board is displayed on the display means in a direction from the numeric display of the second start memory number toward the numeric display of the first start memory number.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

1 is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front side. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control system of a gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting change/confirmation process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of special game processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a start port switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of common processing of the special chart start port switch. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a specific area switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the small hit determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the support hit determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a special chart information setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a two-byte allocation process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a distribution process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a variable start information setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of processing during special chart change. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of a time-saving end setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of a presentation mode information check process. A flowchart showing the steps of the first half of the processing during special chart display. A flowchart showing the steps of the latter half of the processing during special chart display. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a support operation setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a bonus game. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of reels. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end processing. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 1. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a general game process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a gate switch monitoring process. A flowchart showing the steps of the regular power winning switch monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of the process for setting the transition to processing during normal map fluctuations. 13 is a flowchart showing the steps of processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during normal map display. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a normal hit. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a normal power operation transition setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing normal residual balls. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal hit end processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of an external information editing process. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second half of the external information editing process. 4 is a time chart showing a state in which external information or a test signal is transmitted. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a received command check process. 13 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a single command process. 13 is a flowchart showing pre-reading pattern command processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead variation command process. 13 is a flowchart showing a pattern-related command process. 13 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a hit-related command. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of a game state. 13 is another example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state. This is a table showing the number of time-saving turns and the specified remaining number of reserved turns corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart change display game. This is a diagram showing the features of the regular map change display game and regular power operation. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol A. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol B. This is a timing chart showing the game status, normal symbol probability (normal symbol hit probability), normal symbol status, normal power status, number of special symbol 2 reserved, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot of symbol F. This is a time chart showing an example 1 of a discrepancy occurring between the start timing of the regular power release and the start timing of the special chart 2 variable display game. This is a time chart showing an example 2 of a discrepancy occurring between the start timing of the regular power release and the start timing of the special chart 2 variable display game. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining measures against misalignment. 11 is a time chart showing an effect (effect 1) of the misalignment countermeasure against a forward misalignment. 13 is a time chart showing an effect (effect 2) of the misalignment countermeasure against a subsequent misalignment. This is a time chart explaining how to increase remaining reserves by stopping shooting. 13 is a time chart illustrating a stop shot countermeasure. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a hitting instruction display. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating examples of gradual changes in the display of the hitting instruction. FIG. 1 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens of a display device (part 1); FIG. 2 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in time series (part 2); 13 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in time series (part 3). FIG. FIG. 4 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing a display screen of a display device in time series (part 4); 13 is another example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in time series (part 1). FIG. 13 is another example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in chronological order (part 2). Regarding the modified example, this is a table showing the support state, the number of time-saving times, and the specified number of remaining reservations corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart variable display game. This is a diagram showing the characteristics of the regular map change display game and regular power operation in relation to a modified example. Regarding a modified example, this is a diagram showing the opening pattern of the normal variable winning device (normal power) (part 1). Regarding a modified example, this is a diagram showing the opening pattern of the normal variable winning device (normal power) (part 2). Regarding the modified example, this is a timing chart showing the game status, normal pattern probability, normal pattern status, normal power status, number of reserved special patterns 2, special pattern changes, etc. after a jackpot with pattern B. Regarding the modified example, this is a timing chart showing the game status, normal pattern probability, normal pattern status, normal power status, number of reserved special patterns 2, special pattern changes, etc. after a jackpot with pattern D. Regarding the modified example, this is a timing chart showing the game status, normal pattern probability, normal pattern status, normal power status, number of reserved special patterns 2, special pattern changes, etc. after a jackpot with pattern E or pattern F. FIG. 11 is a first example of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens on a display device according to a modified example; FIG. 13 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens of a display device in relation to a modified example (part 2); In the second embodiment, this is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of a screen transition from a time-saving state to a time-saving state after the time-saving state. In the second embodiment, this is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (middle part) of a screen transition from a time-saving state to a state after the time-saving state. FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order in the second embodiment, and is an example (second half) of a screen transition from a time-saving state to a time-saving state after the time-saving state. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition from the time-saving state in a 100-time time-saving machine. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of a screen transition in a modified example of special chart 2 reserved display. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and is an example (second half) of a screen transition in a modified example of the special chart 2 reserved display. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variant example 2 of the special chart 2 reserved display. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variant example 3 of the special chart 2 reserved display. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variants 4 and 5 of the special chart 2 reserved display. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variant example 6 of the special chart 2 reserved display. 13 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the specified remaining number of reservations corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart change display game. This is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, this is a timing chart showing the game state, special chart change display game (special chart change), normal chart state, normal power state, special chart 2 reserved number, etc., from the time-saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state in which remaining reserved numbers are consumed). 13 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (first half). 13 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in time series in the fourth embodiment (second half). 13 is a screen transition diagram illustrating another example of a display screen of the display device in time series according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a lamp display device according to a fifth embodiment. A figure explaining the display mode of the fourth pattern on the lamp display units 1 and 2. A figure explaining the display of the number of reserved special drawings 1 or the number of reserved special drawings 2 on the lamp display unit 3-6. A front view of a game board related to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of game states in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, this is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the specified remaining number of reservations (specified remaining number of reservations) corresponding to the patterns that are the winning types of the special chart variable display game. This is a table summarizing the operation status of time-saving when a new trigger for time-saving operation occurs from each game state in the sixth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating the display of a collective display device according to a sixth embodiment. A figure showing the features of the map variation display game in the sixth embodiment. A figure showing the features of normal power operation in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the special chart information setting process in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the variation pattern setting process in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the variable start information setting process related to the sixth embodiment. This is a table showing the setting status of the variable pattern table in the sixth embodiment for each game state and special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rendering screen of a display device according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a second half of the external information editing process according to the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing the on/off state of the jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the output of a test signal to a test firing test device in the sixth embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating examples of easy-to-win state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a table showing the output of a launch position designation signal according to the sixth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the output of a launch position designation signal according to the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning opening and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid in the sixth embodiment in the case of a small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game. This is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning opening and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid in the case of a small hit result in the special chart 2 variable display game in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram showing wiring that is properly connected from the decoration control board (first circuit board) of the performance control device to the LED board (second circuit board) in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram showing a state in which terminals at both ends of a harness are connected to connectors with one terminal shifted from the other in a seventh embodiment. FIG. 116B is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals at both ends of the harness are connected to the connectors in a manner shifted one by one to the opposite side from that in FIG. 116A in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the wiring connection configuration from the decoration control board (first circuit board) to the panel decoration motor, the right drop board, and the left drop board (multiple second circuit boards) in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a detailed diagram 1 (upstream side) showing details of a connection configuration of an FFC connection according to a modified example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a detailed diagram 2 (downstream side) showing details of the connection configuration of the FFC connection in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram showing, as a comparative example, conventional wiring that is normally connected from the decoration control device of the performance control device to the LED board. FIG. 11 is a circuit diagram showing a state in which terminals on one side of a harness are connected to a connector with one terminal shifted from the other, and a circuit diagram showing a state in which terminals on both sides of the harness are connected to a connector with one terminal shifted from the other, for a conventional wiring example of a comparison example.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the terms front, back, left and right refer to the directions as seen by a player playing a game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge so as to be freely opened and closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15. The left end of the opening/closing frame is an axis-mounted end that is attached to the hinge, and the right end is an open end that is opened by rotation.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that allows a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be viewed.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 with the glass frame 15 not open, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30 can be accessed.

Various frame-constituting members are disposed around the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

The upper center and left side of the glass frame 15 are provided with a decoration device 1 that can emit light depending on the game state.
The decoration devices 18a, 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a, 18b house lighting components such as LEDs inside and emit light according to the game status. The lighting components provided inside the decoration devices 18a, 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are disposed at the upper right and upper left corners of the glass frame 15. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are disposed at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a and lower speakers 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc.

A protruding performance unit 13 is disposed on the right side of the glass frame 15, and extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player).
A projection effect unit 13 is a projection effect device that performs light emission effects according to the progress of the game.
The lighting member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper tray 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a presentation operation device that accepts input operations from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts input operations from the player, and a decorative device 22 that performs light-emitting effects, etc. depending on the game status.

The performance operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated into the performance button 25,
It is located at the top center of the upper tray unit so that it is easy for players to operate.

By operating the presentation operation device, the player can perform presentations that involve the player's operation in the special chart variable display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, a presentation pattern (presentation mode) can be selected, or a preview presentation can be performed that predicts the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. Note that the variable display game includes the special chart variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as the variable display game, it is meant to refer to the special chart variable display game in this specification.

In addition, the presentation pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being played, but also when the game is not being played by the player operating the presentation operation device.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. The special game state may be, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the probability of a special result (e.g., a jackpot) occurring in the variable display game is high (a probability change state, a probability change state), a jackpot state (
special game state), small win game state (small win state).

Here, the special state (specific game state) may continue until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), continue until a predetermined number of variable display games have been played (number-cut type, ST), or continue until a predetermined probability of falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may not be determined by the jackpot pattern random number, but the probability variable state may be generated whenever a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that a player operates when borrowing a gaming ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
and a balance display section 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button that the player operates when borrowing game balls, and the return button 28 is a button that the player operates when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) that is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10. The balance display section 26 is a display area in which the balance of the prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 is a device that contains lighting components such as LEDs and performs light emission effects depending on the game status, and is provided at the front part of the upper tray unit. The lighting components disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 which has the upper tray unit etc. described above, at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is provided an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown), and a lower tray 23 in which game balls can be stored.

The operating handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12, below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launching speed of the game balls launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher controls the force (speed) with which the game balls are launched into the game area.
The launch force can be changed in response to the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be launched in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch modes include a left hit (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down the left side of the game area 32, and a right hit in which the game ball flows down the right side of the game area 32.

The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower tray 23 has a ball ejection hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball ejection hole 23a. When a player operates the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball ejection hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball ejection hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 3 which serves as a mounting base for various components.
The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided in front of the gaming machine 10.
The game is played by launching game balls from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle spikes, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing their rolling direction due to these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32, forming a window that serves as the display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) multiple identification information is provided.
A display device 41 is disposed as a display device for displaying the game board 30. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed so that the display contents can be seen from the front side of the game board 30 through a window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to being provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that create the variable display game. In addition, the display screen displays images based on the progress of the game (jackpot display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.).

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a ball guide mechanism for receiving the balls flowing down the game area 32.
The center case 40 has an inlet 40a leading to a warp passage 40e for guiding the balls to the inside of the warp passage 40e, and a stage portion 40b on which the game balls passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper performance unit 40c and a side performance unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively.
constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board presentation device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal symbol start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) is provided for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, a normal symbol variation display game is executed.

A general winning hole 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left side of the center case 40, and a general winning hole 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40. The winning of a game ball into these general winning holes 35 is controlled by a winning hole switch (SW
) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3).

A start winning hole (start winning hole 1, first start winning area) 36 that provides the start condition of the special chart variable display game is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40.
In the game area 32 on the right side of the normal game start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric device, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning port (starting port 2, second start winning area) is provided below the normal game start gate 34. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that rotates forward to change the state so that the game ball can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in a closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special game change display game is executed as an auxiliary game. Note that the game ball is more likely to win the start winning port 36 when hitting from the left, and the game ball is more likely to win the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting from the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric device, and when the result of the ordinary variable display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it operates via the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) to open, changing to an open state (an easy-to-win state that is advantageous for the player) in which the game balls can easily flow into the ordinary variable winning device 37. If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy-to-win state),
The game ball is in a closed state (a state where it is difficult to win a prize, a state where it is difficult to win a prize) in which the game ball is difficult to flow into the normal variable winning device 37. In this embodiment, the start winning port 36 is different from the normal variable winning device 37 in that
It does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), but a configuration having a movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of the easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal map variation display game or by making the winning probability of the normal map variation display game higher than normal, or by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state in which no special play is performed, thereby generating the time-saving state (normal power support state) as the above-mentioned specific game state. Note that the time-saving state (normal power support state) also occurs overlappingly in the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state).

In the game area 32 to the right of the start winning hole 36, a lower large winning hole solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7)
The first special variable winning device 38 (special electric device) has an attacca-type opening and closing door 38c that opens the lower large winning hole by retracting from the front to the back by a special pattern variable display game. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning hole from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special pattern variable display game, and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower large winning hole, it is designed to give the player a predetermined game value (for example, the number of time-saving/probability-changing times after the end of the prize ball or the end of the big win). In addition, a lower large winning hole switch 38a (count switch) is arranged in the lower large winning hole as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning hole. In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to win when hitting from the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, an upper large winning port solenoid 39b (FIG. 3) is provided.
The second special variable prize-winning device 39 has an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper large prize-winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction to fall to the right by a rotational force of the upper end side.
The special game change display game results in a special game change display game, and the special game change display game changes the special game change display game result from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player), and the game balls are easily allowed to flow into the special game change display game, thereby giving the player a predetermined game value (for example, the number of time-saving/variable number of times after the end of the special game change or the end of the special game change). In addition, the special game change display game result is a special game change display game result. ...

A specific area 86 (a so-called V winning hole) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. If a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning hole) after the opening and closing door 39c is opened by a small win, a big win is confirmed. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long period of time only during a small win, so that the game ball can easily pass through. The game control device 100
The passage of the game ball into the specific area 86 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later), and when a V winning is detected, it is determined that the game will transition to a big win state after the small win ends, and information indicating that a V winning has occurred (specific area passing command, etc.) is transmitted to the performance control device 300 described later. The performance control device 300 can then notify the V winning on the display device 41, etc.

That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine (type 1+2 machine). In this embodiment, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small win, and the second
When the game ball V-enters a specific area 86 (V entry port) within the special variable entry device 39, a jackpot occurs.

General winning port 35, start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
When a gaming ball wins in the large winning port 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of winning port from the payout device to the upper tray 21. In addition, an outlet 30b is provided in the lower game area 32 to collect gaming balls that did not win in the winning ports. In addition, LEDs (part of the board decoration device 46 described later) that can emit light when a gaming ball wins are provided in or near the general winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39.

In addition, a collective display device 50 that executes a special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game, special chart 2 change display game) and a normal chart change display game is provided outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special chart change display unit 51 (special chart 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special chart change display unit 52 (special chart 2 display, lamp D2) for the change display game, which are composed of a 7-segment display device (LED lamp) or the like, a change display unit 53 (normal chart display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the normal chart change display game, and a memory display unit (special chart 1 hold display 54, special chart 2 hold display 55, normal chart hold display 56) for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each change display game.
The special drawing 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special drawing 2 reservation indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14.
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp D7) that notifies the player when hitting from the right (when the player should hit from the right) or when hitting from the left (when the player normally hits),
There is provided a second game status display unit 58 (second game status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time-saving state, a third game status display unit 59 (third game status indicator, probability state display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the probability state of a jackpot is in a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38, 39 are opened and closed).

In the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display that repeatedly turns on and off (blinks) the identification information (for example, the central segment). Note that the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit,
It may be composed of a group of multiple LEDs, and when executing the variable display, all the LEDs provided as the display may be turned on and off (all LEDs flashing at the same time), or cyclically lit (starting with any one LED, which lights up and goes off in a specified order at specified intervals), or a specified number of the multiple LEDs may be turned on and off (flashing) or cyclically lit. In the normal display 53 as well, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the normal display 53 and the special display 51 may be turned on and off in a specified order at specified intervals.
1. It can be configured appropriately in the same manner as special chart 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (flashing) by repeatedly turning on and off the symbols (fourth special symbol and fourth symbol described later), and lamp display units 3-6 (LEDs) for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each special symbol variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the performance control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 flash at a predetermined flashing cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. That is, the switching between turning on and off of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is performed at 200 msec (milliseconds) of the flashing cycle.
The time for the display of the special display 1, the special display 2, and the general display 53 of the collective display device 50 is determined by the game control device 1.
00, whereas the fluctuation time of lamp display units 1 and 2 of lamp display device 80 is measured by performance control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (Special chart 1 reserved LED 1, Special chart 1 reserved LED 2) display the special chart 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and blinking states. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (Special chart 2 reserved LED 1, Special chart 2 reserved LED 2) display the special chart 2 reserved number (second start memory number) by a combination of off, on, and blinking states. The lamp display units 3-6 stop displaying the reserved number when a jackpot occurs, but display the reserved number in cases other than the jackpot state (including cases where a reach occurs on the display unit 41, as described below).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the regular chart change display game and the special chart change display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction due to obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and wins in the normal start gate 34, the normal winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the normal winning port 35, the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of prize balls according to the type of winning port is discharged to the upper tray 21 via the payout device.

The normal map start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) that detects a game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and a normal map variation display game is executed based on the result of the judgment of the winning judgment random number value extracted at this time.

In a state in which the normal map change display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map change display game has already been played and has not ended, or when the result of the normal map change display game is a win and the normal change winning device 37 has been converted to an open state, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, if the normal map start memory number (normal map reserve number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is incremented (+1).

The normal map start memory (normal map reserve) stores a random number value for determining whether the normal map fluctuation display game is a win or a loss, and when this random number value for determining whether the game is a win or a loss matches the judgment value, the normal map fluctuation display game is a win and a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The normal map display device 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a win when lit as normal identification information (normal map) and indicates a loss when unlit, and displays the variation of the normal identification information by flashing this LED, and displays the result by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed.

If the random number value of the normal symbol extracted when passing through the normal symbol start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol (normal symbol) displayed on the normal symbol display 53 stops in the winning state, and the state becomes a winning state.
When the normal current solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times), allowing the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37.

The entry of the game ball into the start winning hole 36 and the entry into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a start winning hole 1 switch 36a (see Figure 3) and a start winning hole 2 switch 37a (see Figure 3).
The game ball that entered the start winning hole 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special chart 1 variable display game,
The number of winning balls is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special chart 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special symbol variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the random number of each variation pattern, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times) as special symbol start winning memories in the special symbol reserve memory area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100. The number of special symbol start winning memories is displayed on the special symbol 1 reserve display 54 and the special symbol 2 reserve display 55 for notifying the number of start winning memories of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 4.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes a special chart 1 variable display game on the special chart 1 display 51 based on a winning entry to the start winning port 36 or the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory, special chart 1 reserved). Also, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 variable display game on the special chart 2 display 52 based on a winning entry to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserved).

The special chart 1 variable display game (first special chart variable display game) and the special chart 2 variable display game (second special chart variable display game) are played by displaying identification information (special pattern, special chart) on the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result pattern.

In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special chart variable display game that variably displays multiple types of identification information (e.g., numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) corresponding to each special chart variable display game.

The decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 starts to vary (scroll) the decorative special symbols (identification information) consisting of the numbers and the like in the order of left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and center (third special symbol), and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are stopped in sequence to display the result of the special symbol variation display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various performance displays such as the appearance of characters are performed to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) varies by repeating (blinking) the on and off display in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. The variable display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at "off" in the case of a miss and "on" in the case of a big win or small win after a predetermined time from the start.

When the game ball enters the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value), a specific result state (special result state) is derived from the display pattern as a result of the special chart variable display game, and the jackpot state (
In response to this, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a special result state (for example, a state in which the numbers "7, 7, 7" are lined up).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are connected to the large winning port solenoids (38b and 39b) (
3), the special winning port is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). That is, the special winning port provided in the special variable winning device 38, 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time the player is given the privilege of winning many game balls.

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is a small win value), a specific result state (small win result state) is derived by the displayed pattern as a result of the special chart variable display game, and a small win state is achieved. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a small win result state. In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small win, but the small win value (small win determination value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the large winning port solenoids 38b and 39b (FIG. 3
By applying electricity to the large prize slot (see reference), the large prize slot is converted from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short period of time.
In addition, the total opening time of the large prize opening is shorter in the small prize state (small prize game state) than in the large prize state (special game state), so the game value (number of balls won) that the player can acquire is less in the small prize state than in the large prize state. In addition, the large prize opening is in an open state in both the small prize state and the large prize state, but the large prize state may be called the first special game state, and the small prize state may be called the second special game state. In addition, for simplicity, in this embodiment, the special variable prize device 39 (
This section describes a configuration in which only the upper large prize opening (upper prize opening) is converted to an open state, and in a jackpot state (including a jackpot state due to a V prize during a small prize), only the special variable prize opening device 38 (lower large prize opening) is converted to an open state.

Here we explain the difference between a big win and a small win.

A big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a condition device, and a small win is a specific result that does not accompany the operation of a condition device. The condition device is activated when a big win occurs in the special pattern variable display game (the big win pattern stops displaying). The operation of the condition device means, for example, that a big win state occurs and a specific flag is set to continuously operate the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 as special electric devices. Also, the operation of the condition device means that the specific area 86
It may also mean that a game ball has passed through the gate (V entry). The condition device not being activated means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of simply winning a small win lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if a V entry occurs during a small win state, the condition device will be activated. The "condition device" may be a software means, such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or a hardware means, such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. The "condition device" may also be:
This term is commonly used in the field of pachinko machines to refer to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric parts, and it is used in this specification as a term with the same meaning.

Specifically, in the case of a big win, a big win flag is set and a special variable winning device is opened, whereas in the case of a small win, a small win flag is set and a special variable winning device is opened.

The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but are set so that the special chart variation display games are not executed simultaneously. The special chart 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special chart 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory for the special chart 1 variation display game and the special chart 2 variation display game, and when the special chart variation display game is in a state where it is possible to execute the special chart variation display game, the special chart 2 variation display game is executed (special chart 2 reserved priority consumption, special chart 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special chart variation display game in the display device 41, the special chart 1 variation display game and the special chart 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or may be executed on the same display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special chart variation display games corresponding to the special chart 1 variation display game and the special chart 2 variation display game may not be executed simultaneously.

In the following description, when there is no distinction between the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game, they will simply be referred to as the special chart change display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36
A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used for the start port 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, and count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37. The magnetic detection coil is equipped with a magnetic detection coil, and the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil to detect the game ball. In addition, a microswitch having a mechanical contact can be used for the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12.

[Game Control Device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game overall, and is composed of a CPU section 110 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with power from a power supply device 400, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, DC 5V, etc. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with power from a power supply device 400, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, DC 5V, etc.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to the device to make it operable.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from a 24 V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as 12 V or 5 V from the DC voltage of 32 V, and a gaming microcomputer 11.
The game control device 100 is equipped with a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game control device 1 in the event of a power outage, and a control signal generating unit 430 that has a power outage monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100.
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 430 may be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing the model, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generating unit 43 are provided on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board.
By providing a value of 0, it is possible to exclude the item from replacement, thereby reducing costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor.
In particular, the power supply voltage is supplied to the internal RAM, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generating unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage and changes the power outage monitoring signal, while outputting a reset signal after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The game control device 100 is also provided with a RAM initialization switch 112.
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
The information stored in the microcomputer 1M is forcibly initialized. Although not limited to this, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read when the power is turned off.
The reset signal is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

The game control device 100 (main board) also includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93, when turned on by the operator's rotation operation or the like, makes it possible to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the settings related to the game conditions (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the probability of winning, such as the probability of a big win or a small win, but game conditions other than probability (such as presentation) can also be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are,
A setting change means (setting change device 42, setting means) capable of changing the settings (probability setting value) related to the game conditions is configured. Note that, instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a dedicated independent setting value change switch may be provided.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10, and are arranged in a position that cannot be operated (inaccessible position) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. In other words, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered from a power outage, power restored), the gaming machine 10 can transition to various states, such as a setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed (set), and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, depending on the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

In this embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in six stages, for example, with probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the setting that is least favorable to the player, and setting 6 is the setting that is most favorable to the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (medium settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, Probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, Probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (
The setting is changed as follows: setting 4 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For the sake of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), working setting values 0 to 5 are set to correspond to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, but the working setting values and the probability setting values may be aligned to the same numerical range (i.e. 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) and treated as the same (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position, instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch). The probability setting value is not limited to six stages. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is then displayed on the performance display device 152, which is, for example, a four-digit seven-segment display (eight-segment display including the dot Dp).

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and a read-only RA (read-only read-only memory) 111c.
The memory 111 includes a random access memory (M) 111c.

The ROM 111b stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) in a non-volatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a working area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers, and stores information related to the game (game information) and serves as a storage means capable of storing and retaining the stored information even in the event of a power outage. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that specifies, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the performance content, and the occurrence or non-occurrence of a reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a miss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables (such as a second half variation group table and a second half variation pattern selection table) for determining a latter half variation pattern that is a variation pattern after the reach state is reached, and tables (such as a first half variation group table and a first half variation pattern selection table) for determining a former half variation pattern that is a variation pattern before the reach state is reached.

Here, the term "reach" (reach state) refers to a game state that is advantageous to the player (special game state) when the game state has a display device that can change the display state, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results become a predetermined special result mode.
In the gaming machine 10, when some of the display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
The reach state refers to a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result state. In other words, the reach state refers to a display state in which the display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches a stage before being derived and displayed, but does not deviate from the display conditions for becoming a special result state. For example, the reach state also includes a state in which a variable display is performed using multiple variable display areas while maintaining a state in which all special result states are present (so-called full rotation reach). The reach state refers to a display state in which the display control of the display device progresses and reaches a stage before being derived and displayed, and at least a part of the display results of the multiple variable display areas that have been determined before the display result is derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result state.

Therefore, for example, if the decorative special chart variable display game displayed on the display device in response to the special chart variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the variable display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, the state in which the variable display stops in the left and right variable display areas when the conditions for the special result state are met (for example, the same identification information) is the reach state. Alternatively, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the state in which the conditions for the special result state are met in any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information, excluding the special result state) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a number of reach effects, and the reach effects have different possibilities (different expectations) for deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode), and are classified into the following types (types): normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP
There are three types of reach: Special 2 Reach (SP3 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premium Reach.
The expectation (expected value) of a jackpot increases in the following order: no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach < premium reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special chart variable display game (when a jackpot occurs). In other words, it may also be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that a special result mode is not derived in the special chart variable display game (when a miss occurs). Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is a state with a higher probability of a jackpot than when a reach state does not occur.

In addition, the expectancy of a performance (notice) indicates the probability of a jackpot if that performance is selected, and can be calculated based on the selection rate of that performance when there is a jackpot and the selection rate of that performance when there is no jackpot (when there is a miss).

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, and controls the entire game machine 10. In addition, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special chart variable display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, a small jackpot pattern random number for determining a small jackpot pattern, a support jackpot pattern random number for determining a time-saving pattern (a stop pattern for a support jackpot) described later,
A random number generating circuit for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern in a special pattern variation display game (including the execution time of a variation display game in various reach and reach-free variation displays), and a random number generating circuit for generating a random number for generating a random number for a variation pattern in a special pattern variation display game (including the execution time of a variation display game in various reach and reach-free variation displays), and a random number generating circuit ...
The timer 11a is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) and a clock that provides an update timing for the random number generating circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a performs processing related to the special chart change display game.
Specifically, the CPU 111a selects and acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the game result (jackpot or miss) of the special chart variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special chart variation display game as the current game state, the number of start memories, etc. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when a special chart variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and controls the drive of the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with prize ball payout instructions (commands and data) from the game control device 100 to pay out prize balls.
In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a loan ball request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control to pay out loan balls.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal start gate 34, a start gate 1 switch 36a in the first start winning gate 36, a start gate 2 switch 37a in the second start winning gate 37 (normal variable winning device), a winning gate switch 35a of the normal winning gate 35, a special variable winning device 38, and a gate switch 39a of the general winning gate 35.
, 39 large prize winning hole switches 43 (lower large prize winning hole switch 38a, upper large prize winning hole switch 39a
) and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as the above and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Furthermore, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball outlet switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74.
detects the passage (V entry) of a game ball into a specific area 86 (V entry port). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges game balls from the special variable winning devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in the sensor or switch is detected are input to a second input port 123 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

In addition, the second input port 123 receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10, a signal from a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) or the like, a signal from a vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10, and a signal from a vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10.
5 is input.

In addition, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation.

The data held by the third input port 124 is converted into an enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, a RAM initialization switch 1, and the like output from the payout control device 200.
12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is full of gaming balls or more (is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main frame), and the payout busy signal is a signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply unit 400 to the gaming microcontroller 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 has the function of removing noise from these input signals.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply unit 400 is first input to the first input port 122 and then taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also output to the output section 13.
0. The reset signal RST is also configured to be output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.

The reset signal RST may be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is input to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input is discarded by the reset of the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the gaming control device 100 to the performance control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is a one-way communication that does not allow signals to be input from the performance control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to mount a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the special pattern information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a jackpot to a test firing test device of a certification agency (not shown) via a relay board 70. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game arcade. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing device as they are, such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and are then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing device, and a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer.
A chip enable signal CE output from the output terminal 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

In addition, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 for outputting opening/closing data for the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 and opening the normal variable winning device 37, the lower large winning port solenoid 38b (large winning port solenoid 1) opening the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port solenoid 39b (large winning port solenoid 2) opening the second special variable winning device 39, and the lever solenoid 86b operating the lever to open the specific area 86.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of a segment line to which an anode terminal of an LED is connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and an on/off data of a digit line to which a cathode terminal of an LED of the collective display device 50 is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting the off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to an external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting the signal to the payout control device 200. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device for an amusement facility (hall computer)) installed in the amusement facility, so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device. In addition, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output section 130 includes a normal current solenoid 37 that is output from a second output port 134.
There are provided a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives opening/closing data signals from the large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a third driver 138c that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current sink side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.

The first driver 138a is supplied with a power supply voltage of DC 32V from a power supply device 400 so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V.
The second driver 138b that drives the segment lines is supplied with DC 12 V. The third driver 138c that drives the digit lines is for drawing out current from the digit lines according to the display data, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12 V or 5 V.

A current is supplied to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal through the digit line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential, whereby the LEDs selected sequentially in the dynamic driving method are driven.
The power supply voltage flows through the ED and the ED is lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., on the relay board 70 side, rather than on the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500.
9 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data via serial communication with the inspection device 500. Note that, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, like an ordinary general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output section 130 is provided with a driver 150 that receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives a performance display device 152 (status display device). In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is made up of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) displays (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver, but is not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, a combination ratio, a payout rate, and a number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
The number of balls discharged is calculated by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc., and is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (number of winning balls) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b.
In this embodiment, the winning slots include a general winning slot 35, a start winning slot 36 (first start winning slot, start slot 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning slot, start slot 2).
), and special variable winning devices 38, 39 (large winning slots).

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of winning balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is
The payout rate is calculated as follows: (Number of balls acquired / Number of balls discharged) x 100 (%). In other words, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of winning balls) per 100 balls discharged.

For example, the role ratio is the percentage (%) (= so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by each role) acquired by winning a large prize port during a jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by winning a prize port during a specified period (e.g., from when the gaming machine 10 was turned on to the present). Note that the role ratio may be the percentage (= large prize port ratio) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize port (during a jackpot state and during a small prize state) out of the total number of prize balls, or it may be the percentage (= so-called role ratio (total role ratio) that is commonly used) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize port and a normal variable prize port 37 (second start prize port).

[Performance control device]
Next, the configuration of the performance control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG.
1 is a block diagram of a performance control system of the gaming machine 10.

The performance control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
The computer 10 is equipped with a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 consisting of a main control microcomputer 312, a video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphics processor which performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311, and a sound source LSI 314 which controls the output of sound in order to play various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a P
A program ROM 321 is made up of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 provides a working area, and a FeRAM 323 that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power outage.
An RTC (real-time clock) 338, which constitutes a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day of the week, time, etc.), is connected to the RAM 323. The main control microcomputer 311 also has a RAM therein for providing a working area.

The main control microcomputer 311 is also connected to a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the display contents, and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video.
It performs processes such as issuing instructions to the stage to play sounds, turning on decorative lamps, controlling the operation of motors and solenoids, and managing the performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. Also connected to the VDP 312 are an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 326 that is used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.

Although not particularly limited, a parallel data transmission system is configured to be used between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

The VDP 312 transmits to the main control microcomputer 311 a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C, a synchronous signal STS that provides the data transmission timing is input.
Interrupt signals INT0 to n are also input to the main control microcontroller 311 to inform the processing status, such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT is input to inform the main control microcontroller 311 that it is waiting to receive commands or data from the main control microcontroller 311.

The performance control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

The sound source LSI 314 is connected to a sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected to each other via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier and the like that drives the upper speaker 19a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided in the front frame 12, and the sound generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the performance control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100.
The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 receives the number of reserved decorative symbols, the decorative symbol command, the change command, the stop information command, and the like, transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 via the DC5.
Since the performance control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the performance control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The performance control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (e.g., frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and a control circuit 334 that controls the frame decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
0 (including the center case 40) is provided with a board presentation device 44 (e.g., a display device 41
The board decoration device 46 is provided with a control circuit 334 for controlling the driving of movable parts (movable parts, etc., which cooperate with the display of the effects in order to enhance the effects of the effects).
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. In addition, a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 is provided with a function of detecting the on/off state of a performance button switch 25a built into the performance button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the performance button 25, and a performance prop switch 47 (performance motor switch) which detects the initial position of the motor within the board performance device 44, and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, as well as a switch input circuit 336 which detects the state of a volume adjustment switch 335 provided in the performance control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is a power supply for the performance control device 300 having the above-mentioned configuration.
and the electronic components controlled by it to supply a desired level of DC voltage. DC 32V for driving motors and solenoids, DC 12V for driving the display device 41 made of a liquid crystal panel, motors and LEDs, DC 5V as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331,
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage to drive motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter for generating DC 3.3V or DC 1.2V based on DC 5V is provided in the performance control device 300.
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generating unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, which resets the device.
The signal is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and to control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them.
When N45 is connected and the power of the performance control device 300 is turned on, the cooling fan 45 is driven.

Next, the game control performed by these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts a random number value for determining whether the normal game is a hit or a loss based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the normal game start gate 34, compares it with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and determines whether the normal game is a hit or a loss in the normal game fluctuation display game.

Then, the normal map display 53 displays a normal map variation display game in which the identification pattern is displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, the normal map display 53 displays a special result state, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to open as described above for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a loss result state on the normal map display 53.

In addition, a start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot for the special chart 1 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 1 variable display game is a win or a miss.

In addition, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot for the special chart 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 2 variable display game is a win or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (presentation control command) including the judgment result of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to the presentation control device 300. Then, the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 display the special chart variable display game in which the identification pattern is displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the start winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37).

In addition, the performance control device 300 displays a decorative special chart variable display game corresponding to the special chart variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the emission of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

When the result of the special chart variable display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special chart 1 display 51 or the special chart 2 display 52 and generates a special game state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the large prize opening solenoid 39b opens the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable prize device 39, thereby controlling the flow of game balls into the large prize opening.

Then, one round (R) is defined as the opening of the large prize opening until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (e.g., 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening. This is controlled (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle play). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a large prize opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result state becomes a special result state. Also, when the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, control is performed to display the miss result state on the special chart 1 display 51 or the special chart 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result state of the special chart variable display game.
The probability of winning in the special chart variable display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Also, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result state of either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game are in the high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result state of the special game variation display game. In the time-saving state, the normal game variation display game and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state, and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state, and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operation state. In this case, ...
In order to control the open time of 7 to be substantially longer, the normal power support state is established.
Even in high probability states (normal special probability states) excluding the latent special probability state, the time-saving state is overlapped and normal power support is executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the special chart change display game (special chart change time) can be shortened more than usual, and time-saving changes in the special chart change display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 opens (the number of normal power openings) for one winning result of the normal variable display game to a second number of times (for example, four times) that is greater than the first number of times (for example, two times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to set the probability of a winning result of the normal variable display game (normal probability, normal winning probability) to a high probability that is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time-saving state, the time for converting the normal variation winning device 37 to the open state is extended more than usual by changing one or more of the normal chart variation time, normal chart stop time, normal power opening count, normal power opening time, and normal chart probability. As a result, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the normal game state where no special game is played, and the number of times the special chart variation display game is executed per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state.
It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal probability is 0). Also, when a hit occurs, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently, and both can occur simultaneously, or only one can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on or off to transition to one of four states (modes).

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) transitions to a variable setting state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (set) (see A1027-A1036 in Figure 5B and Figure 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the device transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (see A1031-A1036 in Figure 5B and Figure 6B).

Also, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 11 is
If R2 is turned on, the RAM is initialized (RAM clear mode) and
An AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device transitions to a normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), in which power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine for performing such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of a main process shown in Figures 5A and 5B, and a timer interrupt process shown in Figure 9, which is performed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. Figures 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the reference symbols (numbers) of the steps are represented as "A****".

5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (A1001).Furthermore, it executes a stack pointer setting process to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area to save values of registers, etc., when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is specified as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specific register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a launch prohibition signal and sets the launch permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of game balls is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, it reads the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power delay timer, the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means,
A waiting time (for example, 3 hours) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game machine 100 is normally started.
This makes it possible to prevent the slave control devices from missing commands if the game control device 100 starts up first when the power is turned on and sends a command to the slave control devices (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) before they start up, which would otherwise cause the slave control devices to miss out on receiving the command. In other words, when the game control device 100 is turned on, it delays the start of the master control means (the game control device 100) and sends a command to the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the presentation control device 300,
The standby means sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the program (eg, 00).

In addition, the power delay timer is timed using a storage area (a RAM area or register not subject to validity judgment) that is not subject to validity judgment (checksum calculation).
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM region when making the calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

Incidentally, by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. In other words, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112, or to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the states before the start of the standby time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on is not accepted, without the need for such troublesome operations.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1009).
1010).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 waits until the power supply to the game machine is cut off.

If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100
The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. This makes it possible to respond to a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start-up of the game control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and malfunctions at the time of power-on can be dealt with appropriately. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the contents stored at the time of the previous power cut are retained, so there is no need to perform backup processing or the like when a power failure occurs here. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the waiting time has elapsed, access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (setting them to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets up a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which in this embodiment is used for communication with the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (A1013).

Furthermore, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting into a transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets a duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is 4.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP circuit that calculates the frequency of the divided signal.
It is equipped with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for U111a and a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating the random numbers supplied to the random number generating circuit.

Next, the game control device 100 detects an RA indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c).
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an abnormality is temporarily set in a specified register.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016).
6 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the value of power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process (A1018) to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM, and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power failure (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and a RAM error indicating a RAM abnormality is detected.
The abnormality flag is cleared (A1020), and then the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, if the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the checksums do not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 operates the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.
The game control device 100 judges whether or not both switches are on (A1021). If both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transitions to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the processing during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100
It is determined whether a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM 111c is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting change flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-A1037 probability setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of steps A1041-1044, or step A1
Executes normal power-on (power-restoration) processing of 041, A1045, and A1046.

When the probability setting change flag is set (A1023
If the result of step 3 is "Y", a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the performance control device 300 to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (A1024).
The performance control device 300 that has received the main abnormality error notification command
It notifies you that an abnormality of 0 has occurred.

Next, the game control device 100 starts the driver 15 of the performance display device 152 to display the seven-segment display data (the data of the error display of "E1") at the time of the game stop on the performance display device 152.
0 (A1025). Then, the on data of the security signal for notifying an external device (such as an internal management device (hall computer) or an information collection terminal) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Note that at this time, the information regarding the jackpot is stored in the RAM
Even if the signal remains in the external information terminal 71, other signals such as the big win signal are maintained in the OFF state. After that, the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the process waits.
The user again changes the settings (turns on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) and waits for the power to be turned on. During the standby period in which the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated, interrupts remain inhibited (A1001
), the timer interrupt processing (Figure 7) which can execute special chart 1 and 2 game processing and regular chart game processing cannot be executed, so games (special chart change display game, regular chart change display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting change in progress flag is set even though the ON operation of both is not performed, it is determined that there is an abnormality and the processes A1024-A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted during the probability setting change (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting change in progress flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 also detects that the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
2 is "Y"), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the performance control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), the 7-segment display data at the time of game stop (data displaying the "E1" error) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and security signal ON data is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As described above, even if information regarding a jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state. Thereafter, steps A1025 and A10
The process of 26 is repeated and the process waits.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (in the setting variable state) and first determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027).
" ), and since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to an initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), and then a probability setting change in progress flag is set to indicate that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"
" ), and set the probability setting change in progress flag without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1
030), and proceed to the processing of step A1034. In addition, the performance control device 300 that has received the command that the probability setting is being changed notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is "N"), the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is "N"), and the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the setting key switch 93 is on or not (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the process of checking the probability setting (setting checking state) starts, and the probability setting checking flag indicating that the probability setting is being checked is set (A1032). Then, the probability setting checking command is sent to the performance control device 30.
0 (performance control board) (A1033), and proceeds to the processing of step A1034. In addition, the performance control device 300 that has received the command that the probability setting is being changed notifies the display device 41, etc. that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (a predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during the probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (A1035). This allows the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) to be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1037). If a power outage has not occurred (result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand,
If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61, the process to be performed when a power outage occurs is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power outage has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, will continue.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036
If the result of the above is "Y", the controller 300 prohibits interrupts (A1038) and transmits a notification end command to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1039). When the performance control device 300 receives the notification end command, it ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the probability setting change flag is set, i.e., whether the probability setting has been changed up until now (A1040). If the probability setting change flag is set (result of A1040 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability setting has been changed up until now, the game control device 100 executes the RAM initialization process (described later) of steps A1042-A1044. On the other hand, if the probability setting change flag is not set (result of A1040 is "N"), i.e., if the probability setting has been confirmed up until now, the game control device 100 executes the normal process at power-on (power recovery) from step A1045 onwards.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on or not (A1041).
If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"),
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting change flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure the stack area and unused area not to be cleared, or to configure the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) not to be cleared. Note that the performance information is derived based on the number of winning balls, and is, for example, the ball output rate, base value (ball output rate in normal game state), role ratio, number of discharged balls, etc.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial values at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, it transmits the command at the time of RAM initialization to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1044), and proceeds to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
Since the result of step A1041 is "N", and both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, normal power-on (power recovery) processing is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. The probability setting confirmation flag described above is also cleared here. Next, a power failure recovery command corresponding to a processing number prepared to rationally execute the special chart game processing described below is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1046), and step A10
Proceed to process 47.

In addition, the commands sent in the processing of step A1044 when initializing the RAM and the commands sent in the processing of step A1046 when power is restored include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command and a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2, a probability information command indicating the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, a performance count information command indicating the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed in a specified performance mode, and a power outage recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for initializing the RAM and the command for recovering from a power outage include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information (setting information), which is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. The gaming control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the presentation control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the presentation control device 300 can control presentations by referring to the setting value information stored therein.

The command for initializing the RAM includes a command for initializing the RAM (a command for clearing the RAM). The performance control device 300 that has received the command for initializing the RAM performs the following operations, for example:
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker are used to display the RAM.
The initialization (RAM clear) notification is performed for 30 seconds. In addition, the command at the time of power recovery includes a screen designation command that specifies the display content of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is not performed during normal processing for both special charts 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuation nor hit is occurring).
, it is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generating circuit (A1047).
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register. The CPU 111a also sets a bit transposition pattern for the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit.

A bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how the bit arrangement of an extracted random number (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) is rearranged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row).

In this embodiment, the bits of the random numbers are swapped according to a bit permutation pattern, thereby breaking the regularity of the random numbers and increasing the confidentiality of the random numbers. The bit permutation pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, the bit permutation pattern may be arbitrarily set by the user.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (software random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and saves it in a predetermined area of the RWM as the start value of various corresponding initial value random numbers (initial value of the jackpot pattern random number that determines the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern initial value random number), initial value of the small jackpot pattern random number that determines the small jackpot pattern (small jackpot pattern initial value random number), initial value of the support jackpot pattern random number that determines the time-saving pattern (support jackpot pattern initial value random number), initial value of the win random number that determines the win of the normal pattern (win initial value random number), initial value of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (fall lottery initial value random number), etc.) (A1048), and permits an interrupt (A1049).
In the random number generating circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment, the initial value of the software random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, so by using this value as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for players to obtain illegal random numbers.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, winning symbol random number (jackpot random number, small winning symbol random number, support winning symbol random number), winning random number, and falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU's operating clock, and the winning symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are generated based on a CTC output (a CTC (CTC0) different from the CTC of the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program) that has the same period as the timer interrupt processing.
2) is a “slow counter” that is updated based on

Also, for the winning random number, winning symbol random number, and falling lottery random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted, in which the starting value is changed using the respective initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method of +1 or 1, or may be updated randomly in which all values within the range appear separately without overlap until it goes around once. In other words, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, while the winning symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process to edit the performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the ratio of the role and the payout rate) may be calculated. Also, if the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if they are not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). This allows the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) to be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processes of steps A1050 to A1054 are repeated until a power outage occurs.

When a power outage occurs (result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing for when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports (1056). After that, it saves power outage inspection area check data 1 in power outage inspection area 1 (A1057) and saves power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (A1059).
Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum when the RWM power is turned off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power outage inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power cut, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power was cut off has been correctly backed up when the power is turned back on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 6A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in a clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a specified register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs and signals from various sensors and switches,
That is, an input process is executed to read the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), a probability setting change/confirmation process is executed to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting or checking the probability setting (A130
If the result of step A1004 is "N", output processing is executed to control the operation of actuators such as solenoids (e.g., the large prize opening solenoid 39b) and the operation of LEDs (light emission control) based on the output data set in the various processes (A1306). Note that if a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal is made ready to be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs the commands set in the transmission buffer by various processes to the payout control device 200, and further executes a random number update process 1 (A1308) that updates the winning symbol random number, winning random number, etc. in the software, and a random number update process 2 (A1309) that updates the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3.
A prize winning port switch/status monitoring process is executed to monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the large prize winning port switch 39a, and to monitor errors (such as whether the front frame or glass frame is open) (A1
310).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether or not an abnormal release of game balls is occurring at the special prize opening (A1311). When an abnormal release occurrence flag is set by the abnormal release monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be judged that an abnormal release is occurring. When an abnormal release is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the process from step A1315 onwards is executed.

When abnormal discharge is not occurring (result of A1311 is "N"), the game control device 100
Then, special chart game processing is executed to perform processing related to the special chart change display game (A1312a).
The special game process will be described in detail later. Next, a bonus game process is executed to perform a process related to the opening operation of the lower large winning port of the special variable winning device 38 (A1312b). The bonus game process will be described in detail later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal game process for processing the normal game variation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special game variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a magnet tampering monitoring process (A1315) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality. Furthermore, it executes a radio wave tampering monitoring process (board radio wave tampering monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process to monitor fraud caused by vibration based on input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process to monitor abnormal discharge from the large prize opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge from the special variable prize winning device 39 is monitored based on input from the large prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 in the special variable prize winning device 39, and an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set when an abnormal discharge occurs. Note that game balls that have passed through the large prize opening switch 39a of the special variable prize winning device 39 are discharged from the specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch) and the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73.
2 (V winning port switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 and discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process to set signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1319).Then, it executes a performance display monitor control process to control the display of the performance display device 152 (A1320).After that, it ends the timer interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank designation are automatically restored; however, depending on the CPU used, processing to enable interrupts and processing to return the register bank designation to register bank 0 may be performed after the external information editing processing.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change/confirmation process. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404).
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data on the display probability setting value displayed by the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. Note that, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel and the like, if the probability setting values are different but the jackpot probability (and small win probability) is the same, the display probability setting value may be made the same in correspondence with the jackpot probability (and small win probability). In other words, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is updated to the 1 set in step A1034.
Then, the security signal ON data for notifying an external device (such as an internal management device of the game arcade (hall computer)) of an abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
(A1026). Note that, at this time, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as a big win signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

After that, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the probability setting change flag is set (A2407).
If the result of is "N", i.e., if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

When the probability setting change flag is set (A2407
If the result of A2408 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated if the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

If this is not the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A240
8 is "N"), and it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is “N”), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2409
If the result of step 111c is "Y", the working setting value in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or in the register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410).
Each time the is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. Note that when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability setting value) may be stored in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or in a register) that stores the working setting value.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. However, the probability setting value (working setting value) being changed in the working setting value area of the RAM 111c is stored, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y
"), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change (A1037
This can prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, presentation control, etc. is changed to an unintended value if the result of the above is "Y".

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special game processing (A1312a) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game processing. In the special game processing, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the whole processing related to the special game variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special game is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process to monitor the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 that constitutes the start winning port 36 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a game result advance determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance at a stage before the start of the special chart variable display game based on the winning.
The start port switch monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Next, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the specific area 86 (V winning hole) (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper large winning port switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the upper large winning port switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special game processing timer by -1 if the special game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A2603). By updating the special game processing timer by -1, the timer will be timed for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process. The minimum value of the special game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

When the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a special game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to a process corresponding to the special game processing number is set in a register (A2605). Furthermore, the special game sequence branch table is used to obtain a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game processing number (A2606).
Next, a subroutine call is made based on the special game processing number, and game branching processing according to the special game processing number is executed (A2607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100
The start of the special chart change display game is monitored, and special chart normal processing is executed to set the start of the special chart change display game, set the performance, and set information required for performing special chart change processing (A2608). Details of the special chart normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100
A special pattern change process is executed to set the stop display time of the special pattern and to set information required for performing the special pattern display process (A2609). For example, in the special pattern change process, necessary information such as a pattern stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern and a stop display time corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern is set, and the process number "2" related to the special pattern display process is set and saved in the special pattern game process number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100
A special chart display process is executed (A2610) to set information necessary for transitioning to a big win state or a small win state. For example, in the special chart display process, if the result of the special chart change display game is a big win, condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, the process number "0" related to the special chart normal process is set, and saved in the special chart game process number area. If the result of the special chart change display game is a small win, necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and a time before the small win is released is set, and the process number "3" related to the process before the small win is released is set.
If the result of the special chart variable display game is a miss, the processing number "0" for the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute small win opening pre-processing (A2611). For example, in the small win opening pre-processing, the opening time of the large prize winning port due to a small win (small win opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, the on data is saved in the upper large prize winning port solenoid output data area, the small win opening command is set as the performance command, and the processing number "4" related to the small win opening processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the small win open processing (A2612). For example, in the small win open processing, the small win remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number "5" related to the small win remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100
Execute the small win remaining ball processing (A2613). For example, in the small win remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" related to the special game normal processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

When the process based on the special game process number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special game 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special game 1 display 51 (A2614), and then executes a pattern change control process for the special game 1 display 51 (A2615). Then, after preparing a special game 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special game 2 display 52 (A2616), it executes a pattern change control process for the special game 2 display 52 (A2617). Next, it executes a lever solenoid control process (A2618) that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so that the lever solenoid 86b is opened during a small win, and ends the special game process.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. FIG 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the start winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) (A2701), executes a hardware random number acquisition process (A2702), and
If there is no winning in the start winning slot 36 (A2703),
If the result of A2703 is "N", the process proceeds to step A2709. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the start winning hole 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is one in which a right shot is to be performed (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that the game state is not for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onwards. On the other hand, when the game state is for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "Y"), it prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A2705) and executes a presentation command setting process (A2706). In the presentation command setting process, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the presentation command is transmitted to the presentation control device 300.

That is, if the game is in the normal power support state (time-saving state), regardless of the probability state of the variable display game (high probability state/low probability state), a right-hit instruction notification command is prepared and the performance command setting process is executed. In this embodiment, left-handed hits are more likely to win at the start winning hole 36, and only right-handed hits can win at the normal variable winning device 37. Also, the game ball will not pass through the normal start gate 34 unless it is hit with the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), right-handed hits are more advantageous than left-handed hits, but if there is a win at the start winning hole 36 during the normal power support state (i.e., if a hit is made with the left during the normal power support state), a right-hit instruction notification command is sent to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 sends a notification (
A warning is displayed on the display device 41 etc. by displaying a right-hit instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the reservation information by the start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special chart start port switch common processing (A2
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hardware random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second start winning port (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning port (
If the result of A2711 is "N", the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is a winning in the second start winning hole (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether the normal electric role (the normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). When the normal electric role is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y")
), and proceed to processing of step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric device is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether normal power fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal wins in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrences (for example, 5), it is judged that normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can only win a game ball in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in such a closed state, the number of such winnings is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal wins counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of fraudulent occurrences (upper limit), it is judged that fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the reserved information by the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714), executes special chart start port switch common processing (A2715), and ends the start port switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in A2713 that normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring processing is also ended. That is,
Prevent further start-up stores from occurring.

[Special diagram start switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common processing in the start port switch monitoring processing (A2708, A
9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing start port switch common processing. The special drawing start port switch common processing is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input of the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first loads the start port signal output count, which is the number of times that information regarding the number of winnings at the start port switch to be monitored, between the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, is output to an external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901), updates the loaded value by +1 (A2902), and determines whether the output count will overflow (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
The updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and step A
The process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output count area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the output count has overflowed.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether the number of reserved special figures (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (A2905). If the number of reserved special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target start port winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch and the reserved number of special symbols to be monitored (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). Next, the game control device 100 extracts the jackpot random number of the special symbol variable display game that starts upon detection of the start port switch to be monitored, and
The random number of the big win symbol is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of the WM (A2910). Next, the random number of the small win symbol of the special symbol variable display game that starts upon detection of the start switch of the monitored object is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of the small win symbol (A2911). In addition, the random number of the support symbol for determining the time-saving symbol is extracted and saved in the random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In this embodiment, as described above, since a big win occurs by a V winning surely after a small win, it is not necessary to use a small win pattern random number, and step A2911 is optional and does not have to be executed. Also, since there is no small win result in the special chart 1 variable display game, if the start port switch to be monitored is the start port 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract a small win pattern random number.

In addition, the small hit pattern random number, support hit pattern random number, and jackpot pattern random number are used in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) and special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503) described below to determine the stop pattern number at the time of a small hit, the stop pattern number at the time of a support hit, or the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, and the small hit stop pattern pattern, support hit stop pattern, or jackpot stop pattern pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small win symbol random number, the support win symbol random number, and the big win symbol random number are each set independently.
By sharing two random numbers (common random numbers), the small winning pattern (the stopping pattern number at the time of the small winning, the stopping pattern of the small winning), the support winning pattern (the stopping pattern number at the time of the support winning, the stopping pattern of the support winning)
In other words, when determining a small winning symbol, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each small winning symbol, when determining a support winning symbol, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each support winning symbol, and when determining a large winning symbol, the range of the common random number may be divided and assigned to each large winning symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2913), and executes a special chart reservation information determination process (pre-determination process, pre-reading process) that can determine the result of the variation display game (game result) in advance (A29
14). In the special reserved information judgment process, the pre-reading stop pattern command corresponding to the stop pattern information (jackpot stop pattern, small win stop pattern, time-saving stop pattern, miss stop pattern) based on the saved jackpot random number and winning pattern random number (jackpot random number, small win pattern random number, support winning pattern random number), and the first half change number (number of the change before the reach) based on the saved change pattern random numbers 1 to 3
A pre-reading fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation after the reach) is set as a performance command. Then, a decorative special chart reserved number command corresponding to the start port switch and special chart reserved number to be monitored is prepared as a performance command (A2915), and a performance command setting process (A2916) is executed to end the special chart start port switch common process. In this way,
The game control device 100 constitutes a pre-determination means capable of determining the result of a variable display game in advance before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) serves as a start memory means for extracting a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and storing the predetermined number as a start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game, with an upper limit.
The start memory means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port (start winning port 36) as first start memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) as second start memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described in detail. FIG 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether or not a small win is occurring (A3001). If the special game processing number is "4" or "5", it can be judged that a small win is occurring. If a small win is occurring (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is judged whether or not a condition device is operating (A30
02) If condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the condition device is in operation.

When the condition device is not in operation (the result of A3002 is "N"), the game control device 100
It is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). If there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, if there is an entry to the specific area 86 (
If a winning combination (V win) occurs, condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the small win is not occurring (the result of A3001 is "N"), and the condition device is operating (A3
002 is "Y"), or there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003
If the result of step 3 is "N", the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated without performing any other action.

[Special chart normal processing]
Next, the details of the special chart normal processing (A2608) in the special chart game processing will be explained.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the normal role processing of the role game processing described later, and
It is determined whether the remaining ball counter of the large prize opening is 0 (A3200). If the reel is not in normal processing or the remaining ball counter of the large prize opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N
" ), and proceed to processing of step A3215 without starting the special chart change display game.

The game control device 100 is in the normal processing of the role and the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0.
If the result of A3200 is "Y", it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 1 (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206).
If the number of reserved tickets for special number 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has already started (A3211). If the customer waiting demo has not already started (A32
If the result of step 11 is "N", a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A
3212).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a performance command (
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A3211 (A32
11 is "Y"), and the processing number is set to "0" for the special chart normal processing (A3215
), the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (A3216), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special game normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100 is not a case where the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N
"), execute the special chart 2 variation start process (A3202), prepare the decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation number as a performance command (A3203
), execute the performance command setting process (A3204). Then, execute the special chart 2 during the change process transition setting process (A3205), and end the special chart normal process.

In the special chart 2 special chart change processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1", the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the changing flag is saved in the special chart 2 change control flag area.

In addition, the game control device 100 is not a case where the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N
"), execute the special chart 1 variation start process (A3207), and prepare a decorative special chart reservation number command (decorative special chart 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special chart 1 reservation number as a performance command (A3208
), execute the performance command setting process (A3209). Then, execute the special chart 1 during the change process transition setting process (A3210), and end the special chart normal process.

In the special chart 1 special chart change processing transition setting process, the processing number is set to "1", the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the change-in-progress flag is saved in the special chart 1 change control flag area.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 before checking the number of reserved special figures 1, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0, the special figure 2 change start process (A3202) will be executed. That is, the special figure 2 change display game will be executed in priority to the special figure 1 change display game (special figure 2 reservation priority consumption). In other words, when the second start memory is present in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the game control device 100 serves as a priority control means for executing the change display game based on the second start memory in priority over the change display game based on the first start memory. In addition, when the special figure 1 change display game is executed in priority to the special figure 2 change display game, the judgment of step A3201 may be made as to whether the number of reserved special figures 1 is ≠ 0.

[Special Chart 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special chart normal process will be described. Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 variation start process. The special chart 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special chart 1 change flag indicating the type of the special chart change display game to be executed (here, special chart 1) in the change pattern discrimination area (A3401). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process to set miss information or jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special chart 1 change display game is a jackpot or not (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 1 stop pattern setting process for setting the special chart 1 stop pattern (pattern information) for the special chart 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process, the stop pattern number at the time of loss, support hit, or jackpot, and the loss stop pattern, support hit stop pattern, or jackpot stop pattern corresponding to this stop pattern number are saved. The stop pattern number at the time of support hit or jackpot is determined corresponding to the support hit pattern random number and the jackpot pattern random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special chart information setting process to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special chart 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special chart 1 variation display game (A3405).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special chart 1 variation display game (A3406).
Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process to set information on the start of change of the special chart 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special chart 1 change start process. In the change start information setting process, a change time value corresponding to the change pattern (change pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as a presentation command, and a presentation command setting process is performed. Also, in the change start information setting process, the special chart reserved number related to the special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2) of the special chart change display game that is about to start is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special Chart 2 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 variation start processing (A3202) in the special chart normal processing will be described. Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 variation start processing. The special chart 2 variation start processing is a process performed at the start of the special chart 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special chart 1 variation start processing shown in Figure 12, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first determines the type of special chart variable display game to be executed (here, special chart 2).
The special chart 2 variable flag indicating the jackpot is saved in the variable pattern discrimination area (A3501). Next, a jackpot flag 2 setting process is executed to set miss information or jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for discriminating whether the special chart 2 variable display game is a jackpot or not (A3502).
).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 stop pattern setting process for setting the special chart 2 stop pattern (pattern information) for the special chart 2 variable display game (A3503). Furthermore, a special chart information setting process is executed to set the special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variable pattern (A3504). Next, a special chart 2 variable pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variable pattern of the special chart 2 variable display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, a variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special chart 2 variation display game (A3507) is executed, and the special chart 2 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special chart 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the jackpot flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM, prepared (A3602), and the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is the first in the consumption order (here, the first of the special chart 1). After that, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3606), and terminates the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), an optional support hit determination process is executed (A3607) to determine whether the special chart variable display game is a support hit or not based on the acquired jackpot random number value, and the result of the determination is determined to be a support hit or not (A3608). In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, the support hit (time-saving hit) of the special chart variable display game is a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special chart variable display game, and in response to this time-saving result, the performance control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a stop result of the decorative special chart variable display game.

If the special chart change display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601, saves it (A3609), and terminates the jackpot flag 1 setting process.
On the other hand, if the special chart change display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

Thus, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is either a "big win", a "support win (time-saving win)", or a "miss", and there is no "small win". Note that steps A3607-A3609 are optional, and they may be omitted and the result of the special chart 1 variable display game may not include a "support win (time-saving win)".
It is also possible to configure the result of the special chart 1 variable display game to include a "small win."

In addition, in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since jackpots and support hits do not overlap, the support hit information may also be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
This process is similar to the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in Figure 14, but is performed on the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the miss information in the big win flag 2 area, the small win flag 2 area, and the support win flag 2 area (A3701). Next, it loads the big win random number from the special chart 2 big win random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM, prepares it (A3702), and clears the special chart 2 big win random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3703). Note that reserved number 1 refers to the information about the special chart start memory that is the first to be consumed (here, the first of the special charts 2) (
Then, a small win determination process is executed to determine whether or not a small win has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared big win random number value matches the small win determination value (A3704).
).

If the result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3706), and terminates the big hit flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the special chart variation display game is not a small win (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a support win judgment process to judge whether the special chart variation display game is a support win or not based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3707), and judges whether the judgment result is a support win or not (A3708). In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used for the judgment of the support win (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support win judgment and the jackpot judgment). Here, the support win (time-saving win) of the special chart variation display game is a time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special chart variation display game, and in response to this specific result, the performance control device 300 can display a time-saving pattern on the display device 41 as a stop result of the decorative special chart variation display game.

If the special chart change display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the support hit information in the support hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701, saves it (A3709), and terminates the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (A3708
If the result of (A371 is "N") is "N", the game may optionally execute a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches a jackpot determination value (A371
0). When the result of the jackpot determination process (A3710) is a jackpot (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3712), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination process (A3710) is not a jackpot (the result of A3711 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process while saving the miss information in the jackpot flag 2 area.

Thus, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 2 variable display game will be either a "small hit," a "support hit (time-saving hit)," or a "miss," but it is also possible to optionally configure the special chart 2 variable display game to result in a "big hit."

In addition, in the big hit flag 2 setting process, small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area, and support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area, but since big hits, support hits, and small hits do not overlap, small hit information and support hit information may also be saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (
A3604, A3710) will be described in detail. Figure 16A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process.

First, the game control device 100 sets an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800
), a lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (A3801), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3802). A jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a jackpot random number is judged to be a jackpot when it is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value. The upper limit judgment value may be different between a low probability state (a normal probability state other than a high probability state) and a high probability state (a high probability state).

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A380
If the result of 2 is "Y", the judgment result is set to "miss" (other than a jackpot) (A3804), and the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

The game control device 100 judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "
If the result of A3803 is "Y"), a miss (other than a jackpot) is set as the judgment result (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a jackpot is set as the judgment result (A3805). Once the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. Figure 16B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets a small win upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3
900), and determine whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special chart 2) is less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (A3901). A small jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the small jackpot judgment value. The small jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and a jackpot random number is determined to be a small jackpot when it is equal to or greater than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small jackpot judgment value, and equal to or less than the small jackpot upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the small jackpot judgment value. The small jackpot upper limit judgment value may be different between a low probability state (a normal probability state other than a high probability state) and a high probability state (a high probability state).

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being both a small win and a big win, the range of the small win judgment value (between the small win lower limit judgment value and the small win upper limit judgment value) does not overlap with the range of the big win judgment value (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value).
No unique small win random number is set, and the big win random number is also used to determine small wins, but it is also possible to configure a unique small win random number.

If the value of the big win random number of the target (special chart 2) is less than the small win lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a miss as the judgment result (A3903),
The small hit determination process ends.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small jackpot lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special chart 2) is greater than the small jackpot upper limit judgment value (A3902). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small jackpot upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the judgment result to "miss" (A3903).
On the other hand, if the value of the big win random number is not greater than the small win upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "
N"), and set a small hit as the judgment result (A3904). After the judgment result is set, the small hit judgment process is terminated. In this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability may be other values.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, the details of the support hit determination process (A3607, A3707) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 16C is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. The support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special chart reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a support hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (
A7001). Next, a lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (A7002), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). A support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and it is judged to be a support hit when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the support hit judgment value, and is equal to or less than the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the support hit judgment value. The support hit upper limit judgment value is
It may be different between a low probability state (a normal probability state other than a special probability state) and a high probability state (a special probability state).

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special chart variable display game being a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (between the support hit lower limit judgment value and the support hit upper limit judgment value) does not overlap with the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value and small hit judgment value. In this embodiment, a support hit random number is not set independently, and a big hit random number is also used to judge a support hit, but a configuration in which a unique support hit random number is set is also possible.

The game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value for the jackpot (
The result of A7003 is "Y", and the judgment result is set to "miss" (other than support hit) (A70
05) End the support hit determination process.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value of the support hit (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value of the support hit (A7004). When the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value of the support hit (the result of A7004 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a miss (other than a support hit) as the judgment result (
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value for the jackpot (A70
If the result of step 04 is "N", the support hit is set as the judgment result (A7006). After the judgment result is set, the support hit judgment process is terminated.

In the support hit determination process, the support hit determination (time-saving determination) is performed by a lottery using the jackpot random number value. In the support hit determination (time-saving determination) as a lottery, when the jackpot random number value matches the support hit determination value (time-saving determination value), the support hit result (time-saving result, specific result) is obtained as the determination result, and the time saving is set. The support hit determination value is different from the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value.

In order to add some variety, the probability of winning the support hit (range of the support hit judgment value ÷ range of the jackpot random number) may be different for each probability setting value, or for simplicity, the probability of winning the support hit may be the same for each probability setting value. Setting 1 (or the low setting side) is more likely to win the support hit,
The winning probability of the support hit may be set so that it is difficult for the setting 6 (or the high setting side) to win the support hit, thereby mitigating the disadvantage of the low setting, or conversely, it may be set to match the expectations of players who expect that it is easier to win the support hit on the high setting side. Also, the winning probability of the support hit may be changed monotonically from setting 1 to setting 6, or it may not be monotonous, such as changing every two stages of the setting. The winning probability of the support hit may be made different between the even setting and the odd setting to increase the interest of the player in estimating the probability setting value.

In addition, the probability of winning the support hit may be different between low probability (outside of the probability of winning) and high probability (during the probability of winning), or it may be the same for simplicity.
You can set the probability of winning a support hit to mitigate the disadvantage of low probability, or you can set it the other way around.
This may be in accordance with the expectations of players who expect that they will be more likely to win the support prize during the high probability period. For example,
The probability of winning the support hit may be set so that the support hit is won only during low probability periods (the probability of winning the support hit is zero during high probability periods), thereby mitigating the disadvantage during low probability periods.

In addition, the winning probability of the support hit may be different between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game to add contrast, or may be the same for simplicity. For example, in order to increase the number of support hits in the normal power support state (time-saving state or probability change state), the winning probability of the support hit in the special chart 2 variable display game may be made higher than that of the special chart 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to improve the interest of the game in the normal game state, the winning probability of the support hit in the special chart 1 variable display game may be made higher than that of the special chart 2 variable display game. In short, the winning probability of the support hit in one of the special chart 1 variable display games and the special chart 2 variable display game may be set to zero, so that the support hit occurs only in the other special chart variable display game.

When the result of the special chart variation display game is a support hit result (time-saving result), in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern pattern) is set as the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop pattern), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special chart variation display game. In other words, in this case, the time-saving state is suddenly entered without going through a jackpot (sudden time-saving). In addition, in this case, a decorative special chart command corresponding to the time-saving pattern is transmitted to the performance control device 300, and the time-saving pattern (decorative time-saving pattern) is also displayed as a decorative stop pattern by the performance control device 300 on the display device 41.

The time-saving pattern displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, a "
There are no restrictions on the time-saving symbols if they are decided in advance, but it is preferable for players to remember patterns that have a pattern, such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right symbols are aligned. Multiple time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of special symbol variable display games that continue the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) may be determined for each time-saving symbol.

The lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving pattern), unlike in the case of a big win or small win. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a big win or small win, and may emit light in a neutral color or a cool color (i.e., a color other than a warm color) such as green or blue in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving pattern). Also, they are turned off in the case of a miss. Therefore, when the time-saving pattern is displayed as the stop pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that a big win has occurred, and it is easy for the player to understand that he or she has won the time-saving.

In addition, when the number of times of the special chart variation display game (excluding the number of times in the probability variation state) executed after the end of the big win state reaches a predetermined number (so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), the time-saving state (play time) will be entered even if the support hit is not won. At this time, if the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, the lamp display units 1 and 2 will be in an off state, and if it is a small hit or a big hit, they will emit light in a warm color. In addition, at this time, if it is not a small hit or a big hit, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light as a fourth pattern in a cool color so that the player can easily recognize that the time-saving state will be entered. The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, a miss pattern (which may be a time-saving pattern) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) is displayed as a stop pattern on the special chart display device or display device 41, and the time-saving state will be entered from the next special chart variation display game. In this case, the time-saving symbol displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left and center symbols are aligned (as in the case of time-saving due to a support hit, "1, 1,
3" is also acceptable).

[Special chart 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) in the special chart 1 variable start process will be described. Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001).
If it is a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the jackpot random number is loaded from the special jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, the special jackpot random number table is set (A4003), and the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot random number is obtained and saved in the special jackpot random number area of the RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 1 big win stop pattern information table (A40
05), the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the stop pattern area (A4006). The stop pattern is the special pattern display (here, special pattern 1 display 5
This is for setting the stopping symbols in the display device 41) and the stopping symbols in the display device 41. Then, the information on the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the stopping symbol number is obtained and saved in the information area of the upper limit of the number of rounds for special symbol 1 of the RWM (A4007), and the information on the fanfare corresponding to the stopping symbol number is obtained and saved in the fanfare information area (A4008). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The time-saving judgment data is saved in the time-saving judgment data area (A4009). The time-saving judgment data includes information on whether or not the time-saving state is in effect after the end of the jackpot (time-saving or no time-saving), and is used in the special chart 1 jackpot end processing and special chart 2 jackpot end processing described later. Next, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop pattern (or stop pattern number, pattern A described later) is saved (A4010). Then, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, if the big win flag 1 is not a big win (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether the support win flag 1 is a support win (A4
011). When the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (result of A4011 is "Y"), a random number is loaded from the special chart 1 support hit pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4012), and the special chart 1 support hit pattern table is set (A4013). Then, by referring to the special chart 1 support hit pattern table, the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area (A4014). Next, the stop pattern pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the stop pattern pattern area (A4015). After that, time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4016).
The presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is saved (A4017).
Proceed to processing of step A4020.

On the other hand, when the big win flag 1 is not a big win (the result of A4001 is "N") and the support win flag 1 is not a support win (the result of A4011 is "N"), the game control device 100
"), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special pattern 1 stop pattern number area (A4018), and the loss stop pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area (A4019). After that, the process moves to step A4020. Note that if the process related to the support hit (A3607-A3609) is not executed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), the process moves to step A4018 without executing steps A4011-A4017.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special symbol 1 command in the decorative special symbol 1 command area as a performance command (A4020). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a performance command setting process (A4021). As a result, the decorative special chart 1 command is transmitted to the performance control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4022), and clears the special pattern 1 big win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). After that, the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process is terminated. In addition, by the above-mentioned pattern fluctuation control process, the stop display of the stop pattern (big win pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern pattern or the stop pattern number is executed on the special pattern 1 display 51.

[Special chart 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, whether small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A4101).
If it is a small win (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special chart 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, the special chart 2 jackpot pattern table is set (A4103), and the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded jackpot pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area of the RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In this embodiment, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by a small win, and the game ball enters the V, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so even if the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win (small win flag 2 is a small win), the big win pattern random number is loaded. However,
It is also possible to load the small winning symbol random number (A2911) and obtain the stop symbol number corresponding to the small winning symbol random number. In this configuration, when a V is won (the result of A3003 in FIG. 10 is "Y"),
When the number of the winning symbols is reached, the random number of the winning symbols is loaded, the number of the symbols to be stopped is obtained, and step A4107 is performed.
The processing from A4110 onwards may be executed.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special chart 2 big win stop pattern information table (A41
05), the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the stop pattern area (A4106). The stop pattern is the special pattern display (here, the special pattern 2 display 5
2) and the display device 41. Then, the information on the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the number of stopped symbols is obtained and saved in the area of the upper limit of the number of rounds for special symbol 2 of the RWM (A4107), and the information on the fanfare corresponding to the number of stopped symbols is obtained and saved in the area of the fanfare information (A4108). These pieces of information are used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The time-saving judgment data is saved in the time-saving judgment data area (A4109). The time-saving judgment data includes information on whether or not the time-saving state is in effect after the end of the jackpot (time-saving or no time-saving), and is used in the special chart 1 jackpot end processing and special chart 2 jackpot end processing described below. Next, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop pattern (or stop pattern number, pattern B-G described below) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit or not, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4102 and subsequent steps, but a special chart 2 big hit pattern table or a special chart 2 big hit stop pattern information table different from the case of a small hit may be used.

The game control device 100 determines whether the big win flag 2 is a big win or not (the result of A4111 is "N
"), and judge whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit or not (A4112). If the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A4112 is "Y"), a random number is loaded from the special chart 2 support hit pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4113), and the special chart 2 support hit pattern table is set (A4114). Then, the special chart 2 support hit pattern table is referenced to obtain the stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded random number, and saved in the special chart 2 stop pattern number area (A4115).
115). Next, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in a stop symbol pattern area (A4116), and time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in a time reduction judgment data area (A4117). After that, performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and the process proceeds to step A4121.

The game control device 100 determines that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N")
If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4111 is "N") and the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A4112 is "N"), the stop pattern number at the time of the miss is saved in the special 2 stop pattern number area (A4119), and the stop pattern of the miss is saved in the stop pattern area (A4120). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

In this embodiment, since a "big win" is not provided as a result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing of step A4111 is optional and does not need to be executed. That is, if the big win flag 2 is not a small win (the result of A4101 is "N"), step A4111 may not be executed and the processing may proceed to step A4112.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special symbol 2 command in the decorative special symbol 2 command area as a performance command (A4121). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4122). The decorative special chart 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4123), and clears the special pattern 2 big win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). In addition, when the small win pattern random number (A2911) is extracted, the special pattern 2 small win pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process is terminated. In addition, by the above-mentioned pattern fluctuation control process, the stop display of the stop pattern (big win pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern pattern or the stop pattern number is executed on the special pattern 2 display 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution means for executing the special chart 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the first start winning port 36, and for executing the special chart 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The game control device 100 also serves as a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the judgment result by the judgment means (game control device 100).

[Special drawing information setting process]
Next, the special chart information setting process in the special chart 1 change start process and the special chart 2 change start process (A340
4, A3504) will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the allocation of the variation, and the presentation mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the allocation of the variation. The presentation mode is set to one of multiple presentation modes depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc. It is to be noted that the allocation of the variation may be performed directly based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variable group selection pointer table (A
4201), obtain a first half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the performance mode information (A4
202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203).
Then, offset data corresponding to the target special chart reserved number (special chart 1 reserved number or special chart 2 reserved number) and the stopping pattern is obtained (A4204).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 1 area (A4206
). In this way, the fluctuation distribution information 1 area is saved with the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the reserved number, and the performance mode. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation state before the start of the reach), and is used later to select the fluctuation group. However, depending on the specifications of the machine, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of a miss when there are many reserved numbers, so in other cases than a miss, the reserved number does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes multiple fluctuation patterns, and when deciding the fluctuation pattern, first a fluctuation group is selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation group.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variable group selection pointer table (A
4207), and obtain a latter half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the performance mode information (A4
208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209).
, obtain offset data corresponding to the target special reserved number and the stop pattern pattern (A42
10).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information 2 area (A4212).
), and the special chart information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable allocation information 2 generated based on the type of stopped pattern, the reserved number, and the performance mode is saved in the variable allocation information 2 area. This variable allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half of the variation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a variable group. However, since the occurrence rate of the reach changes according to the reserved number only in the case of a miss (the occurrence rate of the reach decreases when the reserved number is large), the reserved number does not affect the allocation of the latter half of the variation in the case of a non-miss.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process (A
20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable pattern setting process.

The variation pattern is composed of a first half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the start of the special chart variation display game to the reaching state, and a second half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the reaching state to the end of the special chart variation display game, and the second half variation pattern is set first and then the first half variation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A430
1), obtain and prepare the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (A4302), and load and prepare the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the latter half fluctuation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the winning one is 1 byte size, and the losing one is 2 byte size. Since the occurrence rate of winning is lower than the occurrence rate of losing, and 1 byte is sufficient, the winning one is 1 byte size from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, when winning, only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used. Also, since the occurrence rate of losing is higher than the occurrence rate of winning, and more diverse performances are desired to appear, the losing one is 2 byte size.

Then, the game control device 100 judges whether the result of the special chart variable display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), it performs a 2-byte allocation process (A4305) and proceeds to the process of step A4307. Also, if it is not a loss (the result of A4304 is "N"), it performs an allocation process (A4306) and proceeds to the process of step A4307.
Proceed to processing 4307.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the address of the latter half variation selection table (later half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation, prepares it (A4307), loads the variation pattern random number 2 from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepares it (A4308). Then, executes the allocation process (A4309), obtains the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, and saves it in the latter half variation number area (A4310). This process sets the latter half variation pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation allocation information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, it obtains and prepares the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer (A4313), and loads and prepares the fluctuation pattern random number 3 from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4314). After that,
The allocation process (A4315) is performed, the first half variable number obtained as a result of allocation is obtained, and the first half variable number is saved in the first half variable number area (A4316), and the variable pattern setting process is terminated. This process sets the first half variable pattern, and the variable pattern of the special chart variable display game is set. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a variable pattern setting means for setting the variable pattern, which is the execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of patterns.

[2-byte allocation process]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variable pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte allocation process.
The byte allocation process is a process for selecting a second half variation selection table of a special chart variation display game from a second half variation group table based on variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302) is a code for no allocation (i.e., "0") (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but if the latter half fluctuation pattern is "
In the case of a latter half fluctuation group table that specifies only a latter half fluctuation selection table that results in "no reach" (for example, some fluctuation group tables when the result is a miss), there is no need for allocation, so an allocation value of "0", i.e., a code for no allocation, is specified at the beginning.

If the first data in the selection table (later variable group table) is a code without allocation (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (A4407) and ends the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (later variable group table) is not a code without allocation (the result of A4402 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the first allocation value specified in the selection table (later variable group table) (A4403).

Next, the allocation value obtained in step A4403 is subtracted from the random number value prepared in step A4303 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random number value (A4404).
Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address is updated to the next allocation value (A4406), and the process proceeds to step A4403 to carry out subsequent processes. That is, the next allocation value specified in the selection table (later variable group table) is obtained (A4403), and then the previous allocation value in step A4405 is obtained.
A new random number is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number determined in (A44).
04) and determine whether the newly calculated random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above process is repeated until the new random number value is determined to be smaller than "0" in step A4405 (A4
This is executed until the result of step A4405 is "Y"). This causes one of the at least one latter half variation selection tables defined in the selection table (later half variation group table) to be selected. Then, in step A4405, if it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocated result (A4407), and the 2-byte allocation process is terminated.

[Allocation process]
Next, the allocation process in the variable pattern setting process (A4306, A4309, A43
15) will be described in detail. Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the allocation process. The allocation process is a process for selecting a latter half variation pattern of the special chart variation display game from the latter half variation selection table (later half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or for selecting a first half variation pattern of the special chart variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the first data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in A4302, the latter half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A4313) is a code without allocation (i.e., "0") (A4501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined allocation value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, a latter half fluctuation pattern (later half fluctuation number), or a first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value "0", that is, the code without allocation, is specified at the beginning.

Then, if the first data of the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is a code without allocation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (A4507) and ends the allocation process. On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (later variable group table, later variable selection table, or first variable selection table) is not a code without allocation (the result of A4502 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the target selection table (
A first allocation value specified in the second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table is obtained (A4503).

Next, the game control device 100 subtracts the allocation value obtained in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 to calculate new random number values (A45
04) and determine whether the newly calculated random number value is less than "0" (A4505).
If the new random number is not less than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"),
After updating the address to the next allocation value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503 and subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the allocation value defined next in the target selection table (later fluctuation group table, later fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503), and then a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the allocation value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4505 (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505).
" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), whereby one of the second half fluctuation selection tables, second half fluctuation patterns (second half fluctuation numbers), and first half fluctuation patterns (first half fluctuation numbers) is selected from at least one of the second half fluctuation selection tables, second half fluctuation patterns (second half fluctuation numbers), and first half fluctuation patterns (first half fluctuation numbers) defined in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation selection table).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result (A4507) and terminates the allocation process.

[Variable start information setting process]
Next, the change start information setting process (A
23 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting fluctuation start information.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the variable display game to be started is the special chart 2 variable display game (A4600a). If the variable display game to be started is not the special chart 2 variable display game but the special chart 1 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), the random number storage area of the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (A4601). Next, a first half variable time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variable time value corresponding to the first half variable number is obtained (A4603).
Furthermore, a latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and a latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is obtained (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (A460
6) The added value (total variable time value) is saved in the special game processing timer area (A4607).
Then, prepare the change command (MODE) corresponding to the first half change number (A4608),
Prepare the ACTION command corresponding to the second half of the change number as a performance command.
A4609), and a performance command setting process is performed (A4610). Next, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag indicating the symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) to be changed is updated by -1 (
A4611), and set the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (A4
612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free space after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

When the variable display game to be started is the special chart 2 variable display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 first judges whether the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (A4600b). When the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the variable display game to be started is the special chart 1
In the same manner as in the case of the variable display game, the processing from step A4601 onward is executed. Note that, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a support hit, step A460
The configuration may be such that the processes from step 1 onwards are executed.

When the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, when the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a miss result, the game control device 100 saves the variable time value (total variable time value) corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the big win ends in the special chart game processing timer area (A4615).
.

Therefore, the variable time value of the special chart 1 variable display game and the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are set by allocation (lottery) and are not fixed, while the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a miss is a fixed time value that is set for each number of times that the special chart 2 changes after the big hit ends. In other words, the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game is controlled by the number of rotations. It is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit to be a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 issues a variable command (MODE, AC
The CPU 41 prepares a performance command (A4616) and executes the processing from step A4610 onwards.

In addition, when the support state (support state, normal power release pattern) relating to the state (content) of the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the fluctuation time value may be set not only to correspond to the number of times the special chart 2 fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, but also to correspond to the support state.

By the above process, information regarding the start of the special chart change display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). The game control device 100 also serves as a variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game based on the determination information in the start storage.

Then, information regarding the start of these special symbol variation display games is later transmitted to the performance control device 300, and the performance control device 300 sets detailed performance content in the decorative special symbol variation display game according to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of information regarding the start of the special symbol variation display game. Information regarding the start of these special symbol variation display games includes a decorative special symbol reservation number command including information regarding the start memory number (reservation number), a decorative special symbol command including information regarding the stop symbol, and a variation command including information regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display game, and the commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special symbol command before the variation command, the processing in the performance control device 300 can be efficiently performed.

[Special chart change processing]
Next, the details of the special chart change process (A2609) in the special chart game process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart change process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the special symbol 2 is changing (the special symbol 2 change display game is being executed) (A4801). If the special symbol 2 is not changing, that is, if the special symbol 1 is changing (the special symbol 1 change display game is being executed) (the result of A4801 is "N"), the display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (A4802).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in the process of changing the special chart 2 (the result of A4801 is "Y")
, judge whether the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (A480
3). When the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small win or a big win (the result of A4803 is "Y"), a display time corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stopped pattern (stop display) which is the result of the variable display game. Note that, unlike this embodiment, even if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a support hit, the configuration may proceed to the processing of step A4802.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is not a small win or a big win,
That is, in the case of a miss (the result of A4803 is "N"), the number of times the special chart 2 changes after the big win (
A display time corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed is set (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special chart 1 variable display game and the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win are not fixed based on the stopping pattern pattern set by lottery, while the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a miss is fixedly set for each special chart 2 variation number (the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) after the end of the big win. In addition, it is also possible to configure the display time of the special chart 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be fixed.

In addition, as described later, when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern) regarding the state (content) of the normal power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special chart 2 after the end of the jackpot.
It may be set not only in accordance with the number of fluctuations but also in accordance with the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special game processing timer area (A4805).
0, it is determined whether normal power support is in progress (time-saving state) (A4806). If normal power support is not in progress (the result of A4806 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813.
If normal power support is in progress (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the change in the special chart 1 change display game has occurred (A4807). If the change in the special chart 1 change display game has occurred (A48
07 is "Y"), and processing proceeds to step A4810.

If the special chart 2 variation display game is changed (the result of A4807 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening variation count 2 by -1 (decreases by 1) (A4808) and determines whether the time-shortening variation count 2 is 0 (A4809). If the time-shortening variation count 2 is 0 (the result of A4809 is "Y"), it executes a time-shortening end setting process to set the end of the time-shortening (
A4812).

If the time reduction variation count 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N
"), update the time reduction change count 1 by -1 (decreasing it by 1) (A4810), and determine whether the time reduction change count 1 is 0 (A4811). If the time reduction change count 1 is not 0 (
If the result of A4811 is "N", the process proceeds to step A4813. On the other hand, if the time-saving variation count 1 is 0 (the result of A4811 is "Y"), the process executes a time-saving end setting process to set the end of the time-saving (A4812). After that, the process executes a performance mode information check process (A4813), which will be described later.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the special chart display processing transition setting processing (A4814
In the special chart display processing transition setting processing, the processing number "2" related to the special chart display processing is set and the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special chart 1 display 51 is saved in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special chart 2 display 52 is saved in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area. After that, the special chart fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, the details of the time-saving end setting process (A4812) in the special chart change process will be described. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time-saving end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the signal regarding the time-saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal regarding the time-saving end is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, the signal regarding the time-saving end is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 is very short or the probability of winning the normal variable display game is very low, so there is no winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory does not occur. Therefore, at the time of the time reduction ending, the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory,
When a special chart 2 reserve remains as a remaining reserve, the output of on data for the jackpot 2 signal may continue (no inconvenience will arise even if this is done), and when the variable display of the special chart variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops, the output of off data for the jackpot 2 signal (a signal regarding the end of the time-saving feature) may be output to an external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the time reduction in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4902). As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time reduction is output to the test firing test device as a test signal. The signals regarding the end of the time reduction here are, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the normal electric role 1 opening extension state signal, and off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, a number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (A4903), a normal symbol low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4904), and a special symbol low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4905).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time-saving variation count 1 area of the RWM in which the time-saving variation count 1 is stored (A4906), and clears the time-saving variation count 2 area of the RWM in which the time-saving variation count 2 is stored (A4907). Then, the game control device 100 clears the signal regarding the left hit instruction to the R
Save the test signal output data area of the WM (A4908), and set the game status display number of the RWM to 2.
The number during the left-hit state is saved in the area (A4909).

After that, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (A49
10). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal gaming state, which is the period for calculating the base value (the ball payout rate in the normal gaming state). After that, the time-saving end setting process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, the time-saving state (a state with low probability of special charts and normal power support) is appropriately changed to a normal game state (a state with low probability of special charts and no normal power support).
can be transitioned to.

[Performance mode information check process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode information check process (A4813) during the special chart change process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the presentation mode information check process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the presentation mode is not changed according to the number of special chart variable display games that have been executed, and for example, a presentation mode that continues until the next big win is selected.

In addition, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (A50
If the result of step 01 is "N", the number of remaining spins of the special chart variable display game, which is the number of times the special chart variable display game can be executed until the change of the presentation mode, is updated by -1 (A5002), and it is determined whether the number of remaining spins of the presentation has become 0 (A5003). Here, the number of remaining spins of the presentation is updated by -1 only when the game executed this time is the main special chart variable display game, but it is also possible to configure it to be updated by -1 even when the game is a non-main variable display game.

Depending on the game state, one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game. For example, the main variable display game (master variable display game) is the one that is frequently executed among the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the special chart 1 variable display game.
Of the variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, this is the one that is executed less frequently. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the performance control device 300 may store information indicating the main variable display game (special chart 1 or special chart 2) depending on the game state, etc.

If the number of remaining spins for the effect is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the number of remaining spins for the effect is 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special chart change display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5004), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode change information is obtained (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the presentation mode number of the presentation mode to be transitioned to, and
The number of remaining rotations of the presentation mode to be switched to (initial value) is obtained and saved in the number of remaining rotations of the presentation mode to be switched to (A5007) in the RWM.
The next mode transition information for the presentation mode to be transitioned to is obtained and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

In addition, when the presentation mode is changed by the end of the time-saving state (time-saving variation count 1 or 2 = 0), the remaining number of presentation rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be changed to may be set to a specified remaining reserved number (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining reserved number is the number of special chart 2 reserved (remaining reserved) that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends, and is the number of special chart 2 variations after the time-saving state ends. The remaining reserved is generated by winning the normal variation winning device 37 that is opened by a normal chart hit during the time-saving state. In this way, the remaining reserved consumption mode (Fig. 54) can be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the remaining reserved (special chart 2 reserved, special chart 2 start memory).

Or, when the presentation mode is changed when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 opened by the normal winning during the time-saving state (corresponding to the later opening) is completed, the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be changed may be set to the number of reserved special figures 2 at that time. This allows the normal power opening end mode (Fig. 54A) to be set as the presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the reserved special figures 2 after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 opened by the normal winning during the time-saving state is completed. Furthermore, in this case, the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be changed by the end of the time-saving state (time-saving variable number 1 or 2 = 0) can be set to a predetermined value (for example, a value obtained by subtracting the number of time-saving times from 6) according to the number of time-saving times, to set the normal power opening end mode (Fig. 54A).

Furthermore, when switching the presentation mode due to the end of the time-saving state (time-saving fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0), the remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be switched is set to the special chart 2 at that time.
In this way, the remaining reserved number generated during time-saving consumption mode (FIG. 54B) can be set as a presentation mode corresponding to the consumption of the reserved number ...
For example, it can be set to a value (excessive reserved number) obtained by subtracting the number of remaining reserved consumed in the time-saving generated remaining reserved consumption mode from 10). In this way, the excess reserved consumption mode (FIG. 54B) can be set as the performance mode after the time-saving generated remaining reserved consumption mode.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on whether or not time reduction is enabled, and information on the presentation mode) corresponding to the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A5009), and judges whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

In addition, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the command area to be transmitted when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "N"), the prepared probability information command is saved in the command area to be transmitted when power is restored (A5011), and a performance command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a performance command (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a performance rotation number command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for the performance as a performance command (A5013), and executes a performance command setting process (A5014).
). This allows the performance control device 300 to obtain the number of rotations remaining for the performance. Next, a time-shortening change number command corresponding to the time-shortening change number 2 is prepared as a performance command (A50
15) and execute a performance command setting process (A5016).
00 can obtain the time-shortening variation count 2. The game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time-shortening variation count 1 as a presentation command and execute the presentation command setting process.

Next, when a new presentation mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether the new presentation mode is a left-hitting mode (A5017).
If the mode is not the left-hand hitting mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the mode is the left-hand hitting mode (the result of A5017 is "Y")
A left hit instruction notification command is prepared as a presentation command (A5018), a presentation command setting process is executed (A5019), and the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

In the above, the result of the determination as to whether the remaining number of spins for the effect is 0 (A500
Regardless of 3), a performance rotation count command corresponding to the updated remaining performance spin count (A5002) and a time-shortening change count command corresponding to the updated time-shortening change counts 1 and 2 (A4808, A4810) may also be prepared as performance commands, and the performance command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special chart display]
Next, the details of the special chart display process (A2610) in the special chart game process will be described. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart display process. Fig. 26A shows the first half of the special chart display process, and Fig. 26B shows the second half of the special chart display process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether or not the current execution is a variation of the special symbol 1 (A5101). In other words, it judges whether or not the display of the stopped symbol (stop display) is related to the special symbol 1 variation display game. If the current execution is a variation of the special symbol 1 (the result of A5101 is "Y"), it loads the jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clears the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and judges whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5104).
104).

The game control device 100, when the loaded big win flag 1 is a big win (A5104
If the result of step A5104 is "Y", the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5105), and the process proceeds to step A5106. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of step A5104 is "N"), step A511
Proceed to process 1.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5106).
In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number related to the special chart normal processing is set to 0, the processing number is saved in the special chart game processing number area, and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared. After that, the special chart display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the current execution is the change of the special chart 2 (A510
The process proceeds to step A5109. If the result of step A5109 is "Y", the process loads the jackpot flag 2 (A5107), and clears the jackpot flag 2 area (A5108). The loaded jackpot flag 2 is determined to be a jackpot or not (A5109). If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of step A5109 is "Y"),
The condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5110), and the process proceeds to step A5106. If the big win flag 2 is not a big win (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small win or a miss, step A5106 is performed.
The process proceeds to step 111.

In this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the processing from step A5107 to A5110 is optional and may not be executed. That is, after step A5101, the processing may proceed to step A5111.

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the special chart is currently in a high probability state (in a high probability state) (A5111). If the special chart is not in a high probability state (the result of A5111 is "N"), it judges whether or not there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed has reached the ceiling number of times (time-saving ceiling) (A5112).

If there is no ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"), the game control device 100
), the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area of the RWM is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (A51
13). Then, it is determined whether the number of times the special chart variable display game (including the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) has been executed has reached the ceiling number of times (A5114). For example, the ceiling number of times is 500 times. If the ceiling number of times has been reached (the result of A5114 is "Y")
A ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving will occur and a ceiling-reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (ON) (A5115). Note that the ceiling time-saving activation flag and the ceiling-reached flag may be combined into a single flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, if the ceiling count is reached once and the time-saving count ends without a jackpot, the ceiling reached flag remains set (on), so the ceiling time-saving will not occur from then on and the ceiling counter value will not be updated.

On the other hand, if the special chart has a high probability of winning (in a special bonus state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling-reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), or if the ceiling number of times has not been reached (the result of A5114 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small win flag 2 indicates a small win or not (A5116).

Next, when the small win flag 2 is a small win (the result of A5116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a small win fanfare command as a performance command (A5117
), execute the effect command setting process (A5118). Then, the decorative special chart 2 command is loaded from the decorative special chart 2 command area as an effect command, prepared (A5119), and execute the effect command setting process (A5120). After that, execute the small win opening pre-processing transition setting process (A5121), and end the special chart display process.

In the small win opening pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small win opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area, and the small win opening pre-time (for example, 300m
s) is saved in the special game processing timer area. Also, the signal regarding the start of the small win game (
For example, the big hit 1 signal is turned on (output on big hit or small hit) and saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, that is, when it is a miss (the result of A5116 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving occurs (A5122). When there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag (the result of A5122 is "Y"), the initial value that becomes the ceiling time-saving number (the number of time-saving times due to the ceiling time-saving) is saved in the time-saving fluctuation number 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation number 2 area (A5123). The initial values of the time-saving fluctuation number 1 and the time-saving fluctuation number 2 in the case of the ceiling time-saving described above (for example, 704 times and 700 times) are saved here. The initial values may be determined by lottery. Next, in order to generate a time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving, a support operation setting process is executed (A5127), a special chart normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the special chart display processing is terminated. In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number "0" relating to the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

When there is no ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time-saving will occur (the result of A5122 is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit or not (
A5124). And if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5124 is "
N"), and the support hit flag 1 determines whether or not it is a support hit (A5125).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data in the time reduction variation count 1 area and the time reduction variation count 2 area (A5126).
The initial values of the time-saving fluctuation count 1 and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 in the case of the support hit result (sudden time-saving) described above (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) are saved here. Next, the support operation setting process is executed (A5127) to generate a time-saving state (sudden time-saving) by the time-saving pattern, and the special pattern normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5128).
, end processing during special chart display.

In addition, since the time reduction judgment data is set corresponding to the stopping pattern number in the special chart 1 stopping pattern setting process (A3403) or the special chart 2 stopping pattern setting process (A3503), the initial value in the case of a support hit result (i.e., the number of time reductions) is determined by lottery using the support hit pattern random number.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hits (the results of A5124 and A5125 are "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support activation setting process to set the time reduction, but executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5128), and ends the special chart display processing.

As described above, in the special chart display process, the setting of the time reduction is executed for the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction, such as the setting of the time reduction number (i.e., the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number). In addition, for the time reduction by the big win, that is, the time reduction that starts from the end of the big win state, the setting of the time reduction, such as the setting of the time reduction number, is executed in the big win end process.

In addition, the special chart display process is executed when the special chart game process timer in which the stop display time (A4805) is set reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), and is therefore executed when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special chart variation display game ends (approximately the same as when the next special chart variation display game starts if it starts), the time-shortening variation count (A5123, A5126) is set, and the time-shortening state due to the ceiling time-shortening and sudden time-shortening begins.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) during the special chart display process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of time-saving in the external information output data area (A5701). As a result, when the ceiling time-saving due to the ceiling number of times reached and the sudden time-saving due to the time-saving pattern (support hit) start, the signal related to the start of time-saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71.
This is then output to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the start of the time-saving is the on data of the jackpot 2 signal. Then, a timer initial value (e.g., 128 msec) is saved in the time-saving signal control timer area (A5702). This timer initial value is the time to output the jackpot 3 signal by the external information editing process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A5703). As a result, at the start of the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction, a signal related to the start of time reduction is output as a test signal to the test firing test device. The signals related to the start of time reduction here are, for example, on data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, on data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, on data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, on data of the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and on data of the normal electric role 1 open extension state signal. Then, a number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (A5704), a normal symbol high probability & time reduction flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area (A5705), and a special symbol time reduction flag is synthesized in the special symbol game mode flag area (A5706). Next, a signal regarding a right-hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and the number in the right-hit state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a presentation mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (A5709), and executes the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3404).
The address of a table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (A3503) is obtained (A5710), and the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode is obtained based on the table and saved (A5711). This allows the selection of the presentation mode to be transitioned to when the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction start.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode based on the table (A5712). For example, the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode is the number of time-saving times (the initial value of the time-saving variation number 1 or the time-saving variation number 2). This allows the same presentation mode to continue until the time-saving time ends, for example.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on the transition from the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving performance mode to the next mode, based on the table (A5
Then, a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number is prepared as a presentation command (A5714), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A5715), and a presentation command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A5716).
The probability information command includes information on the probability state, whether or not time saving (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation number command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for the presentation as a presentation command (A5717), and executes a presentation command setting process (A5718).
Then, a time-saving change count command corresponding to the time-saving change count 1 and the time-saving change count 2 (here, the time-saving count which is the initial value) is prepared as a performance command (A5719
), and executes the performance command setting process (A5720).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction judgment data area (A5721),
The presentation mode transition information area is cleared (A5722), and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

[Gem Game Processing]
Next, the details of the bonus game process (A1312b) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the bonus game process. In the bonus game process, the whole process related to the big win state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes the lower large winning port switch monitoring process (A5601).
In the lower large winning port switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the bonus game processing timer by -1 if the bonus game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A5602). By updating by -1, the reel game processing timer will count only the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. The minimum value of the reel game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the reel game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the reel game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the reel game processing is terminated.

When the bonus game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "
Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a bonus game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the process corresponding to the bonus game processing number is set in a register (A5604). Furthermore, the bonus game sequence branch table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the bonus game processing number (A5605).
Next, a subroutine call is made based on the bonus game processing number, and game branching processing according to the bonus game processing number is executed (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A5606, the game control device 100
The normal feature processing is executed to set the start of the big win (A5607). For example, in the normal feature processing, the processing number "1" for the fanfare processing is set in a predetermined case and saved in the feature game processing number area. Details of the normal feature processing will be described later in FIG. 29.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A5606, the game control device 100
Execute fanfare processing (A5608). For example, in fanfare processing,
The processing number for the interval processing is set to "2" and saved in the bonus game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A5606, the game control device 100
Execute the interval processing (A5609). For example, in the interval processing, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the lower large prize opening time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the on data is saved in the lower large prize opening solenoid output data area, the round command is set as the performance command, and the processing number "3" related to the jackpot opening processing is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, whereas if it is the final round, an ending command is set, and a jackpot open process is executed to set information required for jackpot remaining ball processing (A5610). For example, in the jackpot opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, and the process number "4" for the jackpot remaining ball processing is set and saved in the bonus game process number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A5606, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is the final round, the remaining jackpot ball process is executed (A5611), which sets the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot opening to be discharged and sets information required for jackpot end processing. For example, in the remaining jackpot ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the bonus game process timer area, and the process number "2" related to the interval process is set and saved in the bonus game process number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the bonus game process timer area, and the process number "5" related to the jackpot end process is set and saved in the bonus game process number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A5606, the game control device 100
Performs the jackpot end process, such as setting the information necessary to execute the normal processing of the role
For example, in the jackpot end processing, based on the time reduction judgment data including the information on the presence or absence of the time reduction state after the jackpot end (time reduction or no time reduction), necessary information such as the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the jackpot end is set, and the processing number "0" for the normal processing of the role is set.
Set and save in the role game processing number area.

[Normal processing of role objects]
Next, the details of the normal feature processing (A5607) in the above-mentioned feature game processing will be described. Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal feature processing.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the condition device is in operation (A5801
When the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004,
A5005, A5010), that is, when there is jackpot information in jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or when there is a win in specific area 86 (V winning port) (input to specific area switch 72, V winning), it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. If the condition device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the normal processing of the reel is terminated.

When the condition device is in operation (result of A5801 is "Y"), the game control device 100
Then, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round number upper limit value area (A5802). Next, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), a probability information command (normal) is prepared as a performance command (A5804), and a performance command setting process is executed (
A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as a performance command (A5806), and executes a performance command setting process (A58
07). Then, the display special chart command (display special chart 1 command or display special chart 2 command) is loaded from the display special chart command area of the special chart that has been the current big win or small win, and prepared as a performance command (A5808), and the performance command setting process is executed (A5809).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves a signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). Then, it saves an initial value in the round number area (A5812).
5812). The initial value is 0 when the condition device is operating due to big win information, and is 1 when the condition device is operating due to a win in the specific area 86 (V win).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the fanfare processing transition setting process (A581
3) End normal reel processing. For example, in the fanfare processing transition setting process, the processing number for the fanfare processing is set to "1" and the processing number is saved in the reel game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the reel game processing timer area.

In the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction change count 1 area in which the time reduction change count 1 is stored, the time reduction change count 2 area in which the time reduction change count 2 is stored, the ceiling counter area in which the ceiling counter value is stored, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area in which the ceiling reached flag is stored. Also, the game control device 100 saves the normal low probability & no time reduction flag in the normal game mode flag area, and saves the special low probability & no time reduction flag in the special game mode flag area.

Furthermore, in the fanfare processing transition setting process, the game control device 100 saves signals relating to the start of a jackpot (special game state) (for example, turning on the jackpot 1 signal (output for a jackpot or small jackpot), turning on the jackpot 4 signal (output for a jackpot)) in the external information output data area. Then, signals relating to the end of the high probability state and the time-saving state (for example, turning off the special pattern 1 high probability state signal, turning off the special pattern 2 high probability state signal, turning off the special pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal,
Special pattern 2 variable time shortening state signal off, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal off, normal pattern 1
The variable time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal electric feature 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (A5612) in the above-mentioned bonus game process will be described. FIG 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether the time-shortening judgment data (A4009, A4109) is data with time-shortening or not (A6001). Data with time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will be entered after the end of the jackpot state. Data without time-shortening indicates that the time-shortening state (normal power support state) will not be entered after the end of the jackpot state.

When the time-shortening determination data indicates no time-shortening, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 1 to transition to a normal game state after the jackpot ends (A6002), and when the time-shortening determination data indicates time-shortening, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting process 2 to transition to a time-shortening state (normal power support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the presentation mode information address table (A6004), and sets the presentation mode transition information (A4010,
A6005 obtains the address of a table corresponding to the number of the presentation mode (A4110), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot state (A6006). This allows the selection of the presentation mode to be transitioned to after the end of the jackpot.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the presentation is the number of time-saving times (initial value of the number of time-saving variations) or the total number of time-saving times and the specified number of remaining reserved times (for example, 10 times). This allows the same presentation mode to continue, for example, after the end of a big win, until the time-saving times end, or until all of the special chart 2 variable display games related to the remaining reserved times are executed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on the transition from the presentation mode to the next mode set immediately after the end of the big win state (A6009). Then, the game control device prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A6009), saves the prepared probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (A6010), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the big win state, the presence or absence of time reduction (normal power support), and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation number command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (A6012), and executes a presentation command setting process (A6013).
And the number of time reduction changes (here, the initial value of the time reduction, for example, 5 times or less or 99
A time-shortening variation number command corresponding to the number of times is prepared as a performance command (A6014),
The performance command setting process is executed (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the presentation mode transition information area (A6016),
The normal reel processing transition setting process is executed (A6017), and the jackpot end process is terminated. In the normal reel processing transition setting process, in order to transition to the normal reel processing, the process number "0" relating to the normal reel processing is set, the process number is saved in the reel game processing number area, the condition device operation information area is cleared, and the time reduction judgment data area is cleared.

[Jackpot End Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal, the off data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the off data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. The jackpot end setting process 1 is a process for when there is no time reduction after the end of the jackpot state, so the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204) and saves a special game no time reduction flag in the special game mode flag area (A6
205). Then, the time-shortening change count area is cleared (A6206), and the collective display device 50
The number in the left-hit state is saved in the game status display number 1 area as the display data of the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D7) (A6207), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the off data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the off data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal regarding the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). The jackpot end setting process 2 is a process for entering a time reduction state (normal power support state) after the end of the jackpot state, so the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the start of the time reduction (in this embodiment, the jackpot 2 signal is output from the jackpot state, so the on state of the jackpot 2 signal continues).

Next, the game control device 100 turns on the second game status display unit 58 (lamp D
The number during time reduction is saved in the game status display number 2 area as the display data of 17 (A640
5) A high probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (A6406), and a special time-saving flag is saved in the special game mode flag area (A6407).

Next, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the special chart 2 variable display game has become a jackpot after the time reduction ends, that is, whether or not the special chart 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation has become a jackpot (
A6408). When the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot or when the special chart 2 variable display game is a jackpot during the time-saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count) corresponding to the stopped pattern (or stopped pattern number, pattern A-F described later) is saved in the time-saving variable count area (A6409), and the processing from step A6411 onwards is executed. Here, the time-saving variable count initial value (time-saving count) becomes the initial value of the time-saving variable count 2 (the first predetermined count described later). Note that in step A6409, the time-saving variable count 2
In addition to the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count (time reduction count), the initial value of the time reduction fluctuation count 1 (
For example, the initial value of the time-saving variation count 1 may be the initial value of the time-saving variation count 2 plus the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special chart 1 reservation count (first start memory count).

When the special chart 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot after the time reduction ends, that is, when the special chart 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation becomes a jackpot (the result of A6408 is "
Y"), and the time-shortening variation count initial value (time-shortening count, here 99) is saved in the time-shortening variation count area (A6410). Here, the time-shortening variation count initial value (time-shortening count) becomes the initial value of the time-shortening variation count 2 (the first predetermined count described later). Note that in step A6410,
In addition to the time-saving fluctuation count initial value (time-saving count) for the time-saving fluctuation count 2, the initial value of the time-saving fluctuation count 1 (the second predetermined count described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time-saving fluctuation count 1 is set to the initial value of the time-saving fluctuation count 2 by setting the maximum value of the special chart 1 reserved number (first start memory number) (
For example, it may be the sum of 4).

After that, the game control device 100 determines the stop symbol pattern (or the stop symbol number,
In response to step A6411, the type of the support state (support state, normal power release pattern), which is the state (state) of the normal power support, is saved in the support state area (A6411).
This process is optional and is executed when the support state regarding the mode (content) of normal power support is variable, as in the modified example described below.

Next, the game control device 100 turns on the first game status display unit 57 (lamp D
7) is saved in the game state display number 1 area as the display data of the right-hit state (A6
412), prepare a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A6413), execute the presentation command setting process (A6414), and end the jackpot end setting process 2.

[Fuzu Game Processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. The normal game process monitors the input of the gate switch 34a, controls the entire process related to the normal game change display game,
Set the display of general maps, etc.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The gate switch monitoring process will be described in detail later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if the timer is not 0 (1
The minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to 0 (A7603). The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the normal game processing timer has reached 0 (A7604).

If the value of the regular game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, if the time has run out or has already run out, the game control device 100 sets in a register a regular game sequence branch table to be referenced to branch to the processing corresponding to the regular game processing number (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game process number based on the set normal game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, it makes a subroutine call by the normal game process number and executes the game branch process according to the normal game process number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100
The start of the normal map change display game is monitored, and a normal map normal process is executed (A7608) to set the start of the normal map change display game, set the performance, and set information required for performing normal map change processing. The details of the normal map normal process will be described later.

In addition, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal map change process that sets information necessary for performing a normal map display process (A7609). For example, in the normal map change process, in order to transition to the normal map display process, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

In addition, in the case where the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal map variable display game is a win, the game control device 100 executes a normal map display process that sets the normal power release time and sets information necessary for performing a normal map win process (A7610). For example, in the normal map display process, if the result of the normal map variable display game is a win, the game processing number is set to "3" and saved in the normal map game processing number area in order to move to the normal map win process, while if it is a loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area in order to move to the normal map normal process.

In addition, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal winning process to continue the normal winning process or to set information required for normal remaining ball processing (A7611). For example, in the normal winning process, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, the game processing number is set to "4" and saved in the normal game processing number area in order to move to the normal remaining ball processing.

In addition, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal game remaining ball process that sets information necessary for performing a normal game end process (A7612). For example, in the normal game remaining ball process, in order to move to a normal game end process, the game processing number is set to "5" and saved in the normal game process number area, and the normal game ending time is saved in the normal game process timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal win end process (A7613) that sets information necessary for normal play processing (A7608). For example, in the normal win end process, in order to transition to normal play processing, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal play processing number area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 53 (A7614). Then, it executes a symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) by the normal symbol display device 53 (A7615), and ends the normal symbol game process.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7604
If the result of step A7612 is "N", that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A7614 and thereafter.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
34 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). And when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
The game control device 300 determines whether the game state is for right-hitting (A7702), i.e., whether the game state is for right-hitting (Y) or not. The game states for right-hitting are the jackpot state and the time-saving state (normal power support state). If the game state is for right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not for right-hitting (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-hitting instruction notification command (left-hitting instruction command) is prepared as a presentation command (A7703), and a presentation command setting process is executed (A7704). The presentation control device 300, which has received the left-hitting instruction notification command, executes a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit to the left on the display device 41, etc., by displaying a left-hitting instruction.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal figures and judges whether the reserved normal figure number is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). If the reserved normal figure number is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether the normal figure variation display game is changing (running) or in a normal figure winning state (A7706). If the normal figure variation display game is not changing or in a normal figure winning state (the result of A7706 is "N")
, the number of reserved normal maps is updated by +1 (A7707). In this way, the number of reserved normal maps is updated by +1 only when the normal map fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or the normal map hit state is not in progress, and the reserved normal map is consumed as soon as it is updated by +1, so the reserved normal map is not actually accumulated and becomes 1 only momentarily just before the normal map fluctuation display game starts (the number of reserved normal maps is essentially 0).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal symbols (A7708). Then, the game control device 100 extracts the winning random number and saves it in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), extracts the winning symbol random number and saves it in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7710), and ends the gate switch monitoring process.

On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), when it is determined that the number of reserved normal figures is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), or when the normal figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating or in the normal figure winning state (A7
If the result of step 706 is "Y", the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Regular electricity entry switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the normal power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the normal game process will be described. Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal power winning switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first judges whether or not a normal winning is occurring, that is, whether or not the normal winning display game is in a winning state and the normal winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations (A7801). Then, if a normal winning is occurring (the result of A7801 is "Y").
It is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the normal power counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the count number of the normal power counter to an upper limit value (for example,
Then, if the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM and saved in the normal hit control pointer area in the RWM (A7805).

Finally, the normal game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if a normal power winning occurs that is equal to or exceeds the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal winning process control pointer area at that point, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed so that the normal winning state is terminated midway.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal winning is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"), when it is determined that there is no input to the start hole 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N"), or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (A780
4 is "N"), and the regular power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Normal processing]
Next, the details of the normal game processing (A7608) in the normal game processing will be explained.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of reserved normal figures is 0 (A7901).
If the number of reserved regular figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the winning random number is loaded from the RWM regular random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the winning random number is stored in the RWM regular random number storage area (
A winning symbol random number is loaded from the normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the normal symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) after loading are cleared to 0 (A7902). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the probability of a winning result in the normal symbol variation display game is higher than normal, that is, whether or not the game is in a high normal symbol probability state (high probability state), i.e., whether or not the game is in a time-saving state (normal power support state) (A7903). Note that in this embodiment, the range of winning random numbers is 0 to 250, the probability of a normal symbol winning during the high probability state is 251/251, and the probability of a normal symbol winning during the low probability state is 0/251.
However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a normal figure in the low probability may be a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability state (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability state (A7904).
), if the probability of a normal drawing is high (the result of A7903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (here, 0), which is the lower limit judgment value during the high probability of a normal drawing, is set (A7905), and processing proceeds to step A7906.

The game control device 100 judges whether the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to both the high probability and low probability of winning. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
If the result is a miss, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
Y"), that is, in the case of a miss, the miss information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop pattern number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop pattern information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "
In other words, in the case of a win, the win information is saved in the win flag area (A7911), a win stop pattern number corresponding to the loaded win pattern random number is set (A7912), the win stop pattern information corresponding to the win stop pattern number is saved in the normal stop pattern information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. Note that here, there is only one type of winning stop pattern (normal winning pattern), but in the modified example described below, there may be several types.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal stop symbol area (A791
4), the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (A7915), the random number storage area per normal pattern is shifted (A7916), and the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7917).
), and update the number of reserved maps by -1 (A7918).

In other words, as the regular map change display game for the oldest regular map reserved number 1 is executed, the rankings of regular map reserved numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after regular map reserved number 1 are moved up one by one.
Through this process, the value for the regular map reservation number of 1 in the regular map random number storage area is cleared to 0, and the regular map reservation number is decremented by 1 to 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the information on the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of the normal power support, is variable, as in the modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal map fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal map game processing timer area (A7920). In addition, when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern), which is the state (state) of the normal power support, is variable as in the modified example described below, a variable normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set and saved in the normal map game processing timer area. Then, the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed (A7921), and the normal map normal processing is terminated. In addition, the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the number of reserved games is 0 (the result of A7901 is "
Y"), and set "0" as the processing number to move to normal processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal game fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the normal normal processing is terminated.

[General map change processing transition setting processing]
37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process. The normal map fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed in step A7921 in the normal map normal processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "1" to transition to normal game fluctuation processing.
(A8101), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8102
).

After that, the game control device 100 receives a signal regarding the start of the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol 1
The changing signal is turned on and saved in the test signal output data area (A8103), and a changing flag indicating that the normal map change display game is changing is saved in the normal map change control flag area (
A8104). Then, the blinking control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer for the blinking period of the normal map display, is saved in the normal map blinking control timer area (A8105), and the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the normal map variable pattern number area (A8106). After that, the normal map variable processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during the normal map fluctuation (A7609) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the normal map fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to the normal map display process (A8301), and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (
A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (normal map stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area (A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal pattern variation (turning off the normal pattern 1 variation signal) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, it saves a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern variation display game is stopped in the normal pattern variation control flag area (A8
305), and terminates the normal map change processing.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process during normal map display (A7610) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the winning flag (winning information or losing information) set in the normal processing (A8401) and clears the winning flag area of the RWM (A84
02). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

When the winning information is set in the winning flag, the game control device 100
If the result of the above is "Y", a win processing setting table is set (A8404), a win start pointer value (here 0) corresponding to the normal stop pattern information is obtained and saved in the normal win control pointer area (A8405). Also, a win end pointer value corresponding to the normal stop pattern information is obtained and saved in the normal win end pointer area (A8406). Next, a normal power release time (e.g. 3000 msec) corresponding to the normal stop pattern information is obtained and saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8407). Through the above processing, the normal variable winning device 3 during the time-saving state is
The opening mode of 7 is set, and for example, two openings are possible.
There is only one type of normal winning pattern, and the winning start pointer value, winning end pointer value, and normal power opening time are fixed. However, when the support state (support state, normal power opening pattern) for the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described below, the winning start pointer value,
The winning end pointer value and normal power release time may be set and saved in the normal game processing timer area.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "3" to transition to the normal winning process.
" is set (A8408), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A840
9). After that, the signal for the winning of the normal pattern variation display game (the signal for the winning of the normal pattern 1 is turned on)
Then, a signal regarding the start of normal power operation (normal electric feature 1 operation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8410). Furthermore, on data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area to output a signal to drive (turn on) the normal power solenoid (A8411).
.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), and clears the information in the normal power illegal winning number area that stores the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power illegal monitoring period (A8413). Finally, a flag that specifies the outside of the illegal monitoring period for the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal power illegal monitoring period flag area (A8414).

When the winning information is not set in the winning flag (A840
The result of 3 is "N", and "0" is set as the processing number to move to normal processing (A
8415), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8416).
The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the regular power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing during regular map display is terminated.

[Normal processing during the map]
Next, the details of the normal winning process (A7611) in the normal game process will be described. Figure 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal winning process.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the normal winning control pointer (A860
1) Determine whether the value of the loaded normal map hit control pointer has reached the normal map hit control pointer upper limit value (hit end pointer value) (A8602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal hit has not reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during normal hit (the hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the control pointer during normal hit by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, it executes normal power operation transition setting processing (A8604) and ends the normal hit processing. The details of the normal power operation transition setting processing will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during a normal win reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during a normal win (the win end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "Y"),
Without executing the process of updating (+1) the normal power hit processing control pointer area in step A8603, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal power hit processing is terminated.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) during the normal winning process will be described. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation transition setting process. The normal power operation transition setting process is a process that controls the drive of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal play) (A8701).
The value before updating is used. Examples of the control pointer are shown in FIG. 56, FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 described later. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37, and the wait time after the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer (normal power interval time, for example, 60,000 msec) is set.
) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8702). In addition, in the case where the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) regarding the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later,
The wait time (normal power interval time) may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (A8703), and terminates the normal power operation transition setting process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 moves to the processing of step A8704 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and saves the normal power opening time, which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). The normal power opening time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (e.g., 3000 msec). Furthermore, to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, on data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 10
In step A8706, the control of the normal variable winning device 37 is ended, and the normal remaining ball processing (A7612) is executed. In step A8706, "4" is set as the processing number (A8706).
), and save the processing number in the general game processing number area (A8707).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to set the normal power solenoid 37c to OFF, it saves OFF data in the normal power solenoid output data area (A8709).
), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated. Note that, in the case where the support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) regarding the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the normal power remaining ball processing time may be set in accordance with the support state.

[Processing of remaining normal electric bulbs]
Next, the details of the remaining normal ball processing (A7612) in the normal game processing will be described. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the remaining normal ball processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "5" for the normal winning end processing (A8
901), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A8902). After that, the normal game ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, normal power opening pattern) regarding the normal power support is variable as in the modified example described later, the normal game ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turning off the normal electric device 1 operation signal) in the test signal output data area (A8904).
Next, the normal count number area that counts the number of wins in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (A
Then, the control pointer area during the normal hit is cleared (A8905), and the normal hit end pointer area is cleared (A8906). After that, the normal hit end pointer area is cleared (A8907), and the normal hit remaining ball processing is terminated.

[Normal map termination processing]
Next, the details of the normal winning end process (A7613) in the normal game process will be described. Figure 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal winning end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number "0" for normal processing (A910
1), and furthermore, save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A9102).After that, save the signal regarding the end of the normal variable game win (the signal during the normal pattern 1 win is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (fraudulent monitoring period flag) that specifies the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A9104),
Thereafter, the normal hit end processing is terminated.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Fig. 44A and Fig. 44B are flow charts showing the procedure of the external information editing process. Fig. 44A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and Fig. 44B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the payout command sending process (A1307), the winning port switch/
Status monitoring process (A1310), magnet irregularity monitoring process (A1315), panel radio wave irregularity monitoring process (
Based on the monitoring results at the amusement center (A1316), the amusement center creates information to be output to external devices such as an information collection terminal or an amusement center internal management device, or to a test firing test device, and sets the information in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"),
Determine whether a main frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502).
If a main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9504).

When a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), the game control device 100
The on data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 increments the security signal control timer by -1 if the timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the timer has timed out) (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in the RAM by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or the like.
When the data stored in the RAM is initialized, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set (A1044 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer starts timing from the time the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A
9509), and the process proceeds to step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). If there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If there is no magnet fraud occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it further judges whether or not board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). If there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

If the game control device 100 is not experiencing any illegal radio waves (the result of A9511 is "N")
, and further determine whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). When there is a frame radio wave fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. When frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it can be determined whether or not large prize winning port fraud is occurring (A9513). Note that, when the prize winning port switch/status monitoring process saves the fraudulent winning occurrence flag for the large prize winning port in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that large prize winning port fraud is occurring. When the large prize winning port fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it can be determined whether or not normal power fraud is occurring (A9514). Note that, when the prize winning port switch/status monitoring process saves the fraudulent winning occurrence flag for the second start prize winning port of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that normal power fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not vibration fraud is occurring (A9515). Note that if there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), it determines whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A95
16) When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9516 is "N
"), and then it is determined whether or not a V passing error is occurring (A9517). If a detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passing error is occurring. If a V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9517 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error, which is an error related to the remaining ball, is occurring (A9518). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9518 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9519).

If a switch abnormality error such as a disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9519 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the off data of the game machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9520).
The result of A9519 is "Y"), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522).

On the other hand, if magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y
"), if board radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9511 is "Y"), if frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (the result of A9512 is "Y"), if large prize slot irregularity is occurring (A95
If the result of A9513 is "Y"), if a normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y"), if a vibration fraud is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (the result of A9516 is "Y"), if a V-pass error is occurring (the result of A9517 is "Y"), or if a remaining ball error is occurring (the result of A9518 is "Y"), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9521), and the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522). Depending on the setting of the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

After steps A9520 and A9522, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process to edit the winning signal of the start port (A9523). Then, it executes a main prize ball signal editing process to set information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9524), and executes a pattern determination count signal editing process to output a pattern determination count signal generated when the stop pattern of the special pattern variable display game is determined to an external device (A9525).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the time-saving signal control timer by -1 if the timer is not 0 (A95
26), it is determined whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 or not (A9527). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9527 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9527 is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9528), and the external information editing process is terminated.

In this way, when the ceiling time reduction due to the ceiling number of times reached and the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern (support hit) start, the on data of the big win 3 signal is sent to the game center internal management device (hall computer).
Such an external device is output via the external information terminal 71. Here, the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is output for the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time-saving signal control timer area in step A5702 of the support operation setting process described above. Conventional jackpot 1 to 4 signals were output during the period of a jackpot, etc., but the output of the jackpot 3 signal is an output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) that is much shorter than the period of a jackpot, etc.
For this reason, an external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that a time reduction has occurred due to a ceiling time reduction caused by reaching the ceiling number of times or a sudden time reduction caused by a time reduction pattern, without confusing it with a jackpot or a time reduction following a jackpot.

As described above, the jackpot 2 signal is output to the external device as external information for a long period of time during the jackpot state and in the time-saving state following the jackpot state (time-saving state due to the jackpot, first specific game state, first time-saving state). The jackpot 3 signal of the short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) is output to the external device as external information indicating the occurrence of a time-saving state due to a ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving (second specific game state, second time-saving state) in distinction from external information indicating a time-saving state due to a jackpot (long-term jackpot 2 signal), and is not confused by the external device.

As another configuration, only in the case of the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction, the jackpot 3 signal may be output for a fixed time at the start of the time reduction. Also, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of the sudden time reduction, in one of the time reductions, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output for a fixed time at the start of the time reduction.
For example, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output for the ceiling time reduction, and only the jackpot 3 signal may be output for the sudden time reduction (or vice versa). In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of the sudden time reduction, the jackpot 3 signal (or the jackpot 4 signal) may be output for the ceiling time reduction at the start of the time reduction,
For the sudden time reduction, a jackpot 4 signal (or a jackpot 3 signal) may be output. In this way, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time reduction and the occurrence of the sudden time reduction so that the external device can recognize it.

[External information or test signal transmission]
FIG. 45 is a time chart showing the transmission of external information or a test signal.

Figure 45 (A) shows a case where the last special chart change display game in the previous time-saving state (a special chart change display game in which the time-saving number of times is reached) has reached the ceiling number of times or the time-saving pattern has stopped, and the next special chart change display game leads to a later time-saving state (a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing when the previous time-saving state ends is the timing when the time-saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 24) is executed in the special chart change process, that is, the timing when the change display of the previous special chart change display game stops. Also, the timing when the subsequent time-saving state (ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving) starts is the timing when the time-saving change count (A5
12, A5126) is set, i.e., the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart change display game ends (approximately equal to the timing when the next special chart change display game starts if it is to start).

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special chart variable display game stops, the off data of the big win 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal related to the end of the time-saving by the time-saving end setting process in the special chart variable process and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and the off data of the variable time-saving state signal (special pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal, special pattern 2 variable time-saving state signal, normal pattern 1 variable time-saving state signal) as a signal related to the end of the time-saving is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test device (A4902). Therefore, the big win 2 signal as external information and the variable time-saving state signal as a test signal become off after the timing when the variable display of the previous special chart variable display game stops (after the previous time-saving ends).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special pattern variation display game ends, the on data of the big win 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the start of time reduction by the support operation setting process and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A5701), and a variation time shortening state signal (special pattern 1 variation time shortening state signal, special pattern 2 variation time shortening state signal, normal pattern 1 variation time shortening state signal) is output as a signal regarding the start of time reduction.
The on data of the test signal output data area is set and output to the test firing test device (A5703). Therefore, the big win 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal are turned on after the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends.

In this way, when the special chart variable display game (previous special chart variable display game) where the time reduction ends reaches the ceiling number of times or stops on the time reduction pattern, it becomes clear that the time reduction has ended. Also, by turning off the output of the external information (jackpot 2 signal) and the test signal (variation time reduction state signal, etc.) for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop pattern), when the time reduction is resumed, the on state of the output of the external information and the test signal can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 45 (B), in a conventional gaming machine, when the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends, the time-saving ends by the time-saving end setting process within the special chart display process. In the time-saving end setting process, the off data of the big win 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the end of the time-saving and is output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the off data of the variable time-saving state signal as a signal regarding the end of the time-saving is set in the test signal output data area and is output to the test firing test device.

For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal are turned off after the display of the stop result of the previous special chart variable display game ends, but at this timing, the jackpot 2 signal and the variable time shortening state signal are immediately turned on by the support operation setting process, so they are not actually turned off (
(The ON state is substantially continued.) Therefore, unlike this embodiment, in the conventional gaming machine, it is unclear that the time reduction has ended, and when the time reduction is resumed, the ON state of the external information and the test signal output is unclear.

[Control of the production control device]
The control (processing) that the performance control device 300 executes using the performance control program will be described below.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
First, the main processing executed by the performance control device 300 will be described in detail.
1A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the performance control device 300, the symbols (numbers) of the steps are represented as "B****".

When the performance control device 300 starts executing the main process, it first prohibits interrupts (
Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B
0003), and permit the interrupt (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the game control device 1
00, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the command reception device 100 is executed.

Next, the performance control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41, etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006).Then, the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Next, the performance control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period of time has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the performance control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC read process may be configured to read time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process moves to step B0009. The RTC read process may be configured to be executed only once when the power is turned on to the performance control device 300 (i.e., when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC read process may be changed, and it may be executed, for example, between steps B0003 and B0004). The performance control device 300 sets a time timer (timing means) that keeps time in a timer area in the RAM,
The RTC 338 is read at a predetermined interval and the time is read once when the power is turned on.
When time information is read from the RTC 338, the time timer (timekeeping means) may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. The performance control device 300 may then use the time timer to execute various processes. In this way, the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 can be reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance button input process to detect an operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (a signal from the performance button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) and to change the performance content (setting) according to the detected signal (B0010).
A hall/player setting mode process is executed (B0011) to accept operations such as changing the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals and the volume by the person in charge of the game arcade (game arcade) or the player. In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effects according to the effect points described below.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance point control process that adds or clears performance points (B0012). In the performance point control process, a process is performed in which performance points are added by executing a performance or operation that is the subject of the addition of performance points, and information including performance point information, for example, is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark) at the end of a game so that the performance points can be carried over to the next game. For example, the performance control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in a hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating random numbers such as performance random numbers (B0013), and executes a corresponding received command check process by analyzing the received command received from the game control device 100 (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46B.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process to edit and control the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and executes a power saving control process to control the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while it is waiting for customers (B0016).

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance display editing process (B0017) that updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on a display device (display means) such as the display device 41, and sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. If the drawing data set at this time is such that the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec), the image on the display device 41 can be updated without any problems. Then, the preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether or not it is frame switching timing (B
If it is not frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "Y"), an instruction is given to the display device 41 to draw the screen (B0019).
020). Since the frame period in this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 the frame period), frame switching is performed. Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the performance control device 300 executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the performance control device 300 executes a decoration control process to control the decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) consisting of LEDs, etc. (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of the decoration devices such as LEDs, etc. is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process to control a performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric role object driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, a role object operation performance that drives a motor is set.

Then, when the performance control device 300 finishes the above-mentioned processing of B0023, it returns to processing of B0008. After that, it repeats the processing from B0008 to B0023.

[Received command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 46A) will be described with reference to FIG. 46B. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of received commands in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there are no commands received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there are no commands to analyze, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if a command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 subtracts the number of received commands from the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area (B1103).
), the contents of the receive command buffer in RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the performance control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105).
The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read index 0 to 31, and the received commands are read out in index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area in the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The performance control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"), repeats the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

When the performance control device 300 receives a command sent from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is incremented and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but analysis of the received commands is performed in a separate command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing free space in the received command buffer without directly performing analysis, it is possible to prepare for the reception of a large number of commands.

Next, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y
"), loads the received command contents in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing to analyze the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later in FIG. 46C. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether analysis of the number of commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110), and if analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. If analysis has been completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check processing is terminated.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 46B) will be described with reference to FIG. 46C. FIG. 46C is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE section and the lower byte into an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 is divided into a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACT section).
It is composed of a CTION section (ACTION command) and is usually transmitted in succession starting with the MODE section which indicates the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are
It is composed of an ODE section and an ACTION section, in that order.

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE unit is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether the MODE part indicating the type of command is a possible value (a value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.) is a possible value (a value assigned as the command specification indicating the content). Then, if the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203),
If the result of B1204 is "Y"), it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that the type of command specified by the MODE section can take. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the type of command is executed in the processing from B1205 onwards.

The performance control device 300 first judges whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the change command (B1205). The change command is a command that instructs the change pattern of the decorative special pattern, for example, a change command. If the MODE section indicates a change command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes the change command process (B1206).
), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12), the performance control device 300
05 is "N"), and then it is judged whether the MODE part is within the range of hit-related commands (B
1207). The winning command is a command for instructing an operation related to the performance during a big win or a small win (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen), and is, for example, a fanfare command for instructing a fanfare screen, a round command for instructing a round screen, an interval command for instructing an interval screen, an ending command for instructing an ending screen, etc. Then, when the MODE section represents a winning command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the winning command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (B12), the performance control device 300
07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE section is in the range of the symbol-based command (B
1209). The symbol-based command includes, for example, a decorative special symbol 1 command and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. When the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent a symbol command (B12), the performance control device 300
09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of a single-shot command (B
Then, if the MODE portion indicates a one-off command (result of B1211 is "Y"), the one-off command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (B12), the performance control device 300
If the result of step B1213 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the pre-reading symbol command (B1213). The pre-reading symbol command includes, for example, a pre-reading stop symbol command. If the MODE section represents a pre-reading symbol command (the result of step B1213 is "Y"
"), executes pre-reading pattern command processing (B1214), and terminates the received command analysis processing.

When the MODE section does not indicate a pre-reading pattern command, the performance control device 300
If the result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead variation command (B1215). An example of a look-ahead variation command is a look-ahead variation pattern command. If the MODE section represents a look-ahead variation command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the performance control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in test mode), so it terminates the received command analysis process. Also, if the MODE section is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION section is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION for the MODE section is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"),
If the combination of the TION parts is not correct (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is also terminated.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Fig. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the one-shot command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first judges whether the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process is executed to set the type of gaming machine (B1302).
1302), and the single command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (B1
If the result of step B1301 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE portion represents a command for initializing the RAM (B1303).
If the result of B1303 is "Y", a RAM initialization setting process is executed (B1304) to notify the user of RAM initialization, and the single command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (B1305). For example, power outage recovery commands include a power outage recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (B13),
05 is "Y"), power outage recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a power failure recovery command (B
If the result of step B1305 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE portion represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307).
07 is "Y"), customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command (B
If the result of B1307 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE section represents a command for the number of reserved decorative special figures 1 (B1309). If the MODE section represents a command for the number of reserved decorative special figures 1 (the result of B1309 is "Y"), a process for setting reserved special figure 1 information is executed (B1310).
The single command processing ends.

When the MODE unit does not represent a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a decorative special figure 2 reserved number command (B1311). Then, when the MODE unit represents a decorative special figure 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a special figure 2 reserved information setting process (B131
2) End the single command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent the decoration special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1
The result of step B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (B1
If the result of step B1313 is "N", it is then determined whether the MODE section indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Examples of error/illegal commands include an illegality occurrence command, an illegality release command, a status off command, a status on command, a magnet illegality notification command (magnetic error command), and a panel radio wave illegality notification command (panel radio wave error command).
The fraud occurrence command is a command indicating the occurrence of an illegal win based on the signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the large prize port switch 43. The fraud release command is a command indicating the release of the fraud. In the prize port switch/status monitoring process (A1310), the occurrence of an illegal win and the release of the fraud are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraud release command can be sent. The status on command is the generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) or the front frame open detection switch 64 (
There are commands that indicate the occurrence of a signal from the main frame open detection switch (main frame open error, front frame open error). Also, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred. The status on command and status off command can be sent in the prize slot switch/status monitoring process (A1310). If there is detection from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (magnetic fraud), the magnet fraud notification command is sent in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315). If there is detection from the radio wave sensor 62 (radio wave fraud), the board radio wave fraud notification command is sent in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316).

If the MODE section indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error/illegal setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or illegality (
B1316), and ends the single command processing. In the error/illegal setting processing, a setting is made to generate an alarm sound to inform of an error or illegality.

If the MODE unit does not indicate an error/incorrect command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit indicates a command for switching the performance mode (set by processing during special chart display, etc.) (B1317). If the MODE unit indicates a command for switching the performance mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a performance mode switching setting process (B1318) and ends the single-shot command process.

If the MODE section does not indicate a command for switching the presentation mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section indicates a command for the number of out balls (B1319). If the MODE section indicates a command for the number of out balls (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a process for receiving the number of out balls (B1
320), and the single command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a command for the number of balls out, the performance control device 300
If the MODE section indicates a command to count the large prize opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command, the performance control device 300
If the result of step B1321 is "N", it is determined whether the MODE portion represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is
It is included in the power recovery command of step A1046 and the RAM initialization command sent in the process of step A1044.
The result of B1323 is "Y"), a process when the setting value is received is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the process when the setting value is received, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and the necessary processes are executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command (B
If the result of step 1323 is "N", it is determined whether the MODE portion represents a command for changing settings (B1325). As a command for changing settings, for example, a command for changing the probability setting (A
1030). If the MODE section indicates a setting change command, then (B13
25 is "Y"), a setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting change display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the performance control device 300
If the result of B1325 is "N", it is determined whether the MODE section represents a command for checking the settings (B1327). For example, a command for checking the probability settings (
A1033). And when the MODE part indicates a command for setting confirmation, (B1
The result of B1327 is "Y"), a setting confirmation information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for probability setting confirmation is received, the setting confirmation information setting process displays a setting confirmation display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether the MODE section represents a command for stopping a pattern (B1329). The command for stopping a pattern includes, for example, a command for stopping a pattern of a special pattern 1 (a command for stopping a special pattern 1 decoration) and a command for stopping a pattern of a special pattern 2 (a command for stopping a special pattern 2 decoration).
When the part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the performance control device 3
Next, the CPU 00 judges whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
The performance control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1331), and after all symbols have stopped, sets the game status flag to the normal state (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the processing of B1332, as an example, the game status flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this processing is executed, the game status flag is set to a flag of "changing", "big hit", or "small hit".

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "N
" ) or if the command in the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N")
At this time, the performance control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the performance control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG. 47 in single-shot command processing. For example, the performance control device 300 may receive a time-saving variation number command, a performance rotation number command, a playing style instruction notification command (left-hand play instruction notification command, right-hand play instruction notification command), etc. from the game control device 100, and perform processing corresponding to the command. The performance control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state from the time-saving variation number command (time-saving variation number), etc., and can obtain the remaining number of rotations for each performance mode from the performance rotation number command, etc., and can set the performance based on the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state and the remaining number of rotations for each performance mode, etc. The performance control device 300 displays a playing style instruction display (left-hand play instruction display or right-hand play instruction display) that instructs (suggests) the playing style in response to a playing style instruction notification command (left-hand play instruction notification command or right-hand play instruction notification command).
can be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Predictive pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the pre-reading symbol command process (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 46C) will be described. FIG. 48 shows the performance control device 3
10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the program.

The performance control device 300 first judges whether the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reservation (special chart 1 start memory), for example, whether the most recently received decorative special chart reservation number command is a decorative special chart 1 reservation number command (B1601). If the latest reserved information is information on special chart 1 reservation (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) is saved in the special chart 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 1 reservation number (B1602).

If the latest reserved information is not special chart 1 reserved information (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, if the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command, the performance control device 300 saves a look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 2 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the performance control device 300 sets a pre-reading fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a pre-reading fluctuation command (B160
4) This is because the pre-read symbol command and the pre-read variation command are set, so the pre-read symbol command is followed by the pre-read variation command from the game control device 100. After that, the pre-read symbol command process is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the pre-reading variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) will be described. FIG. 49 shows the performance control device 3
13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for read-ahead variable command processing executed by the program controller 100.

The performance control device 300 first reads ahead a change command (a change pattern command).
It is determined whether or not the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received (B1701). If the above-mentioned read-ahead variable system command waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable system command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the read-ahead variable system command processing is terminated. If the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the read-ahead variable system command waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the performance control device 300 (sub-board) displays the latest reserved information pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2).
A look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reserved units is set (B1703), and the sub-intra-sub look-ahead fluctuation command MODE part is acquired in response to the look-ahead fluctuation command MODE part (
Next, a look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation command is generated.
The part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the performance control device 300 judges whether the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the sub-intra-preview variable command MODE section and ACT section) are both other than 0 (B1707).
If the command is normal (valid), it will be converted to a value other than 0.
If the CT section is not 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE section and A
The converted command composed of the CT portion is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special chart 1 look-ahead variable command area or special chart 2 look-ahead variable command area) corresponding to the latest reserved information and reserved number (B1708). Then, a look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9), and judge whether the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal or not (B1710
).

In addition, the time of the first half of the variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of reserved items when the reserved item starts the variation display game. When the reserved item starts the variation display game, if there are no other reserved items, the first half of the variation will be longer, and if a new reserved item occurs and the number of reserved items is large, the first half of the variation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half of the variation changes, the MODE part of the received look-ahead variation command is converted to the sub-intra look-ahead variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

In addition, the type of reach is not related to the number of reserved positions, so the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the sub-intra-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reserved positions. However, there are different types of reaches of the same type,
If the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation command is not converted, the performance control device 30
If you use 0 as is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, in a normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach -1 stop miss and normal reach +1 stop miss.
Therefore, by converting ACT parts indicating reaches of the same system into the same intra-sub look-ahead variable command ACT parts, the number is reduced, and the burden of check processes such as look-ahead command consistency check processes is reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether or not at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (i.e., the sub-intra-preview variable command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or whether or not the combination of the converted MODE section and ACT section is normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N", it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

The performance control device 300 determines whether the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (B
If the result of B1710 is "Y", the reserved information for the look-ahead target (latest reserved information) is loaded from the look-ahead variable command area (B1711), and a look-ahead lottery process for the look-ahead performance of the latest reserved is executed (B1712). Examples of look-ahead performance include continuous preview performance (including chance eye look-ahead performance), look-ahead zone performance, and reserve change notice. Next, it is determined whether or not the latest reserved look-ahead performance (reserve change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713). If the latest reserved look-ahead performance will occur (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead performance is set (B1714).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the pre-reading performance (hold change notice, etc.) to be generated is a performance that will start immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading performance to be generated is a performance that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading performance is set (B1716). If the pre-reading performance to be generated is not a performance that will start immediately (B1715
If the result of step 3 is "N", the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift (when the hold display moves or the number of holds decreases) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the look-ahead change command processing ends.

On the other hand, if the look-ahead performance of the latest hold does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the performance control device 300 simply terminates the look-ahead variation command processing.

[Pattern Command Processing]
Next, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol-based command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 receives a pattern command (decorative special pattern 1 command or decorative special pattern 2 command).
The special pattern type corresponding to the MODE part of the pattern command is set (B1801). The special pattern type is special pattern 1 or special pattern 2. Then, the MODE part and ACTION part (ACT
The symbol type corresponding to the combination of the number of the winning combinations is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B180).
2). Here, the allocation ratio of the patterns changes between special chart 1 and special chart 2, so the pattern type is set using a table for each MODE. In this embodiment, the pattern type corresponds to a losing pattern, a big win pattern A of special chart 1, a big win pattern B-F of special chart 2, a big win pattern G in the remaining reservation (special chart 2 reservation), a time-saving pattern (a support pattern), etc.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 determines the special chart type (special chart 1) of the received change command (change command).
It is determined whether the special symbol type (or special symbol 2) is undetermined (B1901). If the special symbol type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the fluctuation system command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received fluctuation system command and pattern command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the fluctuation system command and the pattern type are inconsistent (B1903). Here, inconsistency refers to a contradiction in the performance, such as when a fluctuation system command for a losing symbol is received but a pattern command for a winning symbol is received. If the fluctuation system command and the pattern type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
Then, variable command processing is terminated.

If the variation command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1
904), and executes a variable performance setting process for setting the variable performance that is the variable performance (B19
05). Note that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Next, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) is set to "special chart variable" (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable performance setting process]
Next, the details of the variable performance setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 51) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first judges whether the type of the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation (a fluctuation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the type of the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of performance points, the machine code,
A first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special chart type, the performance mode, and the setting information (setting value) is set (B2002), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the reserved number of the special chart type is obtained (B2003).
In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the more the number of reserved positions, the shorter the fluctuation time becomes, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reserved positions is obtained.

If the type of the fluctuation pattern is not a reach-free fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a reach-within-a-game fluctuation, the performance control device 300 sets a first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, the model code, the special chart type, the performance mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) (B2004), and
The address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the ODE section and the fluctuation pattern type is obtained (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the performance control device 300 performs a lottery for the notice that appears during the first half of the fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Next, it sets the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, the model code, the special symbol type, the performance mode, the symbol type, and the setting information (setting value) (B2007), obtains the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the fluctuation command (B2008), and performs a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half of the fluctuation (during the reach) (B2009). Then, it determines the content of the fluctuation performance corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) (B2010).
In addition, the change time and main reach details can be found from the change commands.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (pre-notification performance) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special chart variable display game is determined according to the variable performance such as the reach performance and the content of the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decorative stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattering number in the case of a losing pattern.

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display of the variable performance (B2013), and sets the display of the preview performance (B2014). Next, the display of the reserved reduction corresponding to the special chart type is set, and for example, a display of the reserved display corresponding to the decorative special chart that is changing this time is set to decrease (display of reserved shift) (B2015). Next, a sound number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) by the speaker's sound and a decoration number that determines the performance mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016).
The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) includes a plurality of decorative light-emitting units (decorative LEDs
The decoration numbers each have a different light emitting pattern (color, timing, etc. of each LED) and emit light in a manner determined by the decoration number.

It is also possible to set the sound number and decoration number based on not only the performance contents but also the setting information (setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission state of the decoration device, i.e., the light emission state of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special chart variation corresponding to the special chart type (B
2017), and in addition to the first to third special symbols that change on the display device 41, a fourth special symbol change display setting for a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018).
The fourth symbol variation is caused by the lamp display unit 1 of the lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.
, 2 (LED) or may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first judges whether the MODE section of the received winning command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE section of the winning command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a big win fanfare command or a small win fanfare command, a fanfare performance setting process is executed to set a fanfare performance (B2102). In addition, in response to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, a hitting instruction (left hit instruction or right hit instruction) may be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big win. Next, the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to "in fanfare" (B2103), and the winning command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds is,
It can also be obtained from the pattern type determined from the pattern command (the decorative special pattern command corresponding to the stopping pattern).

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section of the winning command represents a round (B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a round command or a small winning open command, the performance control device 300 executes a round performance setting process and sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "round in progress" (B2105, B2106).
06), the hit command processing is completed.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (B2107).
If the result of B2108 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the presentation control device 300 executes an interval presentation setting process, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "interval in progress" (B2108, B2109), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not indicate an interval (B2107
If the result of B21 is "N", the performance control device 300 judges whether the MODE section of the winning command indicates an ending (B2110).
10 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation setting process to set an ending presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and terminates the winning command processing.

In addition, if the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate an ending (B2
If the result of step 110 is "N", the performance control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (shifts) by the game control of the game control device 100. In particular, the game state transitions when a jackpot occurs and when a predetermined number of games (number of spins, number of fluctuations) have passed are shown. In FIG. 54A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special chart probability), the state of the normal chart winning probability (normal chart probability) which is the probability of the winning result of the normal chart variable display game, the presentation mode, the main variable display game (main variable display game, main fluctuation), the right-hand or left-hand shot launch mode, and other characteristics are shown.

As described above, the presentation mode (presentation stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the big win end process (FIG. 30) or the presentation mode information check process (FIG. 25B), etc. However, it is not limited to this, and the presentation control device 300 can also set it based on the number of time reductions, the number of remaining reserved times, the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the big win ends, etc.

Also, in Figure 54A, the specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) in the case of ceiling time-saving due to reaching the ceiling number of times and sudden time-saving due to time-saving patterns are omitted (similar to Figure 54B), but will be explained in detail in the third embodiment (Figure 88) described later.

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state as a probability-changing state in which the probability of a jackpot is high.

In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot and the probability of winning the regular jackpot during the transition state are the same as in the normal game state,
Probabilistically, the transition state may be included in the normal game state. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variable display game becomes the special chart 2 variable display game. However, in the transition state, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed by consuming the remaining reserve, and the special chart 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game, and a small win, and even a big win due to V passage (passage of the game ball to the V winning hole, V winning) during the small win occurs with a small win probability (1/8). For this reason, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than usual, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. In addition, the transition state and the specific game state (time-saving state) may be collectively regarded as advantageous states that are advantageous to the player, or the specific game state (time-saving state) may be regarded as the first advantageous state, and the transition state may be regarded as the second advantageous state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100
The probability of a jackpot is low (special chart low probability), and the probability of a regular chart hit is also low (regular chart low probability).
In this embodiment, the state of low probability of normal drawing is a state without normal power support (no support state), and the state of high probability of normal drawing is a state with normal power support (support state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is opened due to a normal winning in a support state, if the normal drawing probability is low at the time of opening, it will be in a no support state. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure it to be considered as a support state while the normal variable winning device 37 is open.

In addition, in the normal game state, the presentation mode is the normal mode. In the normal game state, left-handed hitting, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first start winning hole 36, is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as the game ball launch mode. The main start area where the game ball is likely to enter in the recommended launch mode is the first start winning hole 36, and the main variation display game (main variation special chart) is the special chart 1 variation display game. The secondary start area where the game ball is unlikely to enter in the recommended launch mode is the normal variation winning device 37, and the secondary variation display game is the special chart 2 variation display game.

In the specific game state (time-saving state), the game control device 100 controls the probability of a big win to be low, but the probability of a normal win to be high (normal high probability). In the specific game state, the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, and right-handed hitting is recommended to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special variable display game 2, and the secondary variable display game is the special variable display game 1.

In addition, in a specific game state, if the number of time-saving times is less than the reference number (here, 5 times) (
There are two cases: when the number of time-saving times is ≦5 (time-saving times ≦5), and when it is 99 times (time-saving times = 99), which is greater than the reference number. The presentation mode when the number of time-saving times ≦5 is set as time-saving mode #1, and when the number of time-saving times = 99 is set as time-saving mode #2, and the presentation manner of time-saving mode #1 and time-saving mode #2 may be different to increase the interest of the game. Note that the reference number may be, for example, about the reciprocal value of the small win probability of 1/8 (8 times), or may be 7 times, etc. The smaller the reference number, the more difficult it becomes to generate a small win (a big win state when a V passes during a small win) in time-saving mode #1, while the presentation mode when the number of time-saving times is ≦5 is set as time-saving mode #2.
The difference becomes larger, creating a more distinct look.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of a specific game state (time-saving state). In the transition state, the remaining reserves generated by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) that is opened by a normal winning during the specific game state are consumed, and the special power 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. The presentation mode of the transition state is the remaining reserve consumption mode. Furthermore, the remaining reserve consumption mode may be divided into a normal power opening end mode before the opening of the normal power due to a normal winning during the specific game state ends, and a normal power opening end mode after the opening of the normal power ends. In the normal power opening end mode, right hitting is recommended to aim for the normal power, and in the normal power opening end mode, left hitting is recommended since the normal power is closed.

If the remaining reserve consumption mode, which is a presentation mode of the transition state, is divided into a mode before the end of the normal power release and a mode after the end of the normal power release, it becomes easier for the player to understand whether the normal power is open (should be hit to the right) or closed (should be hit to the left). If it is not divided, it becomes easier to recognize that the remaining reserve is being consumed throughout the transition state.

Also, as mentioned above, the transition state and the specific game state (time-saving state) may be collectively defined as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the presentation mode may be the same without being divided.
In this case, the advantageous state in which the special chart 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game can be the common presentation mode. As described later, if the special chart wins (a big win when V passes during a small win) occurs when the remaining reserve is consumed, the game value given to the player is made larger than when the special chart wins during a specific game state, and even though it is unclear from the common presentation mode whether the time is shortened or the remaining reserve is being consumed, the player can obtain a large game value and be pleased. Here, the game value (benefit) is the number of time shortening times after the big win ends and the number of big wins obtained in the end.

Next, the transition from each game state will be described. First, in the normal game state, when a jackpot (not due to a V winning) occurs in the special chart variable display game, the game transitions to the specific game state after the jackpot state ends.

In the specific game state, if a small win (a big win state when V passes) occurs due to the special chart variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state again after the big win state ends. In this case, the game returns to the time-saving mode #1, and the number of time-saving times as the game value (benefit) is equal to or less than the standard number of times (time-saving times ≦ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the specific game state is transitioned to the transition state. For example, the predetermined transition condition is that (i) the number of times that the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the time-saving number (first predetermined number, the initial value of the time-saving number of times 2), and (ii) the total number of times that the special chart variable display game (the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state exceeds a second predetermined number (initial value of the time-saving number of times 1, for example, twice the time-saving number) that is greater than the time-saving number (first predetermined number), or (iii) the normal power opening of a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) is completed. The second predetermined number of times may be the number of times of time-saving (first predetermined number) plus the maximum value of the number of reserved special charts 1 (for example, 4).

In the specific game state, the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 is that the special chart 2 variable display game, which is the master variable display game, can be executed a number of times for time reduction. However, if the transition condition from the specific game state is set only that the total number of times the special chart variable display game is executed exceeds the number of times for time reduction, as in the past, the original specification of the gaming machine 10 will be deviated from by the amount of the execution of the special chart 1 variable display game, which is the subordinate variable display game. However, by providing the two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the subordinate variable display game can be treated as a bonus (privilege), and the player can play with the original specification without suffering any loss. Note that if the player plays normally, the transition state will be transitioned to when the condition (i) is met, and it is highly unlikely that the condition (ii) will be met. The reason for providing the condition (iii) will be described later in relation to FIG. 66.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state, it is possible to continue until the special chart 2 variable display game with 99 time-saving times is executed, so a small win (a big win state occurs when the V passes) is almost certain to occur, and after the big win state ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode #1) is entered again. Therefore, the time-saving mode #2 is a next-time continuation confirmation mode (
Confirmed mode).

In the transition state, when the special chart 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state where the special chart 1 variation display game is the game. On the other hand, in the transition state, if a small win (a big win state occurs when a V passes through a small win) occurs, the time-saving mode # of the specific game state will start after the big win state ends.
2 and 99 time-saving times are granted. That is, when a small win (a big win after V passes) occurs in the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) in which the remaining reservation is consumed, the number of time-saving times becomes greater than the number of time-saving times (≦5) when a small win (a big win after V passes) occurs in the specific game state, and the game value granted to the player becomes larger. Furthermore, when a small win (a big win after V passes) occurs in the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode), a small win (a big win after V passes) almost certainly occurs in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of two big wins are secured as game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
54B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state. The transition of the game state in FIG. 54B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 54B, the remaining reserves, which are all the special chart 2 reserves that are consumed after the time-saving period ends, are divided into a predetermined remaining reserve (first remaining reserve) and an excess reserve (second remaining reserve), and the remaining reserve consumption mode as a presentation mode corresponding to the transition state is divided into a time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode in which the predetermined remaining reserves are consumed, and an excess reserve consumption mode in which the excess reserves are consumed. Here, the predetermined remaining reserve is the first predetermined number (all or part of the special chart 2 reserve) of the special chart 2 reserves that are generated during the time-saving period and consumed after the time-saving period ends, and the excess reserve is the special chart 2 reserve (remaining reserve) that is consumed after the predetermined remaining reserve. The excess reserve consumption mode may include, for example, a mode in which a result screen showing the game result is displayed on the display device 41 or other special modes. Note that the time-saving generated remaining reserve consumption mode and the time-saving mode (time-saving mode #1 or time-saving mode #2) have in common the point of consuming the special chart 2 reserves that occurred during the time-saving period, so they may be the same presentation mode and have a common presentation mode.

[Time-saving number of times and the number of reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
FIG. 55 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the prescribed number of remaining reserved times (prescribed number of remaining reserved times) corresponding to the patterns, which are the types of winnings in the special pattern variable display game. The patterns are the patterns that will result in a jackpot, and are determined here by a jackpot pattern random number, excluding the time-saving patterns. The patterns are as follows:
The winning symbol may correspond to either the symbol number or the symbol pattern.
) is related to the winning symbols of the special chart 1 variable display game. The upper diagram of (B) is related to the winning symbols of the special chart 2 variable display game during the normal chart high probability state (time-saving state), and the lower diagram is related to the winning symbols (winning symbols in the remaining reserve) of the special chart 2 variable display game during the normal chart low probability state.

Pattern A is a stop pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, and is a stop pattern of a jackpot of the special chart 1 variable display game. Pattern B-F is also a stop pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, but is a stop pattern of a jackpot related to V passing (V winning) in a small jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game during a normal chart high probability state (time-saving state). Pattern G is also a stop pattern determined by a jackpot pattern random number, but is a stop pattern of a jackpot related to V passing (V winning) in a small jackpot (small jackpot with remaining reserve) of the special chart 2 variable display game during a normal chart low probability state. In addition, if there is a small jackpot pattern random number in addition to the jackpot pattern random number, it is also possible to configure patterns B-F and G as stop patterns of a small jackpot determined by a small jackpot pattern random number.

The allocation (selection rate) of the symbol A is 100%, and the only symbol that can be stopped in the special 1 variable display game is the symbol A. The allocation rates of the symbols B-F for the random number of the jackpot are 40%, 25%, 15%, 10%, and 10%, respectively. The allocation rate of the symbol G is 100%.
It is.

In the case of pattern A, which is a type of jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game, the number of time-saving times after a jackpot is 1. In addition, in the case of pattern A, the number of reserved balls that are to be consumed after the time-saving state ends is 4, as specified (planned). Therefore, the total number of reserved balls that can be consumed by executing the special chart 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends is 5 (= 1 + 4) according to the regulations. In the case of pattern A, for a small jackpot probability of 1/8, the continuation rate is {1-(1-1/8) ⁵ } x 100% = 48.7%, and the transition rate to the fixed mode is (1-1/8) x {1-(1-1/8) ⁴ } x 100% = 36.2%.

In the case of the pattern B-F, which is the type of jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game started during the normal chart high probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, and 1 time, respectively.
For patterns B to F, the prescribed remaining reserved numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be consumed by playing the special symbol 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state is 10 by regulation for all of patterns B to F. For patterns B to F, the continuation rate is the same for each with a small win probability of 1/8, which is {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ } x 100% = 73.7%, and the transition rate to the fixed mode is 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3%, and 60.0%, respectively.
This comes to 61.2%.

In the case of the G pattern, which is a type of jackpot (remaining reserved jackpot) of the special chart 2 variable display game started during the normal chart low probability state, the number of time reductions after the jackpot is 99 times. Also, in the G pattern, the specified remaining reserved number is 4. Therefore, the total number of special chart 2 reserved numbers that can be consumed by playing the special chart 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends is 103. In the G pattern, for a small jackpot probability of 1/8,
For each, the continuation rate is approximately 100%, and the transition rate to the fixed mode is approximately 0%. Therefore, in the case of the G pattern, after the end of the jackpot with the remaining reserved, the game transitions to the time-saving mode #2, which ensures another jackpot, and the specific game state (time-saving state) continues after that. On the other hand, in the case of the G pattern, the transition rate to the fixed mode is approximately 0
%, and in most cases, the transition occurs from time-saving mode #2 in a specific gaming state to time-saving mode #1 via a jackpot.

The continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state continues due to the special pattern 2 variable display game (within 5 times for pattern A, within 10 times for pattern B-F, and within 103 times for pattern G) after the end of the jackpot state, and is the probability of re-entering the specific game state without passing through the normal game state (normal mode). The fixed mode transition rate is the probability of transitioning from the remaining reserve consumption mode to the time-saving mode #2 (fixed mode, next-time continuation fixed mode) due to the special pattern 2 variable display game based on the remaining reserve after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of reserved special symbols 2 consumed after the end of the jackpot state (i.e., the number of times the variable display game of the special symbol 2 is executed after the end of the jackpot state), and the continuation rate in the case of the symbols B-F, which has a total number of 10, is greater than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A, which has a total number of 5. In addition, as the number of time-saving times decreases and the number of reserved times increases in the order of the symbols B-F, the transition rate to the fixed mode increases.

As described above, in the patterns B-F, the number of time-saving times is set according to the pattern, which is the type of jackpot (type of special result), so that the specific game state after the jackpot has a variable number of time-saving times (1 to 5) that is set by lottery (allocation) and changes randomly, improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, the remaining reserve number (5 to 9), which is the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the specific game state ends, is changed according to the number of time-saving times. Therefore, the remaining reserve number is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, improving the interest of the game. In particular, when there is a difference in game value between a jackpot in a specific game state and a jackpot in a remaining reserve, the player will be happy or sad depending on the remaining reserve number set by lottery, improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, even if the number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserved times are variable, the total number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserved times is constant (10) for the winning pattern B-F of the main variable display game (special chart 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, the continuation rate of the specific game state can be kept the same, and the transition rate to the fixed mode can be made variable. As described above, while the number of special chart 2 variable display games equal to the total number of time-saving times and the number of remaining reserved times is being executed, that is, if the same presentation mode is executed in the specific game state (time-saving mode) and the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode), it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving time is being reduced or the remaining reserved time is being consumed, and the player will be surprised when a large game value (99 times of time-saving times) is obtained by hitting the jackpot in the remaining reserved time, which increases the interest in the game.

[Characteristics of the map change display game and the normal power operation]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and the normal power operation.

As shown in Figure 56 (A), there is only one type of winning pattern (winning stop pattern, regular winning pattern) in the regular map fluctuation display game, and the same regular power opening pattern is always obtained. When the regular map fluctuation display game is in a winning state, the regular power winning device 37 (regular power) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability of winning is 0/251 (0%) in the low probability state and 251/251 (1%) in the high probability state.
00%). In the normal game, the winning probability is always 0% in the high probability state and always 0% in the low probability state, so randomness is eliminated. However, this is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the normal game is a value greater than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) in the low probability state (normal game state, etc.).
That's fine too.

The number of start memories (number of reserved normal maps) of the normal map variation display game is substantially 0, and even if the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34 during the winning state (normal power operation) and during the change of the normal map variation display game, the normal map start memory of the normal map variation display game is not stored. The normal map variation display game can only be started during the stop display of the stopped pattern, and if the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34 during the stop display, a normal map start memory is generated, but it is immediately consumed and the normal map variation display game starts. In this way, the start memory of the normal map variation display game is not substantially accumulated, so the normal map variation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in a specific game state, the normal map variation display game or the normal power operation and the special map variation display game are easily linked without any misalignment, and it also leads to the prevention of capture.

The normal map fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. In addition, it may be 200 msec in the normal map high probability state, and may be longer than 200 msec in the normal map low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In a specific game state (time-saving state, normal map high probability state), in order to link the normal map fluctuation display game (and thus the normal power operation) and the special map fluctuation display game without any deviation, it is preferable that the normal map fluctuation time and the normal map stop time are as short as possible. Assuming that the launch speed of the game balls is 100 balls per minute, the game balls can pass through the normal map start gate 34 every 600 msec, so it is preferable that the time required for one normal map fluctuation display game, i.e., the sum of the normal map fluctuation time and the normal map stop time, is less than 600 msec.

In addition, the maximum count number for regular power (upper limit of count number) is 10.

56(B) is a diagram showing the normal map start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) and the surrounding configuration. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration so that almost all game balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the normal power (normal power opening) pass through the normal map start gate 34 and win the normal power.

First, in order to make the winning rate (the rate at which one game ball wins) of the normal variable winning device 37 constant when hitting the right side in accordance with the normal power opening, obstacle nails 32a and structures are removed as much as possible from the game area 32 around the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 to prevent unevenness in the movement of the game ball. For example, obstacle nails 32a and structures are not placed between the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 or on the left and right sides in the game area 32. The obstacle nails 32a placed almost directly above the normal map start gate 34 form a path for the game ball in two rows, making it difficult for the game ball to leak out. The path formed by the two rows of obstacle nails 32a is smoothly connected to the upper path 32c formed by the structure.

In addition, the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are disposed in such a positional relationship that the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as is. In other words, the normal variable winning device 37 is disposed directly below the normal map start gate 34. For example, the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34 may enter the normal variable winning device 37 by the time it reaches the normal variable winning device 37.
In this case, the distance L (the distance between the vertical centers) between the normal map start gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be greater than the product of the average falling speed of the game ball and the time required for one normal map variable display game. However, the distance L is set to be short enough that the game ball will enter the normal variable winning device 37 even if the falling direction of the game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34 deviates from the vertical.

Furthermore, in order to prevent unevenness in the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37, as mentioned above, it is preferable that the normal variable winning device 37 be a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b can fall forward.

FIG. 56(C) shows the opening pattern (normal power opening pattern) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) of this embodiment. The normal power opening pattern shows the operation mode of the normal power due to one normal winning. The normal power opening pattern after the end of the jackpot state is the same regardless of the jackpot pattern A-G (i.e. the type of jackpot). The numbers enclosed in the square frames indicate the control pointer during the normal winning (FIG. 41
etc.)

In this embodiment, in a normal power release pattern per normal power map, the normal power is released twice. The normal power may be released more than twice. The normal power release is divided into a first half release and a second half release with a long interval in between during which the normal power is closed. The normal power interval time (wait time), which is the interval time, is 60,000 msec, and the normal power release time for both the first half release and the second half release is 3,000 msec.

For example, if the launch speed of the game balls is 100 balls per minute, the game balls reach the normal power station every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the normal power station 5 times during the first half of the 3000 msec opening, and after an interval of 60,000 msec, it is possible to win 5 times during the second half of the 3000 msec opening.
It is possible to win the round of regular power. The special chart 2 reserve accumulated during the first half of the opening can be consumed during the interval in which the regular power is closed for 60,000 msec, and the number of special chart 2 reserves can be reduced to 0, and the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves (here 4) can be accumulated during the subsequent second half of the opening.

During the regular power interval (closed state), when the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time-saving number, the specific game state (time-saving state, regular chart high probability state, state with support) ends and the regular chart low probability state (transition state) is entered. The special chart 2 reserve that was accumulated during the first half opening but is consumed after the time-saving state ends becomes the remaining reserve, and in addition, the special chart 2 reserve that is accumulated by winning the regular power during the second half opening of 3000 msec also becomes the remaining reserve. In this way, even if the regular chart low probability state is entered, it is possible to accumulate a large amount of remaining reserve by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving one normal winning (specific result) of the normal winning display game, the normal winning device 37 can be converted to the open state multiple times, and the normal winning device 37 can be converted to the open state in both a high probability state where the probability of the normal winning of the normal winning display game is high and a low probability state where the probability of the normal winning is low. Therefore, even if the probability of the normal winning is low, the normal winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special winning device 2 can be saved, which makes the player happy and increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the first half of the regular power is opened, special chart 2 reservations can be accumulated and consumed at intervals, and when the second half of the regular power is opened, special chart 2 reservations can be accumulated again and consumed after the regular power operation ends.
Therefore, the remaining reservations can be made greater than the upper limit of 4 for the number of reserved balls in Special Chart 2, and the number of remaining reservations can also be made variable by making the number of time-saving cycles variable.

[Timing chart]
57-59 are timing charts showing the game state, normal probability (normal hit probability), normal state, normal power state, number of reserved special 2 symbols, special symbol change display game (special symbol change), etc. after a jackpot. Note that the further to the right in the timing chart, the more time has passed. FIG. 57 is after a jackpot with symbol A, FIG. 58 is after a jackpot with symbol B, and FIG. 59 is after a jackpot with symbol B.
This applies after a jackpot of pattern F.

Regarding the state after the big win of the pattern B-F, only the timing of changing from the normal high probability state (specific game state) to the normal low probability state is different due to the difference in the number of time reductions and the specified remaining reserve number, so only the pattern B and the pattern F are illustrated.
The rest of the features are the same for all of patterns B-F.

57-59 show the process of passing the game ball through the normal start gate 34 (normal gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the game ball entering the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) (start gate 2
The detection of the switch 37a) is also shown by a pulse. In Figures 57 to 59, the state and changes of the passing of the game ball through the normal gate, the normal state, the normal power state, and the normal power winning (winning the normal power) are the same, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

In Figures 57-59, the jackpot round (during jackpot) and the jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending where the ending performance is executed, when the player hits the right hand side as prompted by the right hand hit instruction display, the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (shown by the first pulse in Figure 57), the normal pattern (normal pattern) changes on the normal pattern display 53, and the normal pattern change display game is executed and then stops. Here, since the normal pattern is in a low probability state when the normal pattern starts to change, it stops with a miss.

Here, when the normal map is missed and stopped, the big win ending ends, and the normal map probability becomes high, and the state becomes a right-hand hit state with support corresponding to the specific game state (time-saving mode #1) of FIG. 54A. At the beginning of the right-hand hit state with support (normal map high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, and the normal map starts to change. Then, since it is a high probability state with a normal map probability of 100%, it becomes a normal hit, the normal power operation starts, and the normal power is opened as the first half opening. In the open state where the normal power is opened, the game ball that passed through the normal map start gate 34 enters the normal power as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special map 2 reservation occurs, the special map 2 reservation is consumed, the special map 2 variation display game starts, and the number of special map 2 reservations becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100 controls the variable time (execution time) of the special chart 2 variable display game.
The stop display time is controlled based on the number of times the special chart 2 changes (the number of times the special chart 2 change display game is executed) from the end of the jackpot state (the change start information setting process in FIG. 23 and the special chart change process in FIG. 24). The game control device 100 sets the change time and the stop display time of the special chart 2 change display game to be different for three types: after the end of the jackpot of the pattern A, after the end of the jackpot of the patterns B-F, and after the end of the jackpot of the pattern G.

After the big win of the pattern A in FIG. 57, the variable time is set long enough so that the first special chart 2 variable display game continues at least until the end of the normal power operation, that is, until the end of the second half opening. The variable time of the first special chart 2 variable display game is the normal power operation time (660
The normal power operation time is approximately the same as the normal power operation time (00 msec, 66 seconds), but a margin (several seconds to several tens of seconds) may be added to the normal power operation time.
The first special chart 2 variable display game is then executed, and the upper limit of four special chart 2 reserves is accumulated during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of the pattern A is one, when the first special pattern 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and the normal pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) is entered. In the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode), the special pattern 2 variable display game based on the four reserved special patterns 2 that have been saved as remaining reservations is executed four times with a variable time that is much shorter than the first time (second to fifth special pattern 2 variable display games). These second to fifth special pattern 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed variable time.

After the big hit of the pattern B in FIG. 58, the first special chart 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the first half of the normal power opening and continues until the end. Also, the variable time of the first special chart 2 variable display game is approximately the same as the normal power opening time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 58, but the details of the variable time will be explained in relation to FIG. 62. In response to (together with) the first half of the normal power opening, the first special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and the special chart 2 reserve is accumulated to the upper limit of 4 during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game. The four accumulated special chart 2 reserves are all consumed during the interval in which the normal power is closed, and during the interval, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed four times with a variable time that is much shorter than the first time (the second to fifth special chart 2 variable display games). These second to fifth special chart 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed variable time.

Since the number of time-saving times after the jackpot of the pattern B is 5, when the 5th special pattern 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends and the normal pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) is entered. In the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode), the normal power is opened as a second half opening. As soon as one special pattern 2 reservation is generated as a remaining reservation due to a win on the open normal power, the special pattern 2 reservation is consumed, and the 6th special pattern 2 variable display game starts and the number of special pattern 2 reservations becomes 0.

In response to the second half of the regular power release, the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is being played, and the special chart 2 reserve is accumulated to the maximum value of four during the execution of this special chart 2 variable display game.
The sixth special chart 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the second half of the normal power release and continues until the end. The variable time of the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is the normal power release time (30
62. The timing chart shown in FIG. 62 will be explained in detail later.

After the sixth special chart 2 variable display game, the special chart 2 variable display game based on the four reserved special charts is executed four times with a variable time that is much shorter than the first and sixth times (7 to 1
0th special chart 2 variable display game). In this way, five prescribed remaining reserve numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special chart 2 variable display games can be realized.

The seventh to tenth special chart 2 variable display games may all have the same fixed short variable time, and may be fixed variable times equal to or shorter than the variable time of the second to fifth special chart 2 variable display games (particularly the variable time during the time-saving state). This allows the special chart 2 variable display games to be played at a good tempo with the same rhythm, and allows the remaining reserved to be consumed quickly. In addition, since the seventh to tenth special chart 2 variable display games are only consumed and have nothing to do with saving the special chart 2 reserved, if the variable variable time is selected by the allocation (lottery) of the variable pattern, the game will not be monotonous. In addition, the variable time of the seventh to tenth special chart 2 variable display games can be made longer than the variable time of the second to fifth special chart 2 variable display games (particularly the variable time during the time-saving state) to perform a slow corresponding performance.

Also, when the latter half of the normal power supply is opened, the normal power supply state ends and the normal power supply start gate 34 (
The passing of the game ball through the normal map gate allows the normal map variation display game to be played, but since the normal map is in a low probability state with a normal map hit probability of 0%, the normal map variation display game does not result in a hit. The stop after the normal map hit state ends corresponds to the normal remaining ball processing time and the normal map ending time.

After the big win of the pattern F in Fig. 59, the passing of the game ball through the normal gate, the normal state, the normal power state, the normal power winning, the number of reserved special 2, and the appearance and changes of the special change display game (special change) are the same as after the big win of the pattern B in Fig. 58. However, because the number of time-saving times and the number of reserved remaining times are different between the patterns B and F, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal high probability state) to the transition state (normal low probability state, remaining reserved consumption mode) is different.

After the big win of the pattern F, when the first special pattern 2 variable display game ends, the specific game state (time-saving mode) ends and the normal pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) is entered. After that, like after the big win of the pattern B, nine special pattern 2 variable display games are executed, and nine specified remaining reservations can be realized.

As shown in Figures 58 and 59, the game control device 100 can execute the special chart 2 variable display game for a long time in response to the open state of the normal power, and can execute the special chart 2 variable display game for a short time in response to the closed state (interval) of the normal power. Therefore, the special chart 2 reservation can be accumulated in the first half of the normal power opening and consumed in the interval, and the special chart 2 reservation can be accumulated again in the second half of the normal power opening and consumed after the normal power operation ends. Therefore, the remaining reservation can be made more than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special chart 2 reservations, and the remaining reservation number can also be made variable by making the number of time-saving times variable.

Although not shown in the figure, after the big win of the pattern G, for example, the special pattern 2 variable display game may be executed for the number of time reductions (99 times) and the remaining reserved amount (4 pieces) in a short fixed variable time such as the 2nd to 5th times and the 7th to 10th times in Figures 57-59 while repeating the normal power operation.
If the change time of the special chart 2 change display game after the big win is fixed, the special chart 2 change display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the change time is variable instead of fixed, the game will not be monotonous.

[Measures to prevent misalignment]
Here, as a measure to address the discrepancy between the start timing of normal power release (normal power operation) after the end of the jackpot state and the start timing of the special chart 2 variable display game, we will consider appropriate time values for the special chart 2 variable display game and normal power operation.

60 and 61 are time charts showing examples 1 and 2 of the occurrence of a discrepancy between the start timing of the normal power release and the start timing of the special chart 2 variable display game.
It corresponds to 8 and shows the state after a jackpot with pattern B (5 time-saving cycles, 5 remaining reserved balls).

In Fig. 60, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34 (normal map gate) in the big win ending (big win state) before the specific game state and the normal map variation display game (miss variation) starts, the normal map variation display game may have a longer variation time than the time-saving state. In this case, even if the next game ball passes through the normal map gate in the specific game state, the normal map variation display game cannot start, and the normal map variation display game (win variation) finally starts when the next game ball passes through the normal map gate, and the start timing of the normal power release is shifted later than when it starts immediately after the big win ending (Fig. 58) (shift <1>).

Also, in Fig. 60, during a consecutive win where the jackpot is repeated, the reserved special chart 2 before the jackpot state is carried over after the jackpot state, and when the jackpot state ends, the special chart 2 variable display game starts immediately without waiting for the normal power to be released. And, compared to when the special chart 2 variable display game starts after the normal power is released (Fig. 58), the start timing of the special chart 2 variable display game shifts forward (shift <2>).

When deviations <1> and <2> occur simultaneously, the timing for the start of normal power release is 1
The start timing of the th special chart 2 variable display game is significantly shifted forward (forward shift). And, as shown in Figure 60, the 6th long special chart 2 variable display game is also significantly shifted forward from the second half opening of the regular power, and the 7th and 8th special chart 2 variable display games start during the second half opening, and during the second half opening, an excess prize is awarded to the regular power compared to Figure 58, resulting in one extra special chart 2 reserved. Therefore, the actual remaining reserved number becomes 6, one more than the specified remaining reserved number of 5.

In Figure 61, if a special chart 1 reservation that occurred during or before the jackpot state is carried over after the jackpot state, and there is no special chart 2 reservation when the jackpot state ends (number of special chart 2 reservations = 0), the special chart 1 variable display game will start immediately when the jackpot state ends, and the start timing of the special chart 2 variable display game will be later than when it starts immediately after the normal power is released (Figure 58).

That is, the start timing of the first special chart 2 variable display game is significantly delayed from the start timing of the normal power opening (late shift).
The 1st special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and the 6th long-term special chart 2 variable display game is significantly delayed from the start of the second half of the regular power release, and the special chart 2 reserve that accumulates during the second half of the release is 3
Therefore, the actual number of reserved items will be 4, which is one less than the specified number of reserved items, which is 5.

In particular, unlike the special chart 2 reserved priority consumption (special chart 2 priority change) of this embodiment, in the case of special chart 1 reserved priority consumption, there will be a large delay in the start timing of the first special chart 2 change display game.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a measure to prevent the excess or deficiency of the special chart 2 reservation due to the above-mentioned forward and backward shifts, and to eliminate the difference between the actual remaining reservation number and the prescribed remaining reservation number.
This corresponds to and shows the state after a jackpot with pattern B (5 time-saving cycles, 5 remaining reserved balls).

As a measure against the discrepancy, the variable time Ta of the first special chart 2 variable display game is set to a value that adds a margin (several seconds to several tens of seconds) to the normal power open time in the first half. In addition, the normal power interval time Tb is set to
The time required for the special chart 2 variable display game to change four times in a short fixed change time is added with a margin (several seconds to several tens of seconds). For example, the time required for these four changes is (fixed change time + fixed stop display time) x 4. Furthermore, the change time Tc of the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is set to a value larger than the normal power opening time in the latter half.

63 and 64 are time charts showing the effect of the misalignment countermeasures on a front misalignment (effect 1) and on a rear misalignment (effect 2), respectively.

In FIG. 63, even if the first half of the normal power is opened later than the first special chart 2 variable display game due to the forward shift of the first special chart 2 variable display game, the variable time Ta
However, since the margin (several seconds to several tens of seconds) is longer than the normal power release time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) of the first half opening, the delay in the first half opening of the normal power can be absorbed.
Due to the carryover of the reserved ball, the first Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game starts immediately after the end of the jackpot state and continues for a long time, while the first half of the regular power is opened.

In addition, during the normal power interval time Tb, which is the period during which the normal power is closed, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed four or more times with a short fixed variable time. Therefore, the special chart 2 reserve will always be 0 by the time the second half of the normal power begins to open, and the first winning entry into the normal power in the second half of the opening will start the special chart 2 variable display game, so the effect of the delay in the first half of the opening of the normal power is eliminated.

Furthermore, since the variable time Tc of the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is set to a value greater than the normal power release time in the latter half, the special chart 2 reserve is accumulated up to the upper limit of four, and the difference between the actual remaining reserve number and the specified remaining reserve number during the latter half release can be suppressed.

In FIG. 64, even if the first special chart 2 variable display game is delayed due to a delay in the first half of the regular power opening, it can be absorbed during the long regular power interval time Tb. Therefore, by the time the second half of the regular power opening begins, the special chart 2 reserve will always be 0, and the first regular power winning in the second half opening will be the special chart 2.
Since this is the start of the variable display game, the effect of the delay in the first special chart 2 variable display game is eliminated.

As another measure against the delay, since the delay of the special chart 2 variable display game is caused by the special chart 1 variable display game executed in a specific game state, the time value (variation time and stop display time) of the special chart 1 variable display game may be set to an ultra-short time variation in which the special chart 2 variable display game can always start during the first half opening of the normal power. As an ultra-short time variation, unlike FIG. 64, the variation time of the special chart 1 variable display game in a specific game state may be made even shorter than the short fixed variation time of the special chart 2 variable display game.

In addition, in the first place, in this embodiment, since the special chart 2 reserve priority consumption (special chart 2 priority variation) is a system in which the special chart 2 variation display game is executed in priority over the special chart 1 variation display game, the special chart 1 variation display game is executed at most once in a specific game state, so the special chart 2 reserve priority consumption itself serves as a measure against late shifts.

[Countermeasures against stop shots]
Fig. 65 is a time chart explaining a method of increasing the actual remaining reserve by stopping the shot more than the prescribed remaining reserve number. Fig. 65 corresponds to Fig. 58 and shows the state after the big win of the pattern B (time reduction 5 times, prescribed remaining reserve number 5).

In FIG. 64, only four balls are awarded to the regular power by stopping the shot during the first half of the regular power opening, and up to five balls are not awarded. In other words, only four special chart 2 reserves are generated during the first half of the regular power opening,
It will not generate up to the maximum (5 corresponding to the number of times of the specified time reduction). Therefore, the 5th spin of the specified number of time reductions will not start, and unlike Figure 58 and Figure 62, the probability of hitting the normal map does not drop to a low probability during the interval of the normal power.

The second normal power operation (the second normal power hit) results in the fifth special power 2 during the first half of the normal power opening.
The variable display game starts, and finally the normal probability state is reached, but since the normal power is already in operation, the normal power operation continues until the second half is opened, and a special power 2 reservation can be generated. In this way, the normal power high probability state is extended by the stop shot, and the normal power operates twice, so the number of remaining reservations is increased by several (
In this case, you can increase it by four.

FIG. 66 is a time chart for explaining the stop shot countermeasure.
In the specific game state, when the latter half of one normal power operation is completed (when the normal power operation is completed), that is, when the normal power open state is completed a specified number of times (2 times), the specific game state is terminated. For example, the normal power remaining ball processing (FIG. 42) or the normal winning end processing (FIG. 43)
) by providing a processing step for setting the number of time-shortening variations to 0, the game control device 100 can end the specific game state when the latter half opening is completed.

This corresponds to the transition condition (iii) for transitioning from the specific game state to the transition state, which was previously described in relation to Fig. 54A, and when the transition condition (iii) is satisfied, the specific game state (time-saving mode) is terminated and then the transition state (remaining reserved mode) is entered. Note that if there is no special figure 2 reserved when the specific game state is terminated by the end of the latter half opening, the transition state (remaining reserved mode) is skipped and the game is transitioned to the normal game state (normal mode) of Fig. 54A.

In this way, as shown in Figure 65, the number of times that the special number 2 changes has not reached the number of times for time reduction (here, 5 times), but since the probability of hitting the normal number of times has dropped to a low probability after one normal operation (the end of the second half opening), there is no second normal number of times and no second normal operation. Therefore, the advantage of stopping the shot is lost, and the player will no longer stop hitting.

As another stop shot, if the special chart 2 reservation before the big win state is carried over after the big win state, the remaining reservation may increase if the game ball is not shot out until all of the special chart 2 reservations are consumed. As a countermeasure against this, after the big win state ends, the gate switch 34a of the normal chart start gate 34 detects the game ball and then starts the special chart 2 variable display game.

[Hit Instruction Display]
Fig. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a hitting instruction display that suggests (instructs) the player on the manner in which the game ball is launched on the display device 41. As shown in Fig. 67, the manner of the hitting instruction display may change in stages. In particular, Fig. 67 shows the manner in which the right-hand hitting instruction display changes in stages, but the left-hand hitting instruction display may also change in stages in the same manner.

In FIG. 67, during a jackpot (a jackpot round) and during normal power release, the special prize winning hole (special variable prize winning device) and normal power (normal variable prize winning device 37) are open, so the player has an advantage in hitting the right side. Therefore, during a jackpot (a jackpot round) and during normal power release, the performance control device 3
00 displays the right-hit instruction display in a large, conspicuous manner. However, during other jackpot endings and normal power intervals (closed state), there is little benefit to hitting to the right even during the right-hit state, so it is not necessarily necessary to launch the game ball by hitting to the right. For this reason, during jackpot endings and normal power intervals, the performance control device 300 displays the right-hit instruction display in a small, inconspicuous manner.

Just before the first half opening and just before the second half opening of the normal power, the performance control device 300 gradually changes the mode of the right hit instruction display, which was displayed small so as not to be noticeable, and displays it in a large mode so as to be noticeable at or just after the start of the first half opening and the start of the second half opening. This allows the player to start shooting game balls with a right hit before the first half opening in preparation for the first half opening, and also to start shooting game balls with a right hit before the second half opening in preparation for the second half opening. Therefore, in the first half opening and the second half opening of the normal power, the player can accumulate the specified number of special chart 2 reservations by repeatedly winning on the normal power, and the specified remaining number of reservations can be achieved.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a gradual change in the hitting instruction display (here, the right hitting instruction display).

(A) is the same as the stepwise change shown in Fig. 67, but as shown by the solid arrow, the arrow-shaped right-hit instruction display changes stepwise (3 steps) from an inconspicuous small state to a conspicuous large state. Conversely, as shown by the dotted arrow, it may change stepwise (3 steps) from a conspicuous large state to an inconspicuous small state just before the big win ending or just before the normal power interval.

In (B), as shown by the solid arrow, the right hit instruction display starts from an inconspicuous white outline and is partially (gradually) colored in red or the like in multiple stages (three stages) until it becomes an entirely colored and conspicuous form. Conversely, as shown by the dotted arrow, it may change gradually (three stages) from an entirely colored and conspicuous form to an inconspicuous white outline just before the big win ending or just before the normal power interval.

In (C), as shown by the solid arrow, the right-hit instruction display changes from an inconspicuous white (white-out) state to a conspicuous color in stages (three stages), from blue to yellow, and then to a conspicuous red state. The color change may be from a light color (low saturation state) to a dark color (high saturation state), or from a dark color (low brightness state) to a bright color (high brightness state). Conversely, as shown by the dotted arrow, the display may change from a conspicuous red state to an inconspicuous white (white-out) state in stages (three stages) just before the big win ending or just before the normal power interval.

[An example of screen transition]
Figures 69A to 69D are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the first embodiment. The performance on the display device 41 is controlled by the performance control device 300. Note that Figure 69 corresponds to Figure 58 (after a big win with pattern B).

In (A), in the last big win round (10R) during the big win, the big win round presentation is being executed. Since there is an advantage to hitting to the right, the right hit instruction display 551 in the shape of an arrow is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner.

Next, in (a), the big win ending presentation is executed in the big win ending after the last big win round. Even in the right-hitting state, there is little profit in hitting the right, so the right-hit instruction display 551 is displayed in a small, inconspicuous manner.

Next, in (C), the state is before the start of the special chart variable display game in the time-saving state after the big win ending. The presentation mode is the time-saving mode #1. The numbers "0" indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and "0" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 are displayed in the special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, respectively. Since it is a right-hit state with support (normal chart high probability state), and the normal power is released immediately, the right-hit instruction display 551 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. As mentioned above, the mode of the right-hit instruction display 551, which was displayed small, may be gradually changed to a large mode.

The game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34 and the normal map starts to change. Since the normal map probability is 100%, the normal map hits and the normal power operation starts, and the first half opens (first half normal power opening).
As a result, regular electricity will be released.

In (D), the game ball that passed through the normal power start gate 34 in the open state of the normal power enters the normal power as it is, and the decorative special power 2 variable display game is started. At the start of the decorative special power 2 variable display game, a variable display setting process (FIG. 52) sets a display corresponding to the time-saving mode #1.

Then, the change (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is displayed in the change display area 61 as identification information.
0, and the change (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed as identification information in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, right area 610B, and middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left pattern (decorative first pattern A), right pattern (decorative first pattern B), and middle pattern (decorative first pattern C) are changing, respectively. Each decorative special pattern (left pattern, right pattern, middle pattern) is composed of a square frame (frame image) and a number (number image), but it may be a character (character image) instead of a square frame. In the frame, the color of the number is different from the color of the part other than the number. Also, in (D), each decorative special pattern is changing at a high moving speed (high-speed changing), but the frame image (or character image) may be hidden (deleted) and only the number may change. Also, during high-speed changing, each decorative special pattern may be displayed thinly in a semi-transparent manner.

In the second hold display section 530b (standby area) which displays the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the second hold display, the hold display 533 is displayed by winning the regular power.
(Second hold display) is displayed for a moment, but the left rectangular frame hold digestion area 540 is immediately displayed.
In the reserved consumption area 540, a changing reserved display 533b indicating a changing reserved (start memory that was the execution right of this special chart changing display game) related to the running special chart changing display game is displayed. Note that the first reserved display section 530a that displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) as the first reserved display (first start memory display) is not displayed here.

After that, in (O), during the first half of the normal power open, special chart 2 reservations are generated one after another by winning the normal power, and the reservation display 533 corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation is displayed one after another in the second reservation display section 530b. Then, the special chart 1 reservation number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660 respectively show,
The number "0" indicating the number of reserved special chart 1 and the number "3" indicating the number of reserved special chart 2 are displayed. In addition, an enemy character 554 (tadpole) who will be fought in a later battle performance appears, and an ally character 557 also appears. As a dialogue performance, the line of the enemy character 554 "It's a fight" is displayed in text, and the line of the ally character 557 "Reserved increase" is displayed in text in response to the increase in the reserved special chart 2. The dialogue may be output as sound from a speaker.

In (F), in response to the fact that the special chart 2 reservation has reached the upper limit of four, the ally character 557's line "Charging completed" is displayed in text. Special chart 2 reservation number display section 660
The number "4" is displayed, indicating the number of reserved special charts 2.

Next, in (G), the first half opening (first half normal power opening) ends, and the first special chart 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state ends, and the losing stop patterns "1, 8, 2" are displayed in the variable display areas 610, 615. Since it is during the normal power interval (closed state), there is not much benefit to hitting right even during the right hit state, and the right hit instruction display 551 is displayed in a small, inconspicuous manner.

In addition, here, as a pre-reading performance (reserved change notice), the reserved display 533 in the normal state changes to a state (character) indicating the expectation degree of the special reserved variable display game of the special reserved 2, and becomes reserved display 533d-533g. For example, the magnitude of the expectation degree of the character is
33e > hold display 533d > hold display 533g > hold display 533f.

After that, in (K), the reserved special chart 2 of the reserved display 533d is consumed, and the second special chart 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state is executed during the interval of the normal power with a variable time that is much shorter than the first special chart 2 variable display game. Also, the number "3" indicating the reserved special chart 2 number is displayed in the reserved special chart 2 number display section 660. Furthermore, the second reserved display section 530b has moved to the upper right side, but the reserved display 533d has disappeared.

In the pending consumption area 540, a changing pending display 533b corresponding to the pending display 533d is displayed. The changing pending display 533b (▽) has a different form from the pending display 533 imitating a character, but it may have the same form. If it has a different form, it is easy to display the changing pending display 533b in the narrow pending consumption area 540, and if it has the same form, it is easy to display the pending display 533 waiting (before consumption).
It is easy to understand the relationship between this and the pending change display 533b that is currently being consumed.

In the center of the screen, the character in the reserved display 533d becomes an ally character 557,
In the battle performance, the enemy character 554 is attacked (acted upon)
A beam (light ray) is emitted to the enemy character 554. The enemy character 554 that appears during the interval of the normal power is the one that appeared in (E) and (F) during the first half of the normal power opening, so the continuity of the presentation is maintained. Note that instead of becoming character 557, reserved display 533d imitating a character may directly act on enemy character 554 to fight. In this case, in (H), reserved digestion area 540 and changing reserved display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (H) described below, etc.).

After that, in (K), the third special chart 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state is executed during the regular power interval in a short variable time after the end of the second special chart 2 variable display game. In the reserved consumption area 540, the variable reserved display 533b corresponding to the reserved display 533e is displayed. In addition, the number "2" indicating the reserved number of special chart 2 is displayed in the reserved number display section 660. In addition, the reserved display 533e has disappeared from the second reserved display section 530b.

On the screen, the character in the reserved display 533e becomes a sub-character 558a (helper character, auxiliary character) supporting the friendly character 557, and the enemy character 558a becomes a sub-character 558b (helper character, auxiliary character) supporting the friendly character 557.
Participate in the attack of 54 and use the beam (
When a sub-character 558a joins the attack, the state of the beam of the sub-character 558a is changed so that it can be recognized that the sub-character 558a has joined the attack.
The beam pattern of the friendly character 557 is different.
Instead, the reserved display 533e imitating the character directly becomes the enemy character 55.
4 to start a battle (the same applies to the pending displays 533f and 533g below).
In this case, from (Ke) to (Sa), the pending digestion area 540 and the changing pending display 533b are hidden (the same applies to (Tsu) to (To), etc. described below).

In addition, the character of the reserved display 533 in the second reserved display section 530b and the sub-character 5
Character 58 is displayed smaller, in monochrome, or in a pale color, for example, so as to be less noticeable than main character character 557. This makes it easier to recognize which character is the main character.

Next, in (K), the fourth special chart 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state is executed during the regular power interval in a short variable time after the end of the third special chart 2 variable display game. In the reserved consumption area 540, the variable reserved display 533b corresponding to the reserved display 533f is displayed. In addition, the number "1" indicating the reserved number of special chart 2 is displayed in the reserved number display section 660. In addition, the reserved display 533f has disappeared from the second reserved display section 530b.

On the screen, the character in the reserved display 533f becomes a sub-character 558b supporting the friendly character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and emits a beam (ray of light) at the enemy character 554 together with the friendly character 557 (main character) and the sub-character 558a.

Next, in (K), the fifth special chart 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state is executed during the regular power interval in a short variable time after the end of the fourth special chart 2 variable display game. In the reserved consumption area 540, the variable reserved display 533b corresponding to the reserved display 533g is displayed. In addition, the number "0" indicating the reserved number of special chart 2 is displayed in the reserved number display section 660. In addition, the reserved display 533g has disappeared from the second reserved display section 530b.

On the screen, the character in the reserved display 533g becomes a sub-character 558c supporting the friendly character 557, participates in the attack of the enemy character 554, and emits a beam (ray of light) at the enemy character 554 together with the friendly character 557 (main character) and the sub-characters 558a and 558b.

Next, in (C), the fifth special chart 2 variable display game after the end of the big win state ends, and the losing stop patterns "7, 2, 3" are displayed in the variable display area 610, 615. This also ends the time-saving state (time-saving mode #1), and the system enters a transition state (low probability state of normal chart) in which the remaining reserve can be consumed. After that, the latter half opening (second half normal power opening) begins, and the normal power is released.

Next, in (S), the game ball that passed through the normal map start gate 34 in the normal power open state enters the normal power as it is, and the decorative special map 2 variable display game is started. Here, it is in a right-hit state without support (low probability state of normal map), but since the normal power is opened as the second half opening, the right-hit instruction display 551 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. As mentioned above, the mode of the right-hit instruction display 551, which was displayed small, may be gradually changed to a large mode.

Here, since the time-saving state with a high probability of winning a normal game has ended and the player may not be fully aware that the normal game has been released, a normal game position image 561 that shows a schematic representation of the position of the normal game on the game board 30 may be displayed along with the text display "Aim for the normal game."

In the following (S) to (Na), the remaining reserve is consumed in the transition state after the time-saving state ends, and the special chart 2 variable display game is executed from the 6th to the 10th time after the big win state ends. In Figures 69C and 69D, the transition state (S) to (Na)
In this case, as described above, the advantageous state advantageous to the player continues from the time-saving state, and the same presentation mode (common presentation mode) as the time-saving mode #1 in the time-saving state is used. Therefore, from (su) to (na), the same presentation as from (e) to (shi) is executed.

That is, during the second half of the regular power release, from (Su) to (So), a performance is executed in which four special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) are accumulated in response to the sixth special chart 2 variable display game, and from (Ta) to (
In (a), the 7th to 10th special chart 2 variable display games are executed, while a battle performance corresponding to each special chart 2 variable display game is executed.

By setting the time-saving state and the transition state to the same presentation mode in this way, even though it tends to be difficult to recognize whether the state is in the time-saving state or the remaining reserved amount is being consumed due to the common presentation mode, a large gaming value can be obtained by hitting the remaining reserved amount variable display game, which can delight the player.

In addition, an example of switching from the time-saving mode #1 in the time-saving state to another remaining reservation consumption mode in the transition state will be described later in Figures 69E and 69F.

From (Su) to (So), the latter half of the regular power supply opening (late half regular power supply opening) will be maintained, and
The th special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and the special chart 2 reservation is increased as the remaining reservation. After that,
From (Ta) to (Na), the four special chart 2 reserved (remaining reserved) that were accumulated in the latter half of the release will be released from the seventh time to the first time.
It is consumed by executing the special chart 2 variable display game up to the 0th time. After (Na), the game enters the normal game mode, and the presentation mode also changes to the normal mode.

In addition, the enemy character 554 that appears after the start of the second half of the normal power release is the one that appeared in the time-saving state (E) to (C), and the continuity of the presentation with the time-saving mode #1 is maintained. Also, (S) to (N) correspond to (E) to (C) and have the same presentation, but (C)
The lines of the enemy character 554 and the friendly character 557 (main character),
The characters of the reserved display 533 may be different from those of the time-saving mode #1. In addition, after (Ta), the state changes from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting when the latter half of the game is released, and the left-hand hitting instruction display 552
is displayed in an inconspicuous small manner. Note that, while the special chart 2 reservation is being consumed, such as from (Ta) to (To), the play instruction display (here, the left play instruction display 552) is not displayed in order to prevent the player from becoming confused, and the play instruction display may be displayed from (Na) onwards, when all the special chart 2 reservations have been consumed and the special chart 1 variable display game can be started.

Also, (2) to (1) show the case where the 8th special chart 2 variable display game of (2) becomes a small win (a big win after V passes) or a big win, and (2) becomes an SP reach and a movie performance is executed. In the movie, a performance in which the enemy character 554 (tadpole) explodes and disappears may be performed.

In addition, in (iv), the left-hit instruction display 552 is changed from a conspicuous color (red) to an inconspicuous color (blue) so as not to interfere with the movie production, etc.
The state of 33g may be returned to the original state (▽). Furthermore, in (iv), the reserved display 533, the reserved digestion area 540, and the changing reserved display 533b may be hidden so as not to interfere with the movie production or the like.

Next, in (Nu), a stopping pattern for a small win or a big win is displayed, and in (Ne), a fanfare performance for a small win or a big win is executed.

As above, with reference to FIG. 69A-D, an example of the performance on the display device 41 after the big win of the pattern B has been described. However, the performance after the big win of the patterns C-F is the timing of the end of the time-saving state (S).
69A-D will be executed just before the time. For example, after the big win of the pattern F, the time-saving state ends at the time of (K).

Also, after the big win of the pattern A, the performance of saving the special pattern 2 from (E) to (Ka) is executed until the end of the second half of the normal power opening (the end of the normal power operation), and the performance from (Ki) to (So) is omitted, and the performance from (Ta) onwards is executed after the end of the second half opening. Also, after the big win of the pattern G, for example, the performance from (E) to (Sa) can be repeated until the end of the time-saving state.

[Another example of screen transitions]
Figures 69E and 69F are another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the first embodiment. (S1) to (N1) in Figures 69E and 69F replace (S) to (N) in Figures 69C and 69D described above. This example also corresponds to Figure 58 (after the big win of pattern B).

In the transition state from (S1) to (Na1), unlike the above-mentioned (S) to (Na), after the time-saving state ends, the presentation mode changes from the time-saving mode #1 in the time-saving state to a different remaining reservation consumption mode (Figure 5
As shown by the hatching, in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the screen background may be different from that in the time-saving mode #1 in relation to the change in the presentation mode. Therefore, from (S1) to (Na1)
In this case, different effects are executed from (E) to (S).

In (Su1) to (So1), the latter half of the normal power is maintained (the latter half of the normal power is opened), and the sixth special chart 2 variable display game is executed, and the remaining reserved special chart 2 reservation increases. In addition, the enemy character 554 has changed from the character (tadpole) of the time-saving mode #1 from (U) to (Sa) to another character (UFO) in relation to the change in the presentation mode.
The rest is the same as (Su) to (So).

After that, from (Ta1) to (Na1), the four special charts 2 reserved (remaining reserved) that were accumulated in the latter half of the release were
will be consumed by playing the 7th to 10th Special Chart 2 Variable Display Games.
After step 1), the game enters normal play mode and the presentation mode also changes to normal mode.

From (Ta1) to (Na1), the hold display 533d-53 in the second hold display section 530b
The character 557 of the ally displayed in (Su1) to (So1) gets into the tank character 563, which is another ally character, and combines with it (by acting on it), and becomes the enemy character 554 (UF
In addition, as a hold change notice, the state (color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the hold display 533d-533g in the second hold display section 530b may be changed according to the expectation of a big win.

Every time a new special chart 2 variable display game is executed, the reserved display 533 imitating a bullet in the second reserved display section 530b is erased, and the tank character 563 is replaced by the enemy character 554 (U
The erased pending display 533 becomes a pending display 533b in the pending digestion area 540, but the pending display 533b (▽
) is a different display from the hold display 533 which resembles a bullet.

In addition, (Ni 1) to (Ne 1) are the same as (Ni) to (Ne), except for the state of the hold display 533g.
Since it is the same as the above, the explanation will be omitted.
It would be nice to have a scene where 54 (UFO) is shot down and falls.

In addition, after (Ta1), the latter half of the normal power supply is released and the left-hand side is activated.
As shown in A, the remaining reserved consumption mode as a performance mode is divided into a mode before the end of the normal power release from (Su1) to (So1) and a mode after the end of the normal power release from (Ta1) to (Na1) (or (Nu1)). Therefore, the background image (shown in hatching) from (Su1) to (So1) and (Ta1)
The background images (shown in shading) of the first (Na1) (or the second (Nu1)) are different, and the effects are different.
It would be good to have commonalities in the presentation, such as using the same UFO.

As shown in FIG. 69E-F above, the presentation mode of the predetermined state in which the normal power is converted to the open state after the time-saving state ends is made different from the presentation mode in other than the predetermined state. The presentation mode in other than the predetermined state is the presentation mode from (Ta1) to (Na1) (or (Nu1)) during the consumption of the remaining reserved in which the normal power is in the closed state, the presentation mode from (U) to (Sa) during the time-saving state, the presentation mode in the jackpot state, and the presentation mode in the normal game state (normal mode) without the battle presentation. In particular, by making the presentation different from that during the time-saving state even in the same right-hitting state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the predetermined state in which the normal power is in the open state after the time-saving state ends. Note that, unlike the present embodiment, when the low probability of the normal power is made larger than 0% (for example, about several%), the normal power may be converted to the open state by the normal power hit during the normal game state (normal mode), but in this case, it may also be included in the predetermined state in which the normal power is converted to the open state.

Above, referring to Fig. 69E-F, another example of the presentation on the display device 41 after the big win of the pattern B has been described. However, in the presentation after the big win of the patterns C-F, the timing of the end of the time-saving state is before (Sa), so the mode changes to the remaining reserved consumption mode before (Sa), and the presentation mode of the reserved display mode, the character mode, the screen background, etc. changes. If it feels strange to change the reserved display mode or the character mode before (Sa), it is sufficient to switch only the screen background to the remaining reserved consumption mode.

Also, after the big win of the pattern A, the performance of saving the special pattern 2 from (E) to (Ka) is executed until the end of the second half of the normal power opening (the end of the normal power operation), and the performance from (Ki) to (So1) is omitted, and the performance from (Ta1) onwards is executed after the end of the second half opening. Also, after the big win of the pattern G, for example, the performance from (E) to (Sa) can be repeated until the end of the time-saving state.

[Modification of the first embodiment]
A modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 70 to 77. In this modification,
For patterns B-F, the number of time-saving times is fixed at four, but the support state, which is the state related to the mode of normal power support, differs depending on the pattern, and as a result, the specified remaining number of holds (specified remaining number of holds) also changes depending on the pattern.

[Time-saving number of times and the number of reserved times corresponding to the modified pattern]
Figure 70 is a table showing the support state, the number of time reductions, and the number of reserved remaining times, etc., corresponding to the symbols that are the winning types of the special symbol variable display game, with respect to the modified example. Since the symbols A and G are the same as those in Figure 55 except that they are in the support state A, the explanation will be omitted.

In the case of patterns B-F, which are the types of jackpots in the special pattern 2 variable display game started during the normal pattern high probability state, the number of time-saving periods after the jackpot is fixed at four, but the support states after the jackpot with patterns B-F are support states A-E, respectively, and change according to the pattern.

In addition, for patterns B-D, the prescribed remaining reserved number is 4, 6, or 8 depending on the support state, but for patterns E and F, it is random because of support state D and support state E. Therefore,
After the jackpot state ends, the total number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be consumed by executing the special symbol 2 variable display game is 8, 10, or 12 for symbols B-D, and is random for symbols E and F.

For patterns B-D, the probability of a small win is 1/8, and the continuation rate is 65.6% and 73.
7%, and 79.9%, and the transition rates to the confirmed mode were 24.3%, 32.3%, and 38.
5%. For patterns E and F, the continuation rate and the transition rate to the fixed mode are random. The continuation rate is the sum of the reserved special pattern 2 that is consumed after the end of the jackpot state (i.e., the total number of reserved special patterns 2 after the end of the jackpot state).
The continuation rate increases as the total number of symbols B to D increases. Also, as the number of reserved symbols increases, the transition rate to the fixed mode increases.

In this way, the operating mode of the normal power after the end of the jackpot state (support state, support mode) differs depending on the type of jackpot (special result) (pattern B-F), so the continuation rate and the rate of transition to the fixed mode differ depending on the type of jackpot (pattern B-F), increasing the excitement of the game.

[Features of the modified version of the map change display game and the normal train operation]
71 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal map variable display game and the normal power operation in the modified example. The normal map hit probability, the maximum count number of normal power, and the normal map stop time are the same as those in FIG.

The winning symbols (winning stop symbols, regular winning symbols) in the normal symbol variation display game are one type or multiple (four in this case); there are multiple symbols for the jackpot symbols E and F, but only one type for the other jackpot symbols.

The start memory number (number of reserved normal maps) of the normal map variation display game is 1, and even during the winning state (normal power operation) and during the variation of the normal map variation display game, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, only 1 is stored as the start memory of the normal map variation display game. For this reason, in this modified example, the process of step A7706 of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 34) is not executed, and the number of reserved normal maps can be updated by +1 even when the normal map variation display game is changing or in the normal map winning state.

The fluctuating time of the fluctuating display game is set according to the support state. The fluctuating time (fluctuating display time) is fixed at 48 msec. As mentioned above, the sum of the fluctuating time and the fluctuating time is preferably less than 600 msec.

[Modified example of normal power release pattern]
Figures 72 and 73 show the opening pattern (normal power opening pattern) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) of this modified example. The normal power opening pattern shows the operation mode of the normal power due to one normal winning. The normal power opening pattern selected after the jackpot state ends differs depending on the jackpot pattern A-G (i.e. the type of jackpot). The number enclosed in the square frame is the value of the control pointer (Figure 41, etc.) during the normal winning.

After the end of the big win state with the patterns A, B, and G, the state regarding the mode of the normal power support becomes the support state A (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal power opening pattern of the support state A,
In one normal power operation, the normal power is released twice with an interval in between. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and the normal power release time for both the first half release and the second half release is 1300 msec.

Assuming that the launch speed of the balls is 100 per minute, the normal speed is 600 msec.
Since a game ball can win every time, in support state A, it is expected that four game balls will win in the normal power with one normal power operation. Of course, if the game ball does not win in the normal power, the actual number of winning balls will be less than the expected number (here, four). The total opening time of the normal power in the first half opening and the second half opening, 2600 msec, is slightly longer than the winning interval of 600 msec multiplied by the expected number (here, four), allowing for some leeway.

After the end of the big win state with pattern C, the state regarding the mode of normal power support becomes support state B (Figure 70). As shown in Figure 72, in the normal power release pattern of support state B, normal power is released twice with an interval in the normal power operation due to one normal pattern hit. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 30,000 msec, and the normal power release time for both the first half release and the second half release is 1,950 msec.

Assuming that the launch speed of the balls is 100 per minute, the normal speed is 600 msec.
Since a game ball can win every time, it is assumed that six game balls will win in one normal power operation in support state B. The total opening time of the normal power in the first half opening and the second half opening, 3900 msec, is slightly longer than the winning interval of 600 msec multiplied by the expected number (here, six balls), allowing for some leeway.

After the end of the big win state with pattern D, the state regarding the mode of normal power support becomes support state C (Figure 70). As shown in Figure 72, in the normal power release pattern of support state C, normal power is released twice with an interval in the normal power operation due to one normal pattern hit. The normal power interval time (wait time) is 30,000 msec, and the normal power release time for both the first half release and the second half release is 2,600 msec.

Assuming that the launch speed of the balls is 100 per minute, the normal speed is 600 msec.
Since a game ball can win every time, it is assumed that eight game balls will win in one normal power operation in support state C. The total opening time of the normal power in the first half opening and the second half opening, 5200 msec, is slightly longer than the winning interval of 600 msec multiplied by the expected number (here, 8 balls), allowing for some leeway.

As described above, the open period and the closed period (interval) of the normal power supply during or after the specific game state after the end of the jackpot state can be changed according to the symbol, which is the type of jackpot (special result). Therefore, even if the number of time-saving times is the same (4), the specified remaining number of reserved balls and therefore the actual remaining number of reserved balls can be changed according to the jackpot symbol, which increases the variety of the game and improves the interest of the game.

After the end of the big win state with the symbols E and F, the state regarding the mode of the normal power support becomes the support state D and E (FIG. 70). As shown in FIG. 73(A), in the support state D and E, the winning symbols of the normal symbol variable display game are four, normal symbol winning symbols 1 to 4, which are selected by allocation (lottery) according to the winning symbol random number each time the normal symbol hits. The states in which the normal symbol winning symbols 1 to 4 are selected in the support state D and E are respectively called the support state D1 and E1, the support state D2 and E2, the support state D3, and the support state E4.
E3, and support states D4 and E4.

In one normal power operation by a normal winning, the normal winning pattern is 1 to 4 (support state D1-D4,
In each of the normal power release patterns, the normal power is released 1 to 4 times with an interval in between. Regardless of the number of times the normal power is released according to the normal power pattern 1 to 4 (support state D1-D4, E1-E4), the normal power interval time (wait time) is 100 msec, and the normal power release time is 1500 msec.

In addition, both support state D1 and support state E1, both support state D2 and support state E2, both support state D3 and support state E3, and both support state D4 and support state E4 are the same normal power release pattern.

Assuming that the launch speed of the balls is 100 per minute, the normal speed is 600 msec.
Therefore, based on the total opening time, the number of game balls that can enter the normal power in one normal power operation is 2 in the support states D1 and E1, 5 in the support states D2 and E2,
In the support states D3 and E3, it is assumed that there will be 7 balls, and in the support states D4 and E4, it is assumed that there will be 10 balls. Of course, if the game ball does not land on the normal power, the actual number of winning balls will be less than the assumed number.

As shown in Figures 73(B) and (C), the only difference between support state D and support state E is the allocation rate (selection rate) of the regular winning patterns 1 to 4 in the allocation (lottery) by the winning pattern random number. In support state D corresponding to pattern E, the allocation rate (selection rate) of the regular winning patterns 1 to 4 is 40%, 30%, 20%, and 10%, respectively. In support state E corresponding to pattern F, the allocation rate (selection rate) of the regular winning patterns 1 to 4 is 10%, 20%, 30%, and 40%, respectively. Therefore, in the regular power operation due to one regular winning pattern, the average number of times the regular power is opened is greater in support state E (average value = 3 times) than in support state D (average value = 2 times).

In this way, when the jackpot (special result) is of a predetermined type (pattern E, F), the operation mode of the normal power after the jackpot state ends is changed to a plurality of operation modes (support states D1-D4, E
Therefore, if the big win is of a predetermined type (designs E and F), there is no prescribed number of reserved balls, and the player cannot predict how many balls will actually be left on the table, so the player can play with anticipation for the number of reserved balls, which increases the interest of the game.

[Timing chart according to a modified example]
74-76 are timing charts showing the game state, normal probability (normal hit probability), normal state, normal power state, special 2 reserved number, special change display game (special change), etc. after the jackpot of this modified example. Note that the further to the right in the timing chart, the more time has passed. FIG. 74 illustrates the case where the support state A is reached after a jackpot with pattern B, FIG. 75 illustrates the case where the support state C is reached after a jackpot with pattern D, and FIG. 76 illustrates the case where the support state D (or support state E) is reached after a jackpot with pattern E (or pattern F).

74 to 76 show the passing of the game ball through the normal start gate 34 (normal gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball into the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) (start gate 2
The detection of switch 37a) is also shown as a pulse.

In Figures 74 to 76, the process up to the start of the first normal power operation and the accompanying first special chart 2 variable display game is the same as in Figures 57 to 59.

In FIG. 74, after a jackpot with pattern B, the normal power operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in support state A is executed three times, and the normal power is opened a total of six times. As described above, the game control device 100 controls the change time (execution time) and stop display time of the special chart 2 variable display game based on the number of special chart 2 changes (number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed) from the end of the jackpot state. Then, in support state A, the fourth special chart 2 variable display game, which corresponds to the number of time-saving times, is controlled to be executed in accordance with the third normal power operation (normal chart hit state). The stop after the end of the normal chart hit state corresponds to the normal power remaining ball processing time and the normal chart ending time.

The number of reserved special charts 2 increases when the normal power line is open (open state), and the number of reserved special charts 2 increases when the normal power line is closed (closed state).
This will tend to decrease as the reserve is consumed.

In addition, in order to allow four special chart 2 reserves to be accumulated during the time-saving state and the third normal power operation, the change time of the fourth special chart 2 change display game is set longer than the change time of the first to third special chart 2 change display games and longer than one normal power opening time (the time for the first half opening or the second half opening).

In Fig. 74, the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is started in accordance with the end of the second half opening in the second normal power operation, but the fourth special chart 2 variable display game may be ended at any time after the end of the second half opening and before the start of the third normal power operation. Also, the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is stopped in accordance with the end of the first half opening in the third normal power operation, but the fourth special chart 2 variable display game may be ended at any time after the end of the first half opening and before the start of the second half opening.

Then, after the third normal power operation that was started by the normal hit during the time-saving state ends, the fifth special chart 2 variable display game is controlled to start. The variation time of the fifth to eighth special chart 2 variable display games that are executed by the remaining reserve after the time-saving state ends may be equal to or less than the variation time of the first to third special chart 2 variable display games during the time-saving state. This allows the remaining reserve to be consumed quickly. Conversely, the variation time of the fifth to eighth special chart 2 variable display games can be made longer than the variation time of the first to third special chart 2 variable display games during the time-saving state to perform a slow corresponding performance. Also, in the case of pattern B, the prescribed remaining reserve number is four that occurred during the time-saving state.

In FIG. 75, after a big win with pattern D, the normal power operation (first half open + interval + second half open) in support state C is executed twice, and the normal power is opened a total of four times.
In accordance with the opening of the second half of the first normal power operation (the opening of the second half of the first operation) and the opening of the first half of the second normal power operation (the opening of the second half of the second operation), the special chart 2 variable display game is controlled to be executed four times, corresponding to the number of time-saving times.

In addition, in order to allow four special chart 2 reserves to be accumulated during the time-saving state and the first half opening of the second normal power operation, the change time of the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is set longer than the change time of the first to third special chart 2 variable display games and longer than one normal power opening time (in FIG. 75, it is set to about twice the normal power opening time). In FIG. 75, the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is stopped in accordance with the end of the first half opening in the second normal power operation, but it may be slightly delayed if the fifth special chart 2 variable display game is executed after the second first half opening.

The number of reserved special charts 2 increases when the normal power line is open (open state), and the number of reserved special charts 2 increases when the normal power line is closed (closed state).
This will tend to decrease as the reserve is consumed.

Then, during the interval after the end of the second first half opening, the fifth to seventh special chart 2 variable display games are controlled to start. After that, the second half opening in the second normal power operation started by the normal chart hit during the time-saving state is performed after the time-saving state ends, and the special chart 2 variable display game is executed while increasing the special chart 2 reserve as a remaining reserve. If the variation time of the fifth and subsequent special chart 2 variable display games executed by the remaining reserve after the time-saving state ends is appropriately adjusted, the fifth to twelfth special chart 2 variable display games can be executed by consuming eight special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) after the time-saving state ends. In this way, in the pattern D, the prescribed remaining reserve number becomes eight.

In addition, since the remaining reserve can be consumed quickly, the change time of the 5th to 12th special chart 2 change display games may be less than or equal to the change time of the 1st to 3rd special chart 2 change display games during the time-saving state.
The change time of the 12th special chart 2 change display game may be set longer than the change time of the 1st to 3rd special chart 2 change display games during the time-saving state, to perform the presentation slowly.

As with the case of pattern D, the variable time (execution time) and stop time of the special chart 2 variable display game can be changed according to the number of executions in response to the operation mode of the normal power (support state B) for pattern C so that the remaining reserved number becomes 6. For example, for pattern C, the number of special chart 2 variable display games that start during the interval of the normal power after the time reduction ends can be reduced from that of pattern D, so that the remaining reserved number becomes 6.

As described above, the pattern of the variable time (execution time) and the stop time according to the number of executions of the special chart 2 variable display game is set according to the operation mode of the normal power (support state A-C). Therefore, the remaining number of reserved can be changed according to the operation mode of the normal power (support state A-C).

In FIG. 76, after the big win with the pattern E or the pattern F, in the support state D or the support state E,
The normal power operation (first half opening + interval + second half opening + ...) according to the normal winning pattern is randomly repeated, and the normal power is opened a total of several times. In the support state D or support state E, it is difficult to control so that the four special chart 2 variable display games corresponding to the number of time reductions are executed in accordance with the random opening of the normal power.

However, the number of reserved special charts 2 increased during the open state of the normal power line, and increased during the interval of the normal power line (
It tends to decrease as the Special Chart 2 reserve is consumed (closed state).

In addition, in order to allow four reserved special charts 2 to be stored during the time-saving state, the change time of the fourth reserved special chart 2 variable display game is set longer than the change time of the first to third reserved special chart 2 variable display games and longer than one normal power release time. The remaining reserved number is the number of patterns 1 to 4 (support state D1-D4, E1-E4) that are the winning pattern of the normal chart when the last pattern is a winning pattern during the change of the fourth reserved special chart 2 variable display game.
As shown in Figure 76, when the normal pattern 4 is the normal pattern at the end of the fourth special pattern 2 variable display game, the total open time of the normal pattern is large, so the remaining reserved number is also large, but when the normal pattern 1 is the normal pattern, the total open time of the normal pattern is small, so the remaining reserved number is also small.

In addition, since the remaining reserved amount can be consumed quickly, the change time of the special chart 2 change display game from the fifth time onwards after the time-saving state ends may be less than the change time of the special chart 2 change display game from the first to third times during the time-saving state. Conversely, the change time of the special chart 2 change display game from the fifth time onwards may be longer than the change time of the special chart 2 change display game from the first to third times during the time-saving state, so that the performance can be performed slowly.

As a measure to deal with the aforementioned forward shift in this modified example, in order to match the specified remaining reserved number with the actual remaining reserved number, after a jackpot with patterns B-D, the fifth special chart 2 variable display game is not executed until the normal power opening (first half opening) that started during the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is completed, in order to match the specified remaining reserved number with the actual remaining reserved number. As a measure to deal with the aforementioned backward shift, in order to match the specified remaining reserved number with the actual remaining reserved number, after a jackpot with patterns B-D, the second half opening of the normal power due to a normal chart hit during the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is executed after a specified number of special chart 2 variable display games (for example, 0 times for pattern B, 2 times for pattern D) have started. Note that, since the remaining reserved number cannot be specified and is random, no shift countermeasures are required for patterns E and F. Conversely, since no shift countermeasures are required, the second half opening of the normal power due to a normal chart hit during the fourth special chart 2 variable display game is executed after a specified number of special chart 2 variable display games (for example, 0 times for pattern B, 2 times for pattern D) have started.
Similarly, it is also possible to provide four designs per regular pattern.

The above has explained what happens after the jackpot state for each pattern ends, but the change time for all games other than the fourth special pattern 2 change display game after the jackpot state ends (the first to third games and the fifth and subsequent special pattern 2 change display games) can be made the same regardless of patterns B-F, simplifying control and reducing the memory capacity used in ROM 111b, RAM 111c, etc.

[Example of screen transition according to the modified example]
77A and 77B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the modified example of the first embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 corresponds to FIG. 75 (after the big win of the pattern D).

After the same presentation as (A) to (O) in Figure 69 is performed, the open and closed states of the regular power are repeated during the time-saving state, but as shown in (O1), when the regular power is in the closed state (regular power is closed), the number of reserved special charts 2 decreases and it takes a while for the number of reserved special charts 2 to reach four.

After that, at (Ka) when the time-saving state ends, the number of reserved special chart 2 reaches 4, and then the same presentation as (Ki) and (Ku) in Figure 69 is performed.

Next, in (K1) to (K4), unlike (K) to (S) in Fig. 69, the characters in the reserved display section 530b (waiting area) such as reserved display 533e-533i are not sub-characters supporting the friendly character 557, but rather main characters who fight one-on-one against the enemy character 554. After (K4), the same performance as that from (Ts) in Fig. 69 onwards is performed, and here, the reserved display 533e-533i in the second reserved display section 530b (waiting area)
Characters such as 533i are used as sub-characters 558 supporting friendly characters 557.

In addition, after the time-saving state ends, when the normal power is closed (normal power is closed) from (K) to (K2), the reserved special chart 2 decreases, and when the normal power is open (normal power is open) from (K3) to (K4), the reserved special chart 2 increases. In the normal power closed state, even during right-hitting, there is little benefit to hitting right, so the right-hit instruction display 551 is displayed in a small, inconspicuous manner, and when the normal power is open, there is benefit to hitting right, so the right-hit instruction display 551 is displayed in a large, conspicuous manner.

Although the first embodiment and its modified examples have been described above, the specific game state may be not only a time-saving state but also a probability variable state (excluding a latent probability variable state).
In addition, the first embodiment and its modified examples may be applied to a type of gaming machine (so-called digital pachinko) that has a specific game state (time-saving state or probability change state). In a type of gaming machine that has a probability change state, especially for a machine type (so-called sweet digital pachinko, choi pachinko) that has a high probability of winning even with a low probability of a special chart after the probability change state ends, the remaining reserved number can be expected to win a jackpot, so applying the first embodiment and its modified examples is very effective.

[Actions and Effects of the First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a special chart variable display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (a normal variable winning device 37, a normal power supply) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) can execute a game (e.g., a special chart 2 variable display game) based on a start memory (e.g., a special chart 2 reservation) generated by winning the variable winning device. In a specific gaming state, a game value (e.g., the number of time-saving times or the number of probability variable times) granted to a player when the game results in a special result (e.g., a small win or a big win, including a big win by a V winning after a small win) is different from a game value granted to a player when the game results in a special result after the end of the specific gaming state.

In such a gaming machine 10, since there is a difference in the gaming value awarded for the special results of the game during a specific gaming state and after the end of the specific gaming state, the player will be happy or sad depending on the number of start memories that occur during the specific gaming state and that cause the game to be executed after the end of the specific gaming state, which increases the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game (a normal game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (a normal game 37, a normal power supply) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (a normal game) is a specific result (a normal win). The gaming control means can convert the variable winning device to an open state multiple times by deriving one specific result (a normal win), and can convert the variable winning device to an open state in both a high probability state where the probability of the game resulting in a specific result (a normal win) is high and a low probability state where the probability of the game resulting in a specific result (a normal win) is low.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability of the game resulting in a specific result (a normal winning combination) is low, the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) can be converted to an open state, and the start memory generated by winning the variable winning device (for example, special winning combination 2 reserve) can be stored, which delights the player and increases the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state or a probability-changing state). The gaming control means can generate a predetermined state (e.g., a right-hitting state with a low probability of winning a normal game) in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state even after the specific gaming state has ended, and the presentation control means
The presentation mode in the predetermined state is made different from the presentation mode in other states than the predetermined state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to the open state in the same manner as the specific game state can be distinguished from the specific game state in terms of the presentation appearance. Also, by making the presentation mode unique to the predetermined state, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special chart variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable winning device, without consuming the start memory (e.g., special chart 2 reservation) which is the execution right of the game (special chart variable display game),
The starting memory can be accumulated by winning the variable winning device.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special chart variable display game) for a long time in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and can execute a game for a short time in response to the closed state of the variable winning device. Therefore, during a specific game state, the open state of the variable winning device (for example, the first half open)
In the closed state (for example, interval), many start memories (for example, special chart 2 reserved) are consumed, and in the open state (for example, second half open) after the specific game state ends, many start memories (for example, special chart 2 reserved) can be stored. For this reason, the number of start memories (remaining reserved number) consumed after the specific game state ends is set to the upper limit of the number of start memories (for example, 4).
Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes a game (special chart variable display game) in response to the open state of the variable winning device for a time longer than the open state time of the variable winning device.
Even if there is a discrepancy between the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special chart variable display game), the discrepancy can be absorbed and the actual remaining reserved number coincides with the specified remaining reserved number without any excess or deficiency.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special chart variable display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period when the variable winning device is in the closed state. Therefore, even if the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variation time, variable period) of the game (special chart variable display game) are out of sync, the lag can be absorbed, and the actual remaining reserved number coincides with the specified remaining reserved number without any excess or deficiency.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines whether the game (special chart variable display game) has been played a predetermined number of times (
For example, the specific game state is controlled to end when a certain number of times (time-saving number or probability-changing number) is executed. Then, after the specific game state ends, the number of times (a prescribed number of remaining reserved times of 5 to 9) in which a game based on a start memory generated by winning a prize in a variable prize-winning device is executed is changed according to a predetermined number (for example, the number of time-saving number or probability-changing number). Therefore, if the predetermined number is selected by lottery, the remaining reserved number is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, and the player will be happy or sad depending on the remaining reserved number, which increases the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means determines whether the game (special chart variable display game) has a special result (
A predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time-saving times or the number of times of probability change) can be set as the game value to be given to the player when a special result (small win or big win) is obtained, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type of special result (design). Therefore, the predetermined number of times of a specific game state after the end of a special game state based on a special result is set by lottery (allocation) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes randomly, which increases the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means sets the sum of the number of times (prescribed remaining reserved number) that the game (special chart variable display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state and the predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time-saving times or the number of chance changes) to a constant (for example, 10). Therefore, the continuation rate of the specific game state can be kept the same, while the remaining reserved number can be made variable. If the same presentation mode is executed during the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state while this fixed number of special chart 2 variable display games are executed, it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether the specific game state is in progress or has ended, and the player will be surprised when a large game value is obtained by hitting the remaining reserved jackpot after the end of the specific game state, which increases the interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special chart 1 variable display game) and a second game (special chart 2 variable display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on a start memory generated by a game ball entering a predetermined winning area (e.g., the start winning port 36), and can execute the second game based on a start memory generated by a game ball entering a variable winning device. The second game (special chart 2 variable display game) is executed based on the first game (special chart 1
The first game can be executed in priority over the variable display game, and when the first game is executed in the specific gaming state, it is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times that the first game (special chart 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state is reduced, and the number of times that the first game (special chart 1 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state is reduced.
Even if this is executed, the start of the second game (special chart 2 variable display game) is not significantly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game is divided into a first game (a game in which the number of turns is changed) and a second game (
The game control means can execute a first game based on the passage of a game ball through a predetermined area (normal game start gate 34), and can execute a second game (special game change display game) based on a start memory generated by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power). In a specific game state, even if a game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal game start gate 34) during the execution of the first game and during a winning state generated by a specific result of the first game, a start memory (normal game memory) that is a right to execute the first game is not generated.

Therefore, the first game (the normal map variation display game) can only be started during the stop display, and the normal map variation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (the normal map start gate 34) during the stop display. In this way, the start memory (normal map memory) of the first game (the normal map variation display game)
Since the number of winnings is not actually accumulated, the first game (regular game) is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in a specific game state, the operation of the winning device due to a win in the first game (regular game) and the second game (special game) are easily linked without any misalignment.

In the first embodiment, the game control means ends the specific game state when the open state of the variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) is completed a specified number of times (for example, twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of winnings in the variable winning device is less than a specified number (for example, the number of time-saving times or the number of chance wins) by stopping the shot, and the specific game state is extended. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the open state of the variable winning device due to a win in the first game (normal game with variable display) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the execution time (variation time) of the game based on the number of times the game (special chart variable display game) has been executed since the end of the special game state.
A game (special chart variable display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable winning device, and when the variable winning device is in the open state, a start memory (e.g., special chart 2 reserve) which is the right to execute the game (special chart variable display game) can be stored.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, when the result of the game (special symbol variable display game) is a special result (for example, a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V winning after a small win), a special gaming state (for example, a big win state) advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, normal power) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state and is easier to convert to the open state in a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving state or a probability variable state) after the special gaming state than in the special gaming state. The variable winning device has a different operating mode (support state, support mode) after the end of the special gaming state depending on the type (pattern) of the special result.

Therefore, depending on the type (pattern) of the special result, the remaining number of reserved games, which is the number of games (special game display games) played after the specific game state, and the continuation rate of the specific game state are also determined according to the type (pattern) of the special result.
This changes depending on the type of special result (symbol), and players start to pay attention to it.
The interest in the game is also increased.

In a modified example of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a gaming control means capable of executing a game (special chart variable display game). The gaming control means sets the execution time of the game and the stop time of the game according to the number of times the game has been executed after the special gaming state has ended. The pattern of the execution time and the stop time according to the number of times the game has been executed is set according to the operating mode (support states A-C) of the variable winning device. Therefore, the game (special chart variable display game) after the end of the specific gaming state is set according to the type (symbol) of the special result and thus the operating mode (support states A-C) of the variable winning device.
The remaining number of pending executions, which is the number of times the execution is performed, can be changed.

In a modified example of the first embodiment, when the special result is a predetermined type (pattern E or pattern F), the game control means determines the operation mode of the variable winning device after the special game state ends by lottery (lottery for the normal winning pattern) from among multiple operation modes. Therefore, if the special result is a predetermined type (pattern E or pattern F), there is no stipulated remaining reserved number, and the player cannot predict how many remaining reserved numbers will actually be, so that the player can play with anticipation for the remaining reserved number, which increases the interest of the game.

In a modified example of the first embodiment, the game control means controls the open and closed periods of the variable winning device during or after the specific game state according to the type of special result (pattern B-D).
Therefore, the number of remaining reserved points can be changed depending on the type of special result (pattern B-D) and the operation mode of the normal power (support state A-C).

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 78 to 80. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate.
The embodiment relates to a display mode of a pending display (start memory display) corresponding to a second start memory during or after a time-saving state (normal power support state, power support) as a specific game state.

[Example of screen transition from time-saving state to after time-saving state]
Referring to Figures 78 to 80, the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the second start memory from the time-saving state to after the time-saving state will be described.

Fig. 78 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of a screen transition from a time-saving state to a time-saving state after the time-saving state. Fig. 79 is an example (middle) of a screen transition from a time-saving state to a time-saving state after the time-saving state, and Fig. 80 is an example (second half) of a screen transition from a time-saving state to a time-saving state after the time-saving state.

(a) of Figure 78 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first start memory that occurred before the jackpot, after the time-saving state has been entered after the jackpot has ended.

A plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41.
The decorative first pattern A (identification information, pattern, decorative special pattern) is displayed in 10A, the decorative first pattern B is displayed in the right area 610B, and the decorative first pattern C is displayed in the middle area 610C, each enlarged as a large pattern and displayed in a changing manner ("↓↓↓").

A variable display area 615 is provided in the upper right corner of the display screen, where the variable display game is executed by a decorative special symbol (small symbol). The small symbol in the variable display area 615 is displayed variable ("↓↓↓") in a normal variable manner. The results of the variable display in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are the same. Also, when the variable display game is executed, at least one of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

In addition, when the special chart 1 variable display game is executed in the time-saving state, the variable display area 6
Instead of displaying the first decorative symbols A to C of 10, only the small symbols may be displayed in the variable display area 615 in the upper right corner. In this way, during a specific game state such as a time-saving state, the variable display area 610
By not displaying the variable display related to the special chart 1 variable display game in the decorative first patterns A to C, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the special chart 1 variable display game, which is the main game in the normal game state, and the special chart 2 variable display game, which is the main game in the specific game state, and the interest in the game can be increased. Also, when the special chart 1 variable display game is executed in the time-saving state, the immediately preceding stop pattern, i.e., the jackpot pattern, may be left displayed in the decorative first patterns A to C of the variable display area 610, and the default (initial state) pattern (for example, "123
The display may remain in standby mode with a message such as "Press Release" displayed.

In addition, a special chart 1 reservation number display unit 650 and a special chart 2 reservation number display unit 660 are provided in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41.
The number "1" indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and the number "0" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 are displayed respectively.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, there is a start memory display area (specific display section, specific display area).
The square frame pending digestion area 640 (changing pending display area) and the second pending display area 630b
The following will be provided.

In the pending digestion area 640, a pending display 633w during change is displayed as a pending display (start memory display, special chart 1 pending display, special chart changing pending display, special chart digesting pending display) corresponding to the first start memory (special chart 1 pending) related to the variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game) being executed (being digested). In other words, there are two first start memories that occurred before the big win, and the pending display corresponding to the start memory that occurred first (older start memory) of the two first start memories is displayed as a pending display 633w during change.
Equivalent to 33w.

In addition, the later generated start memory (new start memory) of the two first start memories is not consumed and is waiting, and the number indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 in the reserved special chart 1 number display unit 650 becomes "1" as described above. In addition, the changing reserved display 633w corresponding to the first start memory and the reserved consumption area 640 in which the changing reserved display 633w is displayed may be hidden in the time-saving state.

The second hold display section 630b displays hold displays (start memory display, special chart 2 hold display, waiting hold display) corresponding to the generated second start memory (special chart 2 hold). For example, in (a) of FIG. 78, where the time-saving state has just been entered immediately after the end of a jackpot, the second start memory has not yet occurred, and hold displays corresponding to the second start memory are not displayed (0). Also, the start memory of the main variable display game in a specific game state such as the time-saving state is the second start memory.
As in the first embodiment, depending on the game status, etc., one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game.

In addition, in the start memory display area at the bottom of the display screen, the first hold display section 630a, which displays the hold display corresponding to the first start memory, is hidden, and the hold display corresponding to the first start memory in standby is not displayed during the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state, the performance control device 300 displays the first hold display section 630b instead of the second hold display section 630b.
0a can be displayed at the bottom of the display screen (specific display section). That is, the starting memory of the main variable display game in the normal game state becomes the first starting memory.

Also, the performance control device 300 may display a right-hit display (right-hit instruction image) from the time-saving state until the second start memory occurs. Furthermore, even after the second start memory occurs, the right-hit display may continue to be displayed when in a right-hit state. Note that, since the player is playing a right-hit game from the jackpot game (special game), the performance control device 300 may not display a right-hit display unless the player plays a left-hit game.

(i) of Figure 78 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when multiple second start memories occur after the special chart 1 variable display game is executed based on the first start memory as shown in (a) of Figure 78.

A second start memory is generated by a game ball entering the second start winning hole (start hole 2, second start winning area) of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric role, normal electricity). At that time, for example, when three second start memories are generated as shown in (i) of FIG. 78, the number indicating the special chart 2 reserved number in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 becomes "3", and reserved display 633x, 633y, 633z are displayed in the second reserved display section 630b.

The hold indications 633x, 633y, and 633z displayed in the second hold indication section 630b are the first
The hold display 633w corresponding to the start memory is displayed in a predetermined display mode (e.g., "▽") different from the display mode (e.g., "◯") of the hold display 633w corresponding to the start memory.
In addition to differentiating the display style (e.g., "▽"), the predetermined display style may be different in color, pattern, size, etc. Therefore, the reserved display corresponding to the first start memory and the reserved display corresponding to the second start memory are displayed in different display styles, making it easier for the player to distinguish which reserved display corresponds to which start memory.

In addition, a rectangular frame (for example, "□") is provided at the bottom of the reserved display 633x, 633y, and 633z as a base to indicate that the reserved display is a special reserved display.
Therefore, when the player sees the base of the square frame, the reserved display 6
The player can recognize that 33x, 633y, and 633z are special reserved displays, and the sense of expectation can be heightened. The special reserved display becomes a reserved display corresponding to the first remaining reserved display described later, and when a variable display game is executed based on the special reserved display, the presentation is switched to a predetermined presentation mode. In FIG. 78(b) and the figures described later, the word "new" is illustrated above the reserved display so that the player can see that it is a newly generated reserved display, but the word "new" may be actually displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 to inform the player that a new reserved display has been generated.

(U) of Figure 78 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 1 variable display game being executed in (A) and (B) of Figure 78 stops varying.

For example, as shown in FIG. 78(c), when the variable display game shows a losing symbol (e.g., "358
"), the next variable display game will be executed according to the pending hold (start memory). Also, in (u) of FIG. 78, a new second start memory is generated, and a hold display 633 is displayed in the second hold display section 630b. The number indicating the number of reserved special chart 2 in the reserved special chart 2 number display section 660 becomes "4". In the following explanation, it is assumed that all the stopping results of the variable display game will be losses.

In addition, if the result of the variable display game is a big win or a small win, it can transition to a performance associated with a big win or a small win (such as a fanfare performance or a performance that instructs how to hit to aim for a V win) during the following explanation. In addition, the variable display game's variable time value in the case of a big win or a small win is set longer than the variable time value in the case of a miss,
The performance control device 300 can execute a dedicated performance as the performance. In addition, the variable time value in the case of a big win or a miss may be a fixed value (a fixed variable time value).

In addition, since the special chart 1 variable display game is executed first before the second start memory occurs, it becomes easier to accumulate the second start memory during the special chart 1 variable display game. Therefore, when the game is switched to a predetermined presentation mode (predetermined presentation stage), the player can easily view a series of presentations (continuous presentations) by multiple second start memories in succession without interruption, which can increase the interest of the game. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 executes the special chart 1 variable display game in the time-saving state with shortened variation (fixed variation time value). Therefore, the special chart 1 variable display game can be stopped without being prolonged, so the special chart 2 variable display game can be started quickly, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special chart 1 variable display game stops varying, if there is a waiting second start memory, the square frame of the reserved digestion area 640 changes and switches to a dedicated frame (for example, a "convex pedestal") for digesting the second start memory. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the next variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, and the expectation can be increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the performance control device 300, in the case of (u) of FIG. 78, during the time-saving state, the first hold display unit 63
0a, the first hold display section 630a may be displayed together with the second hold display section 630b to display the hold display corresponding to the first start memory. Also, the display mode (frame) of the hold digestion area 640 does not need to be separated into a display mode for the hold display of the first start memory (square frame, for example, "□") and a display mode for the hold display of the second start memory (dedicated frame, for example, "convex base"), and may be displayed in a common display mode, for example, a display mode for the hold display of the second start memory (dedicated frame, for example, "convex base").

FIG. 78 (e) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second start memory after the special chart 1 variable display game.
The second start memory can be given priority over the first start memory that is waiting (stored) and a special chart 2 change display game can be executed (special chart 2 priority change).

When the special chart 2 variable display game is executed, as shown in (e) of FIG.
The first patterns A to C of the 10 decorations and the small patterns in the variable display area 615 are displayed in a variable manner ("↓↓↓"). Also, when the special pattern 2 variable display game is started, the reserved displays 633x, 633y, 633z, and 633 displayed in the second reserved display section 630b move one by one to the left (reserved shift), and one reserved display 633x at the left end of the second reserved display section 630b moves to the reserved digestion area 640, and the variable reserved display 633x is displayed on the convex base of the reserved digestion area 640.

In addition, when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed during the time-saving state, the performance control device 300
The presentation can be switched to a presentation mode (time-saving mode, time-saving stage) corresponding to the time-saving state. In addition, when the time-saving state is entered or when the first variable display game, i.e., the special chart 1 variable display game, is executed during the time-saving state ((a) in FIG. 78), the presentation may be switched to a presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving state.

In addition, in (e) of FIG. 78, a new reserved display 633a is generated, and the reserved number display unit 6
The number indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 out of 60 will be "4".

The variable pending display 633x in the pending consumption area 640 displays, for example, a character "4 remaining" to inform the player of the remaining number of times of a predetermined presentation mode. As shown in (e) of FIG. 78, the number indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed integrally with the variable pending display 633x, and "remaining" may be displayed above the variable pending display 633x. According to such a display mode, since only the number indicating the remaining number of times can be switched according to the pending shift, it is easy to understand which variable pending display the number displayed corresponds to, and the player can easily accurately grasp the remaining number of times of a predetermined presentation mode.

When the reserved consumption area 640 is displayed in a common display mode, when the reserved display of the first start memory is displayed in the reserved consumption area 640, the characters notifying the remaining number of times, such as "4 remaining," may be hidden. Also, when the reserved display of the first start memory is displayed in the reserved consumption area 640, the characters notifying the remaining number of times may be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode, such as semi-transparent or gray, so that the player finds it difficult to focus on them.

In addition, for example, in this embodiment, the time-saving count is set to 1, and the variable pending display 633
When the special chart 2 variable display game corresponding to x stops varying, the time-saving state ends (time-saving end),
The game state transitions to the transition state. The second start memory (special pattern 2 reservation) that occurred (was stored) during the time-saving state (time-saving) but was not consumed during the time-saving state is consumed as a remaining reservation in the transition state after the time-saving state ends. In (e) of FIG. 78, the reservation display corresponding to the remaining reservation is reservation display 633y, 633x, 633, 633a. Therefore, while the transition state has the same jackpot probability and normal pattern probability as the normal game state, it becomes an advantageous state in which a small jackpot is likely to occur with a small jackpot probability (for example, 1/8) due to the consumption of the remaining reservations. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the transition state may be included in the normal game state in terms of probability, or may be treated separately from the normal game state since it is an advantageous state. Also, the player may pass a V (
A big win can be generated by the passing of the game ball through the V winning hole, or by V winning (1 type 2
seed mixer).

Here, in the first embodiment, all second start memories (special chart 2 reserves) that are consumed after the time reduction ends are called remaining reserves, but in the second embodiment, for example, special chart 2 reserves that occur during the time reduction and are consumed after the time reduction ends are called specified remaining reserves (first remaining reserves, remaining reserves generated during time reduction), and special chart 2 reserves that occur after the time reduction ends can be called excess reserves (second remaining reserves, excessive remaining reserves).

Also, for example, in the second embodiment, the first specified number of special chart 2 reservations that are generated during the time-saving feature and consumed after the time-saving feature ends may be called a specified remaining reservation (first remaining reservation), and the special chart 2 reservations that are consumed after the specified remaining reservation may be called an excess reservation (second remaining reservation).

After the variable display game related to the predetermined remaining reservation is executed, when the variable display game related to the excess reservation is started to be executed, the presentation is switched from the predetermined presentation mode (predetermined presentation stage) to another presentation mode. Therefore, in other words, the predetermined remaining reservation becomes the remaining reservation in which the variable display game is executed during the predetermined presentation mode, and the excess reservation becomes the remaining reservation in which the variable display game is executed during the other presentation mode.

For example, in (e) of FIG. 78, a reserved display 63 is generated during the time-saving and is consumed after the time-saving ends.
3y, 633x, 633, and 633a are reserved displays corresponding to the predetermined remaining reserved (first remaining reserved, remaining reserved generated during time reduction). In addition, the predetermined remaining reserved (first remaining reserved, remaining reserved generated during time reduction) in this case
The number of is, for example, four.

(O) in Figure 78 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first remaining reservation after the time-saving feature has ended.

When a variable display game based on the first remaining reserve is started, the presentation control device 300 can switch the presentation from the time-saving mode to a predetermined presentation mode, for example, a remaining reserve consumption mode occurring during the time-saving in the transition state.

The remaining reserve generated during time-saving consumption mode is a mode for consuming the first remaining reserve (predetermined remaining reserve, remaining reserve generated during time-saving) that occurs during time-saving and is consumed after the time-saving ends.

When a certain number (for example, four) of the first remaining reserves are consumed in the time-saving remaining reserve consumption mode, the excess reserve consumption mode (
The performance will transition to the first performance.

In addition, there is a remaining reserve consumption mode in a transition state, which is a mode consisting of the remaining reserve consumption mode occurring during the time-saving period and the excess reserve consumption mode.

For example, the performance in the time-saving remaining reserve consumption mode as a predetermined performance mode can be executed as a series of performances related to the performance of the time-saving mode executed immediately before and the story and the characters that appear. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the scenario that is developed (displayed, played) over multiple variable display games executed based on the special chart second reserve that is consumed during the time-saving and the first remaining reserve that is consumed after the time-saving ends as a series of performances, and can enjoy a more complex performance with a deeper story, which can increase the interest of the game. Note that, as described above, the performance modes in advantageous states such as the transition state and the specific game state (time-saving mode, remaining reserve consumption mode that occurs during time-saving in the remaining reserve consumption mode) may be the same performance mode and used as a common performance mode without being separated.

Also, for example, after the time-saving feature has ended, when the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) opens due to the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 or a further hit in the normal game variable display game (when the low probability of the normal game is greater than 0%), and the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37, a second remaining reserve is generated, and a new reserve display 633b corresponding to the second remaining reserve is displayed (displayed as "new") as shown in FIG. 78 (E). Note that the normal variable winning device 37 may be opened even after the time-saving feature has ended, for example, when the normal variable winning device 37 is open at the time of the time-saving feature ending and the open state continues slightly after the time-saving feature ends, or in the case of the latter half of the first embodiment. The reserve display 633b corresponding to the second remaining reserve is displayed when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first remaining reserves are consumed in the time-saving feature generated remaining reserve consumption mode.
This is the excess remaining reserve that will be consumed in the excess reserve consumption mode to which the transition is made after the remaining reserve is consumed.

A rectangular frame (e.g., "□") is displayed at the bottom of the hold display 633z, 633, 633a corresponding to the first remaining hold, while a hold display 63
The rectangular frame serving as the base is not displayed at the bottom of 3b. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish the reserve display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining reserve, so that the player can easily recognize to what extent the performance is performed as a predetermined performance mode by the remaining reserve consumption mode during time reduction. Furthermore, in order to make it easy to distinguish the reserve display 633a corresponding to the last (latest) first remaining reserve, the word "Last" can be displayed on the base of the reserve display 633a.

In addition, the characters (remaining number of modes) that inform the player of the remaining number of times of the predetermined presentation mode displayed on the changing reserved display 633y of the reserved consumption area 640 are switched to, for example, "3 remaining." Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize how many times the presentation of the remaining reserved consumption mode occurring during time reduction will be performed as the predetermined presentation mode.

(ka) in Figure 78 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second first remaining reservation after the time-saving feature has ended.

After the hold shift, when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second start memory corresponding to the second first remaining hold, that is, the variable hold display 633z, the remaining number of modes displayed on the variable hold display 633z in the hold consumption area 640 is switched to, for example, "2 remaining". Also, when the game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37, a second remaining hold occurs, and a hold display 633c corresponding to the second remaining hold is newly displayed (displayed as "new"). In addition, in the remaining hold consumption mode after the time reduction ends (remaining hold consumption mode generated during time reduction or excess hold consumption mode), the hold shift performance of the consumption hold (variable hold display) or the waiting hold may be omitted.

(k) of Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reservation after the time-saving feature has ended.

After the reservation shift, the third first remaining reservation, i.e., the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second start memory corresponding to the variable reservation display 633, as in (a) of FIG. 78, and the remaining number of times of the mode displayed on the variable reservation display 633 in the reservation consumption area 640 is switched to, for example, "1 time remaining". In addition, the reservation display 633d corresponding to the new second remaining reservation is displayed in the second reservation display section 63
0b (displaying "new").

(k) of Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation after the time-saving feature has ended.

After the reservation shift, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 78 (a) based on the fourth first remaining reservation, i.e., the second start memory corresponding to the variable reservation display 633a, and the remaining number of modes displayed in the variable reservation display 633a in the reservation digestion area 640 becomes, for example, "0 remaining".
Switches to.

The second hold display section 630b displays hold displays 633b, 633b corresponding to three second remaining holds.
c, 633d are displayed. The number indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 in the reserved special drawing 2 number display section 660 is "
It becomes "3".

In FIG. 79 (K), the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation,
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the second start memory (special chart 2 reserved) occurs after (k) in Figure 79.

When a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, a second remaining reservation of the second start memory is generated, and a new reservation display 633e corresponding to the second remaining reservation is displayed (displaying "new"). Also, the number indicating the number of special chart 2 reservations in the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "4". Then, the first remaining reservation during waiting becomes 0, and the second remaining reservation becomes 4.

In FIG. 79 (ko), the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation,
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when transitioning to a result screen 670 after (k) of Figure 79.

The special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation, that is, the last (latest) first remaining reservation, and in the latter half of the variable period, the performance control device 300 can display a result screen 670 showing the game results for a predetermined period on the display screen of the display device 41 (result display).
In addition, the fourth game based on the first remaining reservation is in progress, and the (
In the case of the above, the performance mode is the remaining reserved consumption mode during time reduction. However, this is not limited to this, and the remaining reserved consumption mode during time reduction may end at the time of the result display and transition to another performance mode, the excess reserved consumption mode.

In this way, when all of the variable display games in the time-saving mode to the remaining reserve consumption mode occurring during the time-saving mode result in a loss, the performance control device 300 can display the result in the middle of the execution of the variable display game based on the latest first remaining reserve.

The result screen 670 can display the number of game balls acquired in the most recent (latest) jackpot, the number of game balls acquired in a series of jackpots since the first jackpot (the first regular jackpot), the number of consecutive jackpots, the details of the jackpot (regular jackpot, jackpot due to V winning during time-saving or transition state, the presentation content when the jackpot occurs), etc. A series of jackpots includes, for example, all jackpots that occurred while the right-hitting state continues.

In addition, the performance control device 300 hides the variable display area 610, the second reserved display section 630b, and the reserved consumption area 640 during the result display. Therefore, the result screen 670 can be displayed large on the display screen, making it easier for the player to view the result screen 670.
This can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, the variable display area 615, the special chart 1 reservation number display area 650, and the special chart 2 reservation number display area 660
The display remains the same, allowing the player to check the varying patterns, the number of reserved special patterns 1, and the number of reserved special patterns 2.

The result screen 670 may be displayed at the timing when the first (initial) variable display game based on the second remaining reservation is started ((sa) in FIG. 79).
If there are no remaining holds waiting, the result screen 670 may be hidden when the variable display game based on the last first remaining hold stops varying (immediately after (k) in Figure 79).

(sa) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while the result is being displayed.

When the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the first second remaining reservation, the presentation is switched from a predetermined presentation mode (a remaining reservation consumption mode occurring during time reduction) to another presentation mode, which is an excess reservation consumption mode. Also, even if the presentation is switched to the excess reservation consumption mode, the display device 41
The result screen 670 is maintained on the display screen.
This allows the player to have enough time to check the game results displayed on the display.

In addition, when a special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation is executed, the number indicating the special chart 2 reservation number in the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660 becomes "3".

In addition, in the excess reservation consumption mode, the state in which the result screen 670 is displayed may be called the result mode.

(i) of Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops varying.

For example, when the first special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation stops varying, the result mode ends, and as shown in (l) of FIG. 79, the display switches from the result screen 670, and the variable display game stops varying with a losing pattern (e.g., "267"). That is, the performance control device 300 continues to
The result screen 670 can be displayed. The timing of switching the display from the result screen 670 (the trigger of the screen transition) is determined by the start winning hole 36 (first start winning area, start winning hole 1).
) or the timing when the gaming ball enters or passes through a normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern start gate).

In FIG. 79 (c), the result screen 670 is hidden, and the first reserved display section 630a and the reserved consumption area 640 are displayed. In this way, the result screen 670 that starts to be displayed during the variable display game based on the last first remaining reserved is the first (initial) second
The display is hidden when the game based on the remaining reserve stops changing. The performance control device 300 may display the first reserve display section 630a to display the waiting second remaining reserve, while hiding the result screen 670 and the reserved consumption area 640 to hide the consumed second remaining reserve (varying reserved display).

(S) in Figure 80 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining reservation.

The performance control device 300 switches the performance from the result mode to the special mode (dedicated mode, special stage) during the excess reserved consumption mode, hides the result screen 670, and displays the variable display area 610 on the display screen. In other words, the excess reserved consumption mode can be divided into the result mode and the special mode.

In the special mode (exclusive mode, special stage), the special chart 2 variable display game for consuming the second remaining reservation is executed in a relatively short variable time (fixed variable time value) compared to the average value of the variable time of the special chart 1 variable display game in the normal game state. In addition, the background and stage of the display screen in the special mode may be a dedicated background and stage different from the normal game state, or may be the same as the normal game state.

In the special mode, the second hold display section 630b is not displayed, and the first hold display section 63
0a is displayed. Then, the reserved display 633f of the first start memory (reserved special chart 1) is displayed.
is not consumed and remains waiting in the first hold display section 630a, and the hidden second start memory (
The number of reserved special drawings 2 can be easily confirmed from the number "2" displayed in the reserved number display unit 660.

Furthermore, a hold display 633c (e.g., "▽") corresponding to the second second remaining hold is displayed in the hold consumption area 640. Therefore, a player who visually confirms that the hold display 633f in the first hold display section 630a does not shift to a hold and that the hold display 633c of the second remaining hold is displayed in the hold consumption area 640 can easily recognize that the variable display game currently changing in the special mode is the special chart 2 variable display game. In this way, the start memory of the main variable display game in the special mode (special chart 2 variable display game) is the second start memory (special chart 2 hold).
become.

In addition, the second remaining hold (changing hold display 633c) displayed in the hold digestion area 640 may be hidden, or may be displayed in the same display manner (e.g., "O") as the first start memory (special chart 1 hold), as shown in (su7) of Figure 87 described below.

(se) in Figure 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third second remaining reservation, and (so) in Figure 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the fourth second remaining reservation.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), the third second remaining reservation, i.e., the changing reservation display 633d
Based on the second start memory corresponding to the above, the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the same manner as (su) in Figure 80, and the number indicating the special chart 2 reserved number displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display unit 660 becomes "1".

Also, as shown in FIG. 80 (s), the fourth second remaining reservation, that is, the changing reservation display 6
A special chart 2 variable display game is similarly executed based on the second start memory corresponding to 33e, and the number indicating the special chart 2 reserved number in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 becomes "0".

In addition, the special chart 2 variation display game based on the second remaining reserve in the result mode and special mode shown in (sa) of Figure 79 to (ta) of Figure 80 is executed with shortened variation (fixed variation time value).

That is, the special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation is a special chart 2 variable display game during time reduction ((e) in FIG. 78) or a special chart 2 variable display game based on the first remaining reservation ((o) in FIG. 78)
Compared to (k) in Figure 79, the fluctuation time is shorter and ends earlier (fluctuation stops).

In addition, the special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation has a shorter variable time and ends earlier than the special chart 1 variable display game ((a) to (u) in Figure 78) executed during the time-saving period.

Therefore, after a series of effects in the time-saving mode or the time-saving remaining reserve consumption mode is completed, the second remaining reserve is quickly consumed in the excess reserve consumption mode (first effect), and the normal mode (second
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transition state from becoming protracted, and the game can proceed at a good tempo, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the special chart 1 variable display game executed during the time reduction also has a short variable time and ends early compared to the special chart 2 variable display game during the time reduction and the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first remaining reserve. Therefore, the special chart 2 reserve can be accumulated and the special chart 2 variable display game can be started quickly while suppressing the special chart 1 variable display game executed at the start of the time reduction from being prolonged. Therefore, the player can easily view the series of effects accompanying the execution of the special chart 2 variable display game continuously without interruption, which can increase the interest of the game.

(ta) in Figure 80 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining reservation stops varying.

For example, as shown in FIG. 80(a), when the variable display game shows a losing symbol (e.g., "416
When the change is stopped by pressing the "Stop" key, the pending change display 633e in the pending digestion area 640 becomes invisible.
The number indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 in the reserved special chart 2 number display section 660 becomes "0".

When all the second remaining reservations are consumed, the special mode ends and the presentation switches to normal mode.
In addition, a left hit display 671 (left hit instruction image) is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The left hit display 671 is a display for instructing the player to hit with the left hand.

In addition, the left hit display 671 is not limited to when all the second remaining reserves are consumed, but also after the time reduction ends (
The left hit display 671 may be displayed at the timing of (ko) in FIG. 79 when the result screen 670 is displayed, at the timing of (sa) in FIG. 79 when the presentation is switched to the excess reserved consumption mode, or at the timing of (su) in FIG. 80 when the presentation is switched to the special mode.
The display may be set to occur at the timing of

(c) in Figure 80 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 1 variable display game is being executed based on the first start memory (special chart 1 reserved).

By the hold shift, the changing hold display 633f corresponding to the special chart 1 hold is moved from the first hold display section 630a to the hold digestion area 640 and displayed, and the special chart 1 changing display game is executed based on the special chart 1 hold.

(1) in Figure 80 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 1 variable display game stops varying.

After that, for example, as shown in (tsu) of Figure 80, when the variable display game stops varying at a losing pattern (for example, "521"), all of the special pattern 1 reserve and special pattern 2 reserve are consumed.
Thereafter, the first start memory or the second start memory occurs, and the next variable display game is started.

Furthermore, during normal mode (left hit) when the normal variable winning device 37 is unlikely to open, it is usually difficult for the second start memory to occur, and the player will usually aim to have the game ball win the start winning port 36 (first start winning area, start port 1) in order to start the variable display game based on the first start memory.

In addition, in the normal mode where the first start memory usually occurs, if the second start memory occurs (when the low probability of the normal map is greater than 0%), unlike during the result display of FIG. 79 (ko) (sa) or during the special mode of FIG. 79 (su) to (so), the performance control device 300
The hold display section 630b may be displayed to display a hold display corresponding to the second start memory that has occurred. This allows the player to recognize that the second start memory has occurred in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if a second start memory occurs in normal mode (when the low probability of the normal game is greater than 0%), the performance control device 300 does not display the second hold display section 630b, as in the result display of FIG. 79 (ko) (sa) and the special mode of FIG. 79 (su) to (so), and the second hold display section 630b is not displayed.
The hold display corresponding to the start memory does not have to be displayed. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the second start memory occurs in normal mode.

[Example of screen transition from time-saving state on a time-saving 100-time machine]
With reference to Figure 81, the display mode of the reserved display corresponding to the second start memory from the time-saving state in the time-saving 100 times machine will be described. In the following explanation, the same contents as those in Figures 78 to 80 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 81 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition from a time-saving state in a time-saving 100-time machine.
This refers to a general gaming machine that can transition to a time-saving state (specific gaming state) and that can generate a time-saving state (normal power support state) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after a jackpot.

(a) in Figure 81 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the first time-saving special chart 2 variable display game is being executed after the game state has entered the time-saving state following the end of a jackpot.

The reserved consumption area 640 is switched to a dedicated frame (for example, a "convex base") for consuming the second start memory, and the changing reserved display 633v is displayed on the convex base as a special chart 2 reserved (
The second start-up memory is displayed in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating that the second start-up memory has been started.

The variable pending display 633v of the pending consumption area 640 displays, for example, a character "99 remaining" to inform the player of the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode (remaining number of time-saving times).
In the (a) and the figures described later, the explanation "time reduction x times" is shown at the top of the second reserved display section 630b so that the number of time reductions can be understood.
The player may be notified of the number of time-saving times by actually displaying the word "time". By notifying the number of time-saving times in this way, the player can easily recognize the current time-saving state of the variable display game, which can increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, the second hold display section 630b displays a hold display 633u in a display mode (e.g., "▽") indicating the second start memory.
A rectangular square (for example, "□") is displayed as a predetermined display mode indicating that 33u will be consumed during the time-saving period. This makes it easier for the player to recognize until what reserved display the time-saving period will continue, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

In FIG. 81 (hi), the special chart 2 variable display game is then repeated in the time-saving state, and the time-saving 9
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the fifth special chart 2 variable display game is being executed.

The pending display 633w in the pending consumption area 640 displays the remaining number of time-saving times, for example, "5 remaining." In addition, the second pending display section 630b displays pending displays 633x, 633y, and 633z in a display form (for example, "▽") indicating the second start memory. At the bottom of the pending displays 633x, 633y, and 633z, a pedestal (for example, "□") in a predetermined display form indicating that the time-saving time will be consumed is displayed in the same manner as the previously described pending display 633u.

(U2) in Figure 81 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game being executed in (Hi) in Figure 81 stops varying.

For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (U2), when the variable display game shows a losing symbol (e.g., "35
When the variation is stopped at (3) in FIG. 78, the next variation display game will be executed according to the pending (start memory) in the waiting state, as in (3) in FIG. 81. Also, in (3) in FIG. 81, the second
A start memory occurs and a hold display 633 is displayed in the second hold display section 630b.

In addition, when the special chart 2 variable display game stops varying, the pending display during the period until the next waiting special chart 2 variable display game based on the second start memory is executed is not displayed in the pending consumption area 640, and only a dedicated frame (for example, a "convex pedestal") for consuming the second start memory is displayed. Note that the performance control device 300 may execute the special chart 2 variable display game based on the next second start memory after performing a shift performance of the pending shift (performance in which the pending shifts), or may execute the special chart 2 variable display game after instantly switching the pending display to the next position (position after the pending shift) without performing a shift performance. Note that, during the variation stop, a pending display with a different color or transparency from the pending display during the variation during the variation may be displayed in the pending consumption area 640, and the next remaining number of time reductions (for example, "4 remaining") may be displayed.

(E2) in Figure 81 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the 96th time-saving special chart 2 variable display game is being executed.

For example, the remaining number of time-saving times, such as "4 remaining," is displayed in the changing pending display 633x of the pending digestion area 640. In addition, the second pending display section 630b newly displays a pending display 633a in a display mode (for example, "▽") indicating the second start memory.

Here, the performance control device 300 displays a new hold display 63 as shown in (E2) of FIG.
The character "Last" can be displayed on the base (for example, "□") at the bottom of 3a to inform the player that the time-saving state will end. Therefore, the player can recognize the timing of the time-saving end from the reserved display without focusing on the part that displays the remaining number of times, making it easier to grasp the flow of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

(O2) in Figure 81 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the 97th time-saving special chart 2 variable display game is being executed.

The second hold display section 630b displays a hold display 633 corresponding to the second start memory (special chart 2 hold).
b is newly displayed. The reserved display 633b is the remaining reserved (predetermined remaining reserved, first remaining reserved, remaining reserved generated during time reduction) that will be consumed in the transition state (probably normal game state) to which the time reduction state will be transitioned after the time reduction state ends. In this way, when the remaining number of time reductions becomes 3 or less, the remaining reserved that will be consumed after the time reduction ends will start to accumulate in the second reserved display section 630b.

In addition, the remaining reserved that is consumed after the time reduction ends is the second start memory, and the jackpot pattern random number of the second start memory is advantageously allocated so that the probability of ...

In addition, the performance control device 300 may display a pedestal (for example, "□") as a predetermined display mode at the bottom of the newly displayed hold display 633b.
The word "Last" can be seen by the player on the base of the reserve display 633a, and the player can recognize the timing of the time-saving end from the reserve display. In addition, the display mode of the reserve display is the same for the reserve consumed during the time-saving and the remaining reserve consumed after the time-saving ends, which increases uniformity.
This can prevent the presentation in the time-saving mode from feeling unnatural, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(Ka2) in Figure 81 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the 98th time-saving special chart 2 variable display game is being executed.

The second hold display section 630b displays a hold display 633 corresponding to the second start memory (special chart 2 hold).
The pending display 633c is also a remaining pending display, like the pending display 633b.

After that, when the 99th time-saving special chart 2 variable display game is executed, the display screen of the display device 41 will have the same screen transition as in (K) of FIG. 79, and when the 100th time-saving game is executed, the display screen will have the same screen transition as in (K) and (K) of FIG. 79. Then, after the time-saving game ends, the performance control device 300 will
A result screen 670 may be displayed as shown in step j).

In the above-mentioned screen transition example of (K) to (Ke) in Fig. 79 in the 1-type 2-type mixed machine, the reserved display 633b, 633c, 633d, and 633e displayed in the second reserved display section 630b are the second reserved excesses. However, in the case of a 100-time time reduction machine, when the transition is made from (K2) in Fig. 81 to (K) to (Ke) in Fig. 79, the reserved display 6
33b, 633c, 633d, and 633e are the first remaining reserves (remaining reserves) that are generated during the time reduction and consumed after the time reduction ends. Since the special chart 2 variable display game based on the four remaining reserves can be executed after 100 times of time reduction, the player can play a total of 104 times (100 + 4 times) of the special chart 2 variable display game to aim for a jackpot, which increases the interest of the game.

[Example of screen transition in modified version of special chart 2 reserved display]
82 and 83, a display mode in which the result display continues until the special chart 2 reservation is fully consumed will be described as a display mode of a modified example of the special chart 2 reservation display. Note that the following modified examples up to FIG. 87 are the same as those of the gaming machine 1 of the 1 type 2 type mixed machine (time reduction count 1 time) described in FIG. 78 to FIG. 80.
This is a modified example of the special chart 2 reserved display in 0.

Figure 82 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example (first half) of a screen transition in a modified example of the special chart 2 reserved display. Figure 83 is an example (second half) of a screen transition in a modified example of the special chart 2 reserved display.

(Ki 2) in Figure 82 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reserve in the reserve consumption mode generated during the time-saving period after the time-saving period has ended.

After the reservation shift, when the special chart 2 change display game is executed based on the changing reservation display 633 of the third first remaining reservation (second start memory), the changing reservation display 633 of the reservation digestion area 640
The remaining number of times of the mode displayed in the special number display unit 65 is, for example, "1 remaining".
The number indicating the number of reserved special figures 1 in 0 is "1", and the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 in the reserved special figure 2 display unit 660 is "4". That is, in (ki 2) of FIG. 82, the number of reserved special figures 1 and 2 are the same as those in (ki) of FIG. 79, and the first remaining reservation on standby is 1, and the second remaining reservation is 3.

Here, the performance control device 300 displays the hold display 633a for the first remaining hold, as shown in (K2) of FIG. 82, but does not display the hold displays for the three second remaining holds.
Since only the first remaining reserve (reserved display 633a) is displayed, it becomes easy for the player to understand until which reserved is consumed, the performance in the specified performance mode (reserved reserve consumption mode occurring during time-saving in the transition state) will be executed, and the interest of the game can be increased. Also, since only the first remaining reserve that is strongly related to the performance to be executed is displayed, an effective performance can be executed, and since the second remaining reserve that is weakly related is not displayed, it is possible to suppress the interference with the performance and to make it easier for the player to concentrate on the performance, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, although the second remaining reservation is not displayed in the figures from (ki2) onwards in Figure 82, the number "4" indicating the number of special chart 2 reservations is displayed in the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660, so the player can know the number of special chart 2 reservations.

(K2) in Figure 82 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation after the time-saving feature has ended.

After the reservation shift, the fourth first remaining reservation is displayed as a changing reservation display 633a.
The variable display game is executed in the same manner as in (ki2) of Figure 82, and the remaining number of times for the mode displayed in the variable pending display 633a in the pending consumption area 640 is switched to, for example, "0 remaining."

In addition, the performance control device 300 maintains a state in which the hold display of the second remaining hold is not displayed in the second hold display unit 630b. The number indicating the number of the special chart 2 holds in the special chart 2 hold number display unit 660 is "
It becomes "3".

(Ke2) in Figure 82 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation, and the second start memory (special chart 2 reservation) occurs after (Ku2) in Figure 82.

When the second remaining reservation of the second start memory occurs, the number indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 in the reserved special chart number display unit 660 becomes "4". At that time, since the reserved display is not displayed in the second reserved display unit 630b, the number of reserved special charts 2 in the reserved special chart number display unit 660 becomes "4" so that it is easy to understand that the second start memory has occurred.
Characters (for example, the word "new") may be displayed near 60 to notify that a second start-up memory has occurred.

(Ko2) in Figure 82 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation, and the transition to the result screen 670 occurs after (Ke2) in Figure 82.

In the latter half of the variation of the special chart 2 variation display game based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining reservation, the performance control device 300 displays a result screen 6 showing the game results for a predetermined period on the display screen of the display device 41.
70 is displayed (result display). The performance control device 300 displays the result screen 670 while maintaining the state in which the second remaining reserved display is not displayed in the second reserved display section 630b. Therefore, the display screen does not display the second remaining reserved display, and instead the result screen 670 is displayed large, making it easier for the player to view the result screen 670 and increasing the interest of the game.

(Sa2) in Figure 82 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation while the result is being displayed.

With the execution of the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reserve, the performance is switched from the remaining reserve consumption mode occurring during time reduction to the excess reserved consumption mode (result mode). The result screen 670 continues to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

(Shi2) in Fig. 82 is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops changing. Also, (Su2) to (So2) in Fig. 83 are display screens of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second to fourth second remaining reservations.

In this modified example, even if the special pattern 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops varying, the result mode continues, and the display of the result screen 670 is maintained as shown in (shi2) of FIG. 82. In addition, in the variable display area 615, the small pattern stops varying, and the losing pattern (
For example, "267".

After that, the result mode continues even when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second to fourth second remaining reservations, and as shown in (su2) to (so2) of FIG.
The display of the result screen 670 is maintained. At that time, the number indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 in the reserved special figure 2 number display unit 660 is decreased by one each time the variable special figure 2 display game is executed, and finally becomes "0" as shown in (No. 2) of FIG.

Therefore, since the result mode is maintained until all the second remaining reserves are consumed, a longer time can be secured for checking the result screen 670, and the player can slowly check the game result without rushing. In addition, since the result screen 670 can be displayed for a relatively long time, the performance control device 300 may display more detailed data such as the performance contents on the result screen 670.

(Ta2) in Figure 82 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining reservation stops varying.

When the fourth special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reservation stops varying, the result mode ends, the presentation switches to the normal mode, and the result screen 670 is hidden.
In the variable display area 610 of the display screen, a losing symbol of the special pattern 2 variable display game (for example, "41
6) is displayed. Then, as in (ta) of FIG. 80, the reserved digestion area 640, the first reserved display section 630a, and the left hit display 671 are displayed. The first reserved display section 630a
A hold display 633f corresponding to special chart 1 hold is displayed.

After that, in (chi2) (tsu2) of FIG. 82, similarly to (chi) (tsu) of FIG. 80, the special chart 1 variable display game is executed based on the first start memory (special chart 1 reserved), and the losing pattern (for example, "5
The fluctuation stops at "21".

In addition, the timing at which the result screen 670 is hidden is not limited to the timing at which the special chart 2 variable display game based on the fourth second remaining reservation stops varying, but may also be the timing at which the special chart 1 variable display game starts, or it may be the timing at which both conditions are met.

[Example of screen transition in variant 2 of special chart 2 reserved display]
Referring to Figure 84, the display mode when the results are displayed will be described as the display mode of variant example 2 of the special chart 2 reserved display.

Figure 84 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variant example 2 of the special chart 2 reserved display.

FIG. 84 (K) shows the second start memory (special chart 2 reservation) after FIG. 79 (K) in which the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation during the time-saving remaining reservation consumption mode.
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the occurrence of the second remaining reservation, which is the same as (K) in Fig. 79. When the second remaining reservation of the second start memory occurs, a new reservation display 633e corresponding to the second remaining reservation is displayed (displaying "new").

(Ko3) in Figure 84 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation, and the transition to the result screen 670 occurs after (Ke) in Figure 84.

The special chart 2 variation display game is executed based on the fourth (last, latest) first remaining reservation, and when the variation reaches the latter half, the performance control device 300 displays the result.

At that time, in the second modification of the special chart 2 reserved display, the performance control device 300 hides the variable display area 610 during the result display, while displaying the second reserved display area 630b and the reserved digestion area 640.
Therefore, the player can check the number of reserved special figures 2 by visually checking the reserved display of the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 and the second reserved display unit 630b, and can also easily check that the reserved special figure 2 is the second remaining reserved.

In addition, in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, a variable display area 6 is displayed in the same manner as in FIG.
Since the result screen 670 is displayed large instead of the result screen 10, the result screen 67
This makes it easier for the player to see the number 0, which increases the player's interest in the game.

(Sa3) in Figure 84 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation during result display in result mode.

The display screen of the display device 41 maintains the display of the result screen 670, and the word "END" is displayed above the variable reserved display 633b in the reserved consumption area 640 to notify the end of the remaining reserved consumption mode that occurred during the time reduction. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the series of effects based on the multiple special chart 2 variable display games based on the special chart 2 reserved and the first remaining reserved during the time reduction has ended.

In addition, the first second remaining reservation is located in the reservation digestion area 640 as a changing reservation display 633b, and the reservation displays 633c and 633b corresponding to the second remaining reservation in the second reservation display section 630b are displayed.
3d, 633e are also located one to the left. In the result mode (excessive reserved consumption mode), the performance control device 300 may omit the reserved shift shift performance in accordance with the shortened variation (fixed variation time value) of the special chart 2 variable display game, so that the second remaining reserved is consumed earlier. In addition, the performance control device 300 may display which reserved display is consumed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without omitting the reserved shift shift performance.

(c3) in Figure 84 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart change display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops changing.

For example, in variant example 2 of the special chart 2 reserve display, even if the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reserve stops varying, the result mode does not end, and the display of the result screen 670, the second reserve display section 630b, and the reserve consumption area 640 is maintained, as shown in (shi3) of Figure 84.
In the variable display area 615, a small symbol of a losing symbol (for example, "267") stops varying.

Then, in the result mode, the second remaining reservation is completely consumed, and the result screen 67 is displayed until the variable display area 610 and the first reservation display area 630a are displayed as shown in (Ta2) of FIG.
As in the case of 0, the display of the second reserved display section 630b and the reserved consumption area 640 is also maintained. Therefore, until all of the second remaining reserved is consumed, the player can easily check which reserved display is being consumed.

[Screen transition example in variant 3 of special chart 2 reserved display]
Referring to Figure 85, the display mode before the result display will be described as the display mode of variant example 3 of the special chart 2 pending display.

Figure 85 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variant example 3 of the special chart 2 reserved display.

(Ki4) in Figure 85 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the third first remaining reserve during the remaining reserve consumption mode generated during the time-saving period after the time-saving period has ended.

In FIG. 85 (K4), the hold display 63 corresponding to the second remaining hold in the second hold display section 630b is
3b, 633c, and 633d are the same display mode as the reserved display of the first start memory (special chart 1 reserved) (
For example, it will be displayed as "〇".

On the other hand, the hold display 633a corresponding to the first remaining hold is displayed in a predetermined display form (for example, "▽").
and a base (e.g., "□") is displayed at the bottom of the pending display 633a.

(K4) and (K4) in FIG. 85 are display screens of the display device 41 when a special chart change display game is being executed based on the fourth first remaining reservation. In (K4) in FIG. 85,
The second remaining reservation is generated as the start memory (special chart 2 reservation). Similarly, in (ku4) and (ke4) of FIG. 85, the reservation display 633b, 633c corresponding to the second remaining reservation in the second reservation display section 630b
, 633d, 633e are displayed in the same display manner (e.g., "O") as the reserved display of the first start memory (special chart 1 reserved).

Therefore, the second remaining reserve consumed in the excess reserve consumption mode (result mode, special mode) is displayed in the same display mode as the reserve display of the first start memory consumed in the normal mode to which the transition is immediately made, so that the strangeness of the presentation caused by the reserve display of the second remaining reserve and the first start memory being in different display modes can be suppressed.
Since the pending display of the start memory is displayed in a common display mode, it is possible to prevent it from interfering with the presentation during the variable display game, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

After that, the performance control device 300 can switch the performance to the result mode of the excess reserved consumption mode and display the result screen 670 as shown in (ko) of Figure 79 (result display).

[Examples of screen transitions in variants 4 and 5 of special chart 2 reserved display]
Referring to Figure 86, the display mode after the result is displayed will be described as the display mode of modified examples 4 and 5 of the special chart 2 pending display.

Figure 86 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variants 4 and 5 of the special chart 2 reserved display.

FIG. 86 (sa) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation during the result display in the result mode.
It is the same as (sa) in Figure 79. After that, for example, in the display mode of the modification 4 of the special chart 2 reserved display, the screen transitions to (shi5) in Figure 86, and in the display mode of the modification 5, it transitions to (shi6) in Figure 86.
The screen will transition as shown below.

(shi5) in Figure 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 in variant example 4 of the special chart 2 reserve display when the special chart 2 variation display game based on the first second remaining reserve stops varying.

In FIG. 86 (S5), the hold display 633c, 633b based on the second start memory (second remaining hold) is
3d, 633e, and the hold display 633f based on the first start memory are displayed in the common hold display section 630.
are displayed together in c.

The common hold display section 630c is a common hold display area for the hold display based on the second start memory (second remaining hold) and the hold display based on the first start memory.
c is a display unit including a first hold display unit 630a and a second hold display unit 630b.

In addition, the performance control device 300 can display the hold display for the second remaining hold in a predetermined display mode (e.g., "▽") so that it is easy to distinguish from the display mode of the hold display for the first start memory (e.g., "○").

Therefore, by using the common hold display unit 630c in this manner and displaying hold displays in multiple display modes, the number and type of pending displays becomes easier to understand, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 86 (s5) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second second remaining reservation.
Even if the performance is switched to the dedicated mode, the performance control device 300 similarly controls the common hold display unit 6
30c, and a summary of pending messages can be displayed.

Thereafter, a special chart change display game is similarly executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, and then the presentation control device 300 can transition the screen, for example as shown in (ta) of Figure 80, to switch the presentation from special mode to normal mode.

On the other hand, (shi6) in Figure 86 is the display screen of the display device 41 in variant example 5 of the special chart 2 reserve display when the special chart 2 variation display game based on the first second remaining reserve stops varying.

In FIG. 86 (6), the first hold display section 630 is divided into independent hold display areas.
a and the second hold display section 630b are displayed simultaneously at the bottom of the display screen.

In addition, the performance control device 300 can display the display area of the second hold display unit 630b (e.g., a dashed rectangular frame) so that it is easier to distinguish from the display area of the first hold display unit 630a (e.g., a solid rectangular frame).

86 (su6) is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second second reservation after that. As the reservation display moves, that is, according to the number of special chart 2 reservations, the proportion of the first reservation display section 630a in the independent reservation display area becomes larger, and the proportion of the second reservation display section 630b becomes smaller.

Therefore, by comparing the proportions occupied by the first hold display section 630a and the second hold display section 630b in the independent hold display area, the number of second remaining holds waiting can be easily determined, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow of the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Then, after the special chart change display game is similarly executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, the performance control device 300 can transition the screen as shown in (ta) of Figure 80, for example, as in variant example 4.

[Screen transition example in variant 6 of special chart 2 reserved display]
Referring to Figure 87, the display mode of the pending play after the result is displayed will be described as a display mode of variant example 6 of the special chart 2 pending display.

Figure 87 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition in variant example 6 of the special chart 2 reserved display.

FIG. 87 (sa) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the first second remaining reservation during the result display in the result mode.
It is the same as (sa) in Figure 79. Also, (shi) in Figure 87 is the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game based on the first second remaining reservation stops varying, and is the same as (shi) in Figure 79.

When the special chart 2 variable display game based on the second remaining reserve is stopped at a losing symbol (e.g., "267"), the performance control device 300 ends the result display, hides the result screen 670, and displays the variable display area 610 in which the losing symbol is displayed.

(S7) in Figure 87 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the special chart 2 variable display game is being executed based on the second second remaining reservation.

When the special chart 2 variable display game is executed based on the second second remaining reservation, the position of the reservation display 633f of the first start memory of the first reservation display section 630a is not changed, and the reservation digestion area 640
The changing pending display 633c is a changing pending display based on the second second remaining hold.

In addition, as shown in (su7) of Figure 87, the performance control device 300 can display the changing hold display 633c in the same display mode (e.g., ``O'') as the hold display of the first start memory, instead of a predetermined display mode (e.g., ``▽'').

In this way, by displaying the second remaining reserve changing pending display 633c in the same common display mode (for example, "o") as the first start memory pending display, it is possible to suppress the awkwardness of the presentation caused by the second remaining reserve and the first start memory changing pending display being in different display modes. Also, by displaying the second remaining reserve and the first start memory changing pending display in a common display mode, it is possible to suppress interference with the presentation during the changing display game, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the presentation and increasing the interest of the game.

Thereafter, a special chart change display game is similarly executed based on the third and fourth second remaining reservations, and then the performance control device 300 can transition the screen, for example, as shown in (ta) of Figure 80.

[Actions and Effects of the Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is a game (variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game,
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a special game (special chart 2 variable display game), a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game, and a display means (display device 41) capable of displaying the presentations. In the gaming machine 10, the game control means is capable of generating a special game state (time-saving state (time-saving mode)) as a game state advantageous to the player, and when transitioning from the special game state to a normal game state (normal mode) (transition state (excessive reserved consumption mode)), the presentation control means displays a predetermined start memory display (display of second remaining reserved) corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) of the main game (special chart 2 variable display game) in the special game state on a specific display section (start memory display area (reserved consumption area 640, first reserved display section 630a, second reserved display section 630b, third reserved display section 630c, fourth reserved display section 630d, fourth reserved display section 630e, fourth reserved display section 630f, fourth reserved display section 630g, fifth reserved display section 630h, fifth reserved display section 630h, fifth reserved display section 630i, fifth reserved display section 630j, fifth reserved display section 630f ...
It will not be displayed in the hold display section 630b).

With such a gaming machine 10, the display can be made to make it easier for the player to understand which reserved amount will be consumed until a presentation (series of presentations) corresponding to a specific gaming state is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a start memory means (RAM 111c of the gaming control device 100) capable of storing start memories (first start memory, second start memory) as game execution rights. The performance control means controls the start memory generated in a specific gaming state (second start memory consumed during time reduction,
A start memory display (for example, a rectangular frame (displaying a "□") serving as a base as a specified display mode) corresponding to the first remaining reservation, etc. can be displayed on the specific display section.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the reserved display is performed in a plurality of display modes, so that the number and types of reserved displays are easy to understand, and the player can easily grasp the flow of the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means executes a first presentation (excessive reserved consumption mode (result mode, special mode)) and the subsequent second presentation (normal mode) after the end of a specific gaming state, and the second presentation is executed in association with the main game (special chart 1 variable display game) in the normal gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the game based on the second start memory is executed in a manner different from that of the game based on the first start memory, so that the player can easily understand which start memory the game being changed is based on. As a result, the player can have a high sense of expectation, especially for the outcome of the game when the player is in an advantageous state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means can switch the presentation mode when a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games) based on the start memory generated in a specific gaming state are completed (
For example, switching from the time-saving mode to the normal mode), and displaying the start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the last game (for example, the 100th game) among the predetermined number of games in a special manner (
For example, "LAST" is displayed on the bottom base.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player can recognize the timing of the end of the specific game state from the pending display without paying attention to the display of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, so that the flow of the game can be easily grasped and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the specific display section includes at least one of a waiting hold display area (first hold display section 630a, second hold display section 630b) that displays a start memory display before the game is executed, and a changing hold display area (hold consumption area 640) that displays a start memory display during the execution of the game.

With such a gaming machine 10, by visually checking at least either the waiting hold display area or the changing hold display area, the player can understand that a presentation (series of presentations) corresponding to a specific gaming state will be executed until which hold (start memory) is consumed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means can display a special image (result screen 670) on the display means when a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of time-saving times (1 time) + 4 times) based on a start memory generated in a specific gaming state are completed, and even if the start memory of the main game in the specific gaming state occurs after the specific gaming state (second remaining hold), the special image continues to be displayed until all games based on the start memory are completed, and while the special image is being displayed, the execution time of the game is fixed and not selected by allocation (lottery).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the special image continues to be displayed until the main start memory (second remaining reserve) in the specific game state is consumed, so that the game in the changing state is the first
It becomes easier for the player to know whether the game is based on the starting memory or the second starting memory, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the presentation control means can display a predetermined start memory display (a changing hold display in the hold consumption area 640) corresponding to a start memory (hold generated during time reduction, first remaining hold) that occurs in a specific game state and in which a game is executed after the specific game state, in a manner indicating the number of games (number of games executed) until all games based on the start memory are completed (characters (e.g., "x remaining") that inform the player of the remaining number of times a predetermined presentation mode is played).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the timing at which the game based on the start memory that occurs in a specific gaming state and in which the game is executed after the specific gaming state ends, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a specified start memory display (a pending display of a second start memory (e.g., "▽")) is displayed in a different manner (the presence or absence of a specified display manner (e.g., a rectangular square "□" that serves as a base)) for a start memory that occurs during a specific game state and a start memory that occurs after the specific game state.

With such a gaming machine 10, the player can easily identify the start memory that occurs in a specific gaming state, making it easier to understand which reserved amount will be consumed until the presentation (series of presentations) corresponding to the specific gaming state is executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 88 to Fig. 91. Note that the configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first or second embodiment. In the following embodiment,
The same reference numerals are used for the components that perform the same functions as those in the first or second embodiment, and the description will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to a special chart variation display game after the end of a specific game state with normal power support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Fig. 88 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the third embodiment. Fig. 88 is similar to Fig. 54A, but differs from Fig. 54A in that a specific game state (omitted in Fig. 54A and Fig. 54B) in the case of ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times and sudden time reduction due to time reduction pattern (support hit) is added.

The specific game state includes a specific game state A, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a time-saving state immediately after a jackpot (a time-saving state), a specific game state B, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a ceiling time-saving state (b time-saving state) without a jackpot, and a specific game state C, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a sudden time-saving state (c time-saving state) without a jackpot. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state as a probability-changing state (with normal power support/high probability of special chart) in which the probability of a jackpot is high.

In the specific game states A-C, the probability of a jackpot is low, but there is normal power support. In the specific game states A-C, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is more likely to open, so right-handed shots aimed at the normal variable winning device 37 are recommended as the launch mode of the game ball.
In a specific game state, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the first starting winning port 36, so that the main variable display game becomes the special chart 2 variable display game and the secondary variable display game becomes the special chart 1 variable display game.

As presentation modes for the specific gaming state A, there are time-saving modes #1 and #2, similar to those in FIG. 54A.
In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times for the time-saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, 3 times) for simplicity, but it may be a variable value as in the first embodiment (FIG. 55). The presentation mode of the specific game state B is the time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode of the specific game state C is the time-saving mode #4. The presentation modes are different, and the player can distinguish between the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) and the time-saving state due to the sudden time-saving (c time-saving) by the presentation. It is also possible to reduce development costs by making the presentation mode the same for the specific game state B and the specific game state C, and to standardize the presentation.

In addition, the time-saving modes #3 and #4 are different presentation modes from the time-saving modes #1 and #2.
The presentation modes are different, and the time-saving state resulting from a big win (specific game state A) and the time-saving state not resulting from a big win (specific game states B and C) can be distinguished by presentation.
It is also possible to set the presentation mode to be the same for the specific game states B and C, thereby standardizing the presentation and reducing development costs.

In addition, in the case where a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving can be generated during the specific game state A, the time-saving modes #1 and #2 may be continued without changing them to the time-saving modes #3 and #4, and in this case, the player may be given the impression that the specific game state A has been extended (the number of time-saving times has increased). Of course, in the case where a time-saving state due to ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving can be generated during the specific game state A, the time-saving modes #1 and #2 may be continued without changing them to the time-saving modes #3 and #4.
, #2 may be changed to time-saving mode #3 or #4 to notify the player that a ceiling time-saving mode or a sudden time-saving mode has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and the transition state (the normal game state in which the remaining reserve is consumed) are the same as those of the first embodiment (
The transition state presentation mode is described as a single remaining reserved consumption mode without separating the mode before the end of normal power release and the mode after the end of normal power release, but they may be separated.

Next, the transitions from each game state, particularly the transitions to and from the specific game states B and C, will be described.

In the normal game state, transition state, and specific game state A, when the number of times of the special chart variable display game executed after the big win state ends (excluding the number of times in the probability variable state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is entered and the specific game state B (time reduction mode #3) is entered. Also, in the normal game state, transition state, and specific game state A, when the result of the special chart variable display game is a support hit result (time reduction result, time reduction pattern), the sudden time reduction (c time reduction) is entered and the specific game state C (time reduction mode #
Transition to 4).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or if a support hit result occurs,
The time-saving state may be continuously (overlappingly) generated by the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, or may not be continuously generated. Basically, regardless of the remaining number of time-saving times in the specific game state A, when the condition for transition to the specific game state B or C (reaching the ceiling number of times or occurrence of a support hit result) is satisfied, the specific game state transitions to B or C, but whether or not to transition may be changed depending on the remaining number of time-saving times. For example, when the number of time-saving times in the specific game state B (the number of time-saving times b m3) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the specific game state A (the number of time-saving times not yet consumed), the specific game state A transitions to B. When the number of time-saving times in the specific game state C (the number of time-saving times c m4) is greater than the remaining number of time-saving times in the specific game state A, the specific game state A transitions to C. If the number of time-saving times (m3, m4) of the specific game states B and C is equal to or less than the remaining number of time-saving times in the specific game state A, the time-saving symbol is displayed, but the specific game states B and C do not occur and the specific game state A remains.
There is no transition to the specific game state B or C. Note that the time-saving symbol does not have to be displayed in the case of the ceiling time-saving.

Basically, when the number of time-saving times in the specific game states B and C ends, the mode transitions to the remaining reserved consumption mode, but if the number of time-saving times in the specific game state A remains, the mode may be set to return to the specific game state A. In other words, if the number of time-saving times in the specific game states B and C ends but the number of time-saving times in the specific game state A remains, the mode may return from the specific game states B and C that continue into the specific game state A to the specific game state A, and may not transition to the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode).

In addition, if the ceiling number of times is reached during specific game state A or if a support hit result occurs,
It is also possible to configure the game so that the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving is not generated at all, regardless of the relationship between the number of time-saving times in the specific game states B and C and the number of time-saving times remaining in the specific game state A. Even in this configuration, even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, there is no transition from the specific game state A to the specific game states B and C.

In this embodiment, during the specific game state A, it is preferable not to generate (overlap) a time-saving state due to a sudden time-saving (c time-saving) caused by a support hit result (time-saving pattern).
That is, even in the specific game state A, there is a case where the support hit result is won for the special chart 2 variable display game, but even if the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is preferable not to suddenly generate a time-saving state by the time-saving (c time-saving). In this case, the display device 41 and the lamp display device 80 may display a miss pattern as a decorative special pattern for performance. Also, as explained in FIG. 14 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, it is preferable not to set a support hit result for the special chart 1 variable display game, and not to suddenly generate a time-saving state by the time-saving (c time-saving) even in the normal mode (normal game state). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to transition to the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) only from the transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) for consuming the remaining reservation. In this way, the value of the remaining reservation consumption mode increases, and the player will concentrate on the remaining reservation consumption mode and will be more interested in the game.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 88, when the ceiling number of times is reached or a support hit result occurs during the specific game states B and C, the time-saving state may be continuously (overlapped) by the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, or it may not be continuously generated. That is, in the specific game states B and C,
It is also possible to transition further to specific game states B and C from the game state.

When the transition conditions are met from the specific game states B and C, the game state transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) in which the remaining reserved jackpots are consumed. The transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game state A to the transition state. The transition conditions are (i) that the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state exceeds the time-saving count m3, m4 (first predetermined number, the initial value of the time-saving count 2), and (ii) that the total number of times the special chart variable display game (the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) is executed in the specific game state exceeds the second predetermined number (the time-saving count 1) which is greater than the time-saving count m3, m4 (first predetermined number).
The first predetermined number of times may be the sum of the number of time-saving times and the maximum number of reserved times of special chart 1 (for example, 4). In this embodiment, the condition (iii) in the first embodiment (the end of the normal power release of the predetermined number of times) is not provided because it is not necessary. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be the sum of the number of time-saving times and the maximum number of reserved times of special chart 1 (for example, 4).

In addition, the time-saving numbers m1-m4 and the ceiling number m5 of the time-saving modes #1-#4 can be adjusted in size as appropriate to change the gameplay.

For example, in order to balance the profits of the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming states B and C, m1 (
a time-saving number of times 1) < m4 (c time-saving number of times) < m2 (a time-saving number of times 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times) < m3
It may be adjusted to satisfy the relationship (b number of time reductions).

In addition, for example, the relationship m1 (number of a time reductions 1) < m2 (number of a time reductions 2) < m4 (number of c time reductions) < m5 (number of ceiling times) < m3 (number of b time reductions) may be adjusted to satisfy so that the ceiling time reductions (b time reductions) and sudden time reductions (c time reductions) are more advantageous than the time reductions following a jackpot (a time reductions).

In addition, for example, in order to reduce the benefit of ceiling time reduction, adjustment may be made to satisfy the relationship m1 (number of a time reductions 1) < m4 (number of c time reductions) < m3 (number of b time reductions) < m2 (number of a time reductions 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times).

[Time-saving number of times and the number of reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
89 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the prescribed remaining number of reserved times (prescribed remaining number of reserved times) corresponding to the patterns which are the types of winnings in the special chart variable display game in this embodiment. The patterns are the patterns when it becomes a big win (including V winning after a small win), and here, they are determined by the big win pattern random number, and the time-saving pattern is excluded.

In this embodiment, the pattern A of the jackpot of the special chart 1 variable display game is the same as the first embodiment, except for the number of time reductions. The pattern G of the jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game (jackpot with remaining reserve) without normal power support is the same as the first embodiment. For the jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game (including V winning with small win) with normal power support, the number of time reductions is fixed to 3, so there is only one type of pattern S.

In the normal game state (normal mode), a jackpot (pattern A) is generated by the special chart 1 variable display game.
When this occurs, the game state transitions to a specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) after the big win state ends.
In the specific game state A, when a jackpot (pattern S) occurs in the special chart 2 variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) again after the jackpot state ends.
In the case of C, when a jackpot (pattern S) occurs by the special chart 2 variable display game, the game moves to the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1) after the jackpot state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A, the number of time-saving times is set to 3, and the number of reserved times is set to 4.
It is fixed to an individual.

[Characteristics of the map change display game and the normal power operation]
Figure 90 is a diagram showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 90(A), there is only one type of winning symbol (winning stop symbol, winning symbol for normal symbol) in the normal symbol variable display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of normal power support, the normal symbol winning probability is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, it is not controlled to change between low probability (low probability for normal symbol) and high probability (high probability for normal symbol). As in the first embodiment,
The probability may be set to a lower value than 250/251 in the normal game state.

The starting memory number (number of reserved regular maps) for the regular map variation display game is 4. The maximum count number of regular maps (
The upper limit of the count is 10.

The normal map fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is a fixed value of 500 msec. In addition, the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 may be a value longer than 500 msec in the normal game state. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Although not shown in FIG. 90, the sum FZ3 of the normal remaining ball processing time and the normal map ending time may be, for example, 700 msec, which is equal to or longer than the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal map stop time FZ2.

As shown in FIG. 90B, for each winning of the normal game, the normal game winning device 37 (normal power) is opened once and the winning state becomes easy. However, the normal power opening time is short (e.g., 48 msec) in a normal game state without normal power support, and long (e.g., 3400 msec) in a time-saving state with normal power support, and the normal power opening pattern (normal power opening mode) differs depending on the game state. As mentioned above, the probability of winning the normal game is always a constant value regardless of the game state, so in this embodiment, the winning state of the normal power support is realized by making the normal power opening time longer than when there is no normal power support.

In addition, the normal power release time may be shorter than the normal map fluctuation time FZ1, the normal map stop time FZ2, the normal power remaining ball processing time and the normal map ending time FZ3 in a state without normal power support, and the time FZ1-F related to the control of the normal map and normal power in a state with normal power support
It takes longer than the Z3.

[Timing chart]
FIG. 91 shows a transition state from a time-saving state as a specific gaming state (which may be included in a normal gaming state).
It is a timing chart showing the game state, the special chart change display game (special chart change), the normal chart state, the normal power state, the number of special charts 2 reserved, etc. In FIG. 91, for simplicity, the timing of the time reduction end and the timing of the normal power release start are aligned, but this is not limited and they may be shifted.

FIG. 91(A) shows the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A (first specific game state) following a big win.
91(A), the stop display time STP1 (first period) from the end of the time-saving final variation, which is the final special chart variation display game of the time-saving modes #1 and #2, to the start of the next special chart variation display game, is made longer than the long normal power open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) that becomes normal power support. In other words, the relationship is set to STP1>OPN.

In addition, the game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 changes (the number of times the special chart 2 change display game is executed) after the end of the jackpot (A4804). In this embodiment,
Furthermore, the stop display time of the time-saving final variation is set corresponding to the type of time-saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to the time-saving modes #1 and #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the time-saving final variation is set longer than the long normal power open time OPN during which the normal power becomes in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

In FIG. 91, the time-saving final change is described as a change in which the number of times the special chart 2 changes after the end of the big win becomes the number of times the time-saving is performed (3 times). However, the time-saving final change may be a special chart 1 change (special chart 1 change display game), or the total number of times the special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game and special chart 2 change display game) is executed may be the second predetermined number of times described above.

If the number of reserved special figures 2 is the maximum value of 4 before the start of the final time-saving fluctuation, the number of reserved special figures 2 will decrease by 1 to 3 when the final time-saving fluctuation of special figure 2 occurs, but when a game ball enters the normal fluctuation winning device 37 due to the normal power opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the number of reserved special figures 2 will become 4 again. If a game ball passes through the normal power start gate 34 just before the end of the final time-saving fluctuation, the normal power will be opened even in the remaining reserved consumption mode after the time-saving ends, depending on the winning result of the normal power change display game (normal power change) that started at this time.

If the special chart 2 variation display game (special chart 2 remaining reservation variation) starts to change during a long period of normal power open in the remaining reservation consumption mode after the time-saving state ends, the number of special chart 2 reservations will decrease by 1 to 3, and if a game ball enters the normal variation winning device 37, the number of special chart 2 reservations will become 4 again, and the number of remaining reservations, which is the number of special chart 2 reservations (remaining reservations) consumed after the time-saving state ends, will be 5 (1 + 4).
In addition, during the normal power release in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the fluctuation start of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game will be 2
If this happens, the remaining number of reserved items may reach six (more than five).

Since the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1, #2) is a jackpot state, the number of balls (
The number of balls acquired) gives the player great privileges and game value. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of remaining reserved balls is set not to exceed the specified remaining number of four, or five or more, so as not to give the player excessive privileges or game value. For this reason, as mentioned above, the stop display time STP1 of the final time-saving variation in the specific game state A is set even longer than the long normal power open time OPN that becomes normal power support, so that consumption of the remaining reserved balls (execution of the special chart 2 variation display game) is not started during the normal power open time OPN (STP1>OPN). This prevents the number of remaining reserved balls from exceeding the specified remaining number of four.
can be kept individually.

In addition, the normal power release time (e.g., 48 msec) caused by the winning result of the normal power fluctuation in the remaining reservation consumption mode is considerably shorter than the normal power release time OPN (e.g., 3,400 msec) caused by the winning result of the normal power fluctuation started in the time-saving modes #1 and #2. For this reason, in the short-term normal power release in the remaining reservation consumption mode (normal power release after normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), the special chart 2 reservation (remaining reservation) is not accumulated and the number of remaining reservations does not increase,
The number of remaining reservations will be the specified remaining number of four.

In addition, taking into account the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal map stop time FZ2, the stricter condition STP1
It is also possible to set the relationship of STP1 > (OPN + FZ2) or the relationship of STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but the normal power fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal power stop time FZ2 are the same as the normal power open time OPN.
Since this is considerably shorter and can be ignored compared to the above, by setting the relationship STP1>OPN, the effect of maintaining the remaining reservation number at the specified remaining reservation number of four can be fully obtained.

On the other hand, FIG. 91(B) shows the specific game states B and C (time-saving state,
In the case of FIG. 91(B), the stop display time STP2 (second period) from the end of the time-saving final variation, which is the final special chart variation display game of the time-saving modes #3 and #4, to the start of the next special chart variation display game is set to a long-term normal power open time OPN (third period,
For example, the time is set to be shorter than 3400 msec. In other words, the relationship is set to STP2<OPN.
Corresponding to the time-saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the final time-saving fluctuation is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN during which the normal power becomes in a state where it is easy to win (A4804).

Therefore, when the special chart 2 variation display game (special chart 2 remaining reservation variation) starts during normal power opening in the remaining reservation consumption mode after the time-saving mode #3 or #4 ends, the number of special chart 2 reservations decreases by 1 to 3. During this normal power opening, if a game ball enters the normal variation winning device 37, the special chart 2
The number of reserved balls will be 4 again, and the number of remaining reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls (remaining reserved balls) to be consumed after the time-saving state ends, will be 5 (1 ball + 4 balls). In addition, if the variation of the special chart 2 variable display game starts twice during the normal power release in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the number of remaining reserved balls will be 6 (greater than 5).

The specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through the jackpot state.
The player's privilege and gaming value in terms of the number of balls (acquired balls) is small.
In order to give players greater privileges and game value, the possibility of the remaining reserved number exceeding the prescribed remaining reserved number of 4 and becoming 5 or more is increased. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP2 of the time-saving final variation in the specific game states B and C is set shorter than the long normal power open time OPN that becomes normal power support, and the remaining reserved is consumed during the normal power open time OPN (execution of the special chart 2 variation display game).
This makes it easier for the start of the process (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal map start gate 34 just before the end of the final time-saving fluctuation, the normal power release with a long normal power release time OPN will not occur in the remaining reserved consumption mode after the time-saving end,
This long period of normal power release may be brought forward and some parts may be released before the time-saving feature ends. In this case,
Even if you set the relationship of STP2<OPN, the remaining reserved number is only 4, which is the specified remaining reserved number.
Sometimes there aren’t more than one.

In addition, taking into account the normal map fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal map stop time FZ2, the more lenient condition STP2<
It is also possible to set the relationship (OPN + FZ2) or the relationship STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN), but by setting the stricter condition STP2 < OPN, which has a narrower range of STP2 values, the possibility of the remaining reserved number being 5 or more is reliably increased.

In this embodiment, STP2 (second period) < OPN (third period) < STP1 (
In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the time-saving final fluctuation in the specific game state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) is set to the specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4).
#4) is set to be longer than the stop display time STP2 of the time-saving final variation. Here, the stop display time of the time-saving final variation is the same as the time from the end of the final special chart variation display game in the specific game state to the start of the next special chart variation display game when there is a remaining reservation.

In addition, regardless of the normal power release time OPN, even if the relationship STP2<STP1 is satisfied,
Since the start of the remaining reserve change after the time-saving in the specific game states B and C ends is earlier than in the case of the specific game state A, the possibility that the number of remaining reserves will be larger in the specific game states B and C than in the specific game state A is increased. Therefore, the difference (difference in benefits and game value) between the specific game state A, which has a large number of balls output through the jackpot state, and the specific game states B and C, which have a small number of balls output without going through the jackpot state, can be mitigated. Therefore, even in the specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) due to the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving, which have fewer balls output than the specific game state A (time-saving modes #1 and #2) following the jackpot, benefits and game value are compensated, and the interest in the game is increased.

In addition, when the conditions for generating the specific game states B and C are met during the specific game state A, that is, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when a support hit result occurs, the stop display time of the time-saving final fluctuation is not STP1 (first period) but STP2, which is smaller than STP1.
In this case, after a big win, the time-saving state (specific game state B, C) due to the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving may be continuously (overlappingly) generated from the specific game state A.
The stop display time of the final time-saving fluctuation is set to a short time STP2, and the series of time-saving states after the big win (
After the final time-saving fluctuation between the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C, a special benefit or game value can be further given by a small STP2 (second period), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Basically, when the time-saving number of times of the specific game states B and C continuing in the specific game state A ends, the mode is shifted to the remaining reserved consumption mode, and the final time-saving change is the change in the specific game states B and C. When the specific game states B and C occur from the specific game state A, the time-saving change number 1 and 2 areas are overwritten with the time-saving number of times of the specific game states B and C (initial value of the time-saving change number 1 and 2), so the remaining time-saving number of times of the specific game state A disappears. However, in the case of a configuration in which the remaining time-saving number of times of the specific game state A is copied to another predetermined area and remains without disappearing even after the time-saving number of times of the specific game states B and C continuing in the specific game state A ends, the specific game states B and C continuing in the specific game state A return to the specific game state A, and it is not necessary to transition to the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode). In this case, the final time-saving change is the change in the specific game state A. The remaining number of time-saving times is smaller than the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations 2 for the specific game state A and is greater than zero.

Also, even if a time-saving pattern (support hit result) that can cause specific game states B and C is displayed during the specific game state A, the display time of the final time-saving fluctuation may be set to STP1, which is greater than STP2, instead of STP2. In the case of a configuration (preferable configuration) in which the time-saving state due to the time-saving pattern is not continuously generated from the specific game state A even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, the long first period (STP1) keeps the remaining reserved number consumed after the specific game state A to the specified remaining reserved number as described above, so that the specific game state A following the big win does not become too advantageous. Also, even if the configuration is such that the time-saving state due to the time-saving pattern is continuously generated from the specific game state A, the specific game states B and C pass through the specific game state A following the big win, so that the specific game states B and C do not become too advantageous.

[Actions and Effects of the Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a special chart variable display game), and can generate a special gaming state (e.g., a jackpot state) advantageous to the player when the game results in a special result. The gaming control means can generate a first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state A) advantageous to the player following the special gaming state, accompanied by the occurrence of the special gaming state, and can generate a second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming states B and C) advantageous to the player without the occurrence of the special gaming state.
The game control means is a first specific game state from the end of the last game to the start of the next game.
The period (for example, the stop display time STP1 of the time-saving final change) is set to a second period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time S
TP2).

In such a gaming machine 10, since the second period is shorter than the first period, the consumption of the start memory (remaining reserve) that has accumulated to the maximum in the second specific game state after the end of the second specific game state is accelerated, and there is a possibility that an extra start memory (remaining reserve) can be accumulated by this amount. Therefore, it is possible to mitigate the difference in profit between the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A) in which the profit of the special game state (e.g., balls) can be obtained by going through the special game state, and the second specific game state (e.g., specific game states B and C) in which the profit of the special game state (e.g., balls) cannot be obtained without going through the special game state. Therefore, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of a special game state, the profit is compensated and the interest of the game is increased.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., a normal variable winning device 37) that can be converted between an easy-to-win state and a non-easy-to-win state and that is more easily converted to the easy-to-win state in the first specific game state and the second specific game state than in the normal game state. The third period (e.g., the normal power open time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy-to-win state is smaller than the first period (STP1) and larger than the second period (STP2). Therefore, the remaining reserved number consumed after the end of the first specific game state (e.g., the specific game state A) can be kept at the specified remaining reserved number, and the possibility that the remaining reserved number consumed after the end of the second specific game state (e.g., the specific game states B and C) will exceed the specified remaining reserved number can be increased. This ensures profits and increases the interest in the game even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100)
The period from the end of the final game in the first specific gaming state to the start of the next game is called the first period (
The game control means can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game to a second period (STP1), and can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game to a second period (STP2). When the condition for generating the second specific game state is met during the first specific game state (for example, when the ceiling number of times is reached or a support hit result occurs), the game control means can set the period from the end of the final game of the specific game state as the first specific game state or the second specific game state to the start of the next game to a second period shorter than the first period, instead of the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of gaming states including a special gaming state, a first specific gaming state, and a second specific gaming state, a bonus or gaming value can be further provided for a short second period (STP2), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100)
can set the period from the end of the final game of the first specific game state to the start of the next game as the first period, and can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game as the second period. The game control means can set the period from the end of the final game of the second specific game state to the start of the next game as the first period, even if a result of a game that can cause the second specific game state (e.g., a time-saving pattern or a support win result) is displayed during the first specific game state.
The period from the end of the final game of a specific gaming state or a specific gaming state as a second specific gaming state to the start of the next game can be set to a first period (STP1) that is longer than the second period (STP2) rather than to a second period.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of a game that may cause a second specific gaming state to occur is displayed, in the case where the configuration is such that the second specific gaming state is not continuously (overlappingly) generated from the first specific gaming state, the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific gaming state following the special gaming state from becoming too advantageous. Also, in the case where the configuration is such that the second specific gaming state is continuously (overlappingly) generated from the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state passes through the first specific gaming state following the special gaming state, so that the second specific gaming state can be prevented from becoming too advantageous.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 92 and 93. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the display of the remaining reserved items on the display screen (initial storage display).

[An example of screen transition]
92A and 92B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the fourth embodiment.

In (c), in the time-saving state, a mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode as a presentation mode is displayed. Here, the time-saving mode #2 is exemplified as the time-saving mode, but the time-saving mode is not limited to the time-saving mode #2. "Flower mode" is displayed as the mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode. Image 6
A background image is displayed in which the moon (here a full moon) indicated as 88 shines on a flowering tree indicated as image 687. Image 687 of the tree includes flowers as characters.

In (c), as a special decoration pattern 2 variation display game, the variation (↓↓↓) of the special decoration pattern (large pattern) as identification information is being executed in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the reduced decoration pattern (small pattern) as identification information is being executed in the variation display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen.
The left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610
In C, the left design (decorative design A), the right design (decorative design B), and the center design (decorative design C)
is fluctuating.

In addition, the number of times the special chart change display game has been played since the end of the previous jackpot is displayed by the change count display 677. Here, the change count display 677 is "95G", which indicates that the number of times the special chart change display game has been played since the end of the jackpot is 95. This allows the player to know whether the number of times the special chart change display game has been played is close to the ceiling number of times. Support hit (time-saving hit)
The number of times the game continues is displayed by the number of times the game continues 680.
80 is the "6th day" and indicates that the number of continuations is 6. The number of continuations of the support hits may be the number of consecutive support hits that have occurred without a big hit (including a big hit due to a V winning after a small hit). The number of continuations of the support hits is cleared to zero by the occurrence of a big hit.

Four pending displays 683a (second pending displays) are displayed in the second pending display section 630b (waiting area) which displays the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the second pending display. The pending displays 683a have a display mode (first display mode) which corresponds to the flower character in the tree image 687. Also, in the pending consumption area 640, a changing pending display 683b which indicates a changing pending (a start memory which was the execution right of this special chart variable display game) related to the currently executed special chart variable display game is displayed. The pending consumption area 640 may be displayed with a rectangular frame or a stand. The first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed is displayed as a second pending display.
Here, nothing is displayed in the first hold display section 630a, which displays the above as the first hold display (first start-up memory display).

The number "0" indicating the number of reserved special symbols 1 and the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special symbols 2 are displayed in the special symbol 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special symbol 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen, respectively. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special symbol 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "o" indicating that the special symbol 2 variable display game is being executed (changing). The symbol "o" may be displayed flashing to perform a fourth symbol change as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Next, (H) is a special chart 2 variable display game two games after (H). The variable count display 677 is "97G". The hold display 683a of the second hold display section 630b is (
The reserved item 683c (circle, second display mode) corresponding to the remaining reserved items is newly displayed in the second reserved display section 630b. The reserved item 683c (circle) is a different mode (second display mode) from the reserved item 683a having the mode of a flower character (first display mode). This allows the player to distinguish the reserved item 683c corresponding to the remaining reserved item that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends from the reserved item 683a that will be consumed during the time-saving state, making it easier to grasp the number of remaining reserved items and to recognize that the end of the time-saving state is approaching.

Next, in (F), the special chart 2 change display game is being played two games after (H). The change count display 677 is "99G", which is the final special chart change display game in the time-saving state. Also, the reserved display 683c (◯) corresponding to the reserved special chart 2 that will be the remaining reserved is 2
When the final time-saving variation ends, the time-saving mode also ends.

Next, in (e), after the time-saving mode ends, the game transitions to the remaining reserved consumption mode (normal game state in which the remaining reserved is consumed), and the first remaining reserved is consumed, that is, the special chart 2 variable display game related to the first remaining reserved is started. The mode display 679 corresponding to the remaining reserved consumption mode is displayed as "Month Mode". At the start of the special chart 2 variable display game, four reserved displays 6 corresponding to four remaining reserved are displayed.
83c is shifted to the left toward the reserved digestion area 640 (reserved shift). The number of times of variation display 677 indicates that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been played since the end of the previous big win is "100G".
In addition, the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special drawings 2 is displayed in the reserved special drawing number display section 660.
" is displayed, but may be changed to "3" at this point.

In (He), as a special pattern 2 variation display game, the variation of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variation display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen, but unlike (Ha)-(Fu), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) is not displayed in the center of the display screen.
The variation may not be performed, or may be hidden by the background image in a layer behind the background image even if it is performed. The number "3" indicating the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660.

In the center of the display screen, instead of the variation of the decorative special pattern (large pattern), a moon image 690 is displayed larger than the moon image 688 (ha)-(fu). As the moon image 690, a lit half moon (semicircle) is displayed, but the remaining non-lit parts of the moon are also displayed faintly so as not to stand out (dotted line). This allows the circular outline of the entire moon as a whole image to be slightly recognized. The reserved display 683c and reserved display 683b corresponding to the remaining reserved are displayed in a circular form (circle form, second display form) corresponding to the circular outline of the entire moon.

Next, in (e), the operation presentation starts, and the operation prompt display "PUSH", which is a text display, is displayed on the front side of the changing pending display 683b as a pre-operation presentation, superimposed on the changing pending display 683b. The operation presentation includes a pre-operation presentation (an operation request sound or an operation prompt display) that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 25 (operation means), and/or a post-operation presentation (operation-responsive presentation) that corresponds to the operation of the presentation button 25. The operation prompt display "PUSH" may be displayed on the front side of the image 690, superimposed on the image 690, in the center of the display screen. The operation prompt display may be another text display "PUSH", or may be an image that imitates the presentation button 25.

Next, in (Ma), as a result of the operation of effect button 25 (here a press operation), a illuminated circular full moon is displayed as moon image 690 as an operation-responsive effect corresponding to the operation of effect button 25, and the remaining unlit parts of the moon in (E) are made to glow.

Next, in (Mi), the result of the currently running special chart variable display game is displayed as part of the operation-responsive performance. The performance in (Ho) is a performance with a high expectation of a time-saving hit (support hit), and in (Mi), the result of the special chart variable display game is a time-saving hit. Then, the decorative time-saving pattern "113" is displayed in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen, and a congratulatory performance display 691 such as the text "Congratulations on the time-saving hit!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen, increasing the interest in the game. Note that the congratulatory performance display 691 does not have to be displayed so that the time-saving mode suddenly starts and the player is surprised. In this case, the interest in the game is also increased.

Next, in (m), the game enters a time-saving mode corresponding to the specific game state C, and "Flower mode" is displayed as the mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode. The time-saving mode here is time-saving mode #4, which is different from the time-saving mode #2 in (h)-(f), so a different name (for example, "Sakura mode") may be displayed as the mode display 679. The continuation count display 680 is "7
This indicates that the number of times the support hit (time-saving hit) continues has increased by one to seven.

In (M), as in (C), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is also executed in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is executed in the variation display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen. The variation count display 677 is "101G", indicating that the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been executed since the end of the previous big win is 101.

The reserved display 683a, 683b is a reserved display whose form has changed from (Mi), and has a display mode (first display mode) corresponding to the flower character in the tree image 687. The number "2" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 is displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660. In addition, a right hit instruction display 693 is displayed to encourage the player to hit to the right, and a win may occur in the normal variable winning device 37 opened by hitting to the right. As with the third embodiment, a configuration in which the sudden time reduction (c time reduction) only occurs in the case of remaining reserved (special chart 2 variable display game in normal game state) is preferable, but in the case of this preferable configuration, the reserved display 683a, which has returned to the display mode corresponding to the flower character,
In the case of 683b (original remaining reservation), the time reduction does not occur suddenly. Therefore, the player can easily recognize whether or not the time reduction can be expected from the reservation display mode (the first display mode or the second display mode).

Next, in (M), two wins occur in the normal variable winning device 37 that is opened in the time-saving mode, and the number "4" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 is displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660.
In addition, four hold displays 683a (second hold displays) are displayed in the second hold display section 630b (waiting area).

As described above, in Figures 92A and 92B, the hold display 683c displayed corresponding to the remaining hold is the same (circle) in both the time-saving mode and the remaining hold consumption mode, but it may be different.
For example, in (Hi) and (Fu), the reserved display 68 displayed corresponding to the remaining reserved in the time-saving mode
3c may be displayed as a diamond (◇, third display mode) and may be different from the reserved display 683c (◯, second display mode) displayed corresponding to the remaining reserved in the remaining reserved consumption mode. Even in this way, the player can easily see the reserved display 683c corresponding to the remaining reserved to be consumed after the time-saving state ends.
This can be distinguished from the reserved display 683a that is consumed during the time-saving state, making it easier to grasp the remaining number of reserved items and to recognize that the end of the time-saving state is approaching.

In addition, if the second to fourth remaining reserves, rather than the first remaining reserve, result in a winning result (a big win, a small win, or a time-saving win), an operation effect may be executed during a long special chart change display game related to the remaining reserve that results in a winning result, and a special chart change display game related to the remaining reserves that result in a losing result up until the winning result may be executed in a short period of time.

[Another example of screen transitions]
FIG. 93 is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 93 is an example of a case where all the special chart change display games related to the remaining reserved items in (E) of FIG. 92A, including the unexecuted ones, are lose results. The performance control device 300 can obtain the results of the special chart change display games related to the unexecuted remaining reserved items from a look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command). In the example of FIG. 92A, the special chart change display game related to the first remaining reserved item was a time-saving win result.

In (Mi1), the effect button 25 was operated after (Ho), but the state of the moon image 690 did not change from (Ho) in response to the result of the loss of the remaining reserved.
"24" is displayed frozen.

Next, in (M2), the display device 41 becomes a result screen 692 showing the game result, and the number of game balls acquired, etc. are displayed. The result screen 692 may be the same as the result screen 670 of the second embodiment. On the result screen 692, the mode display 679 may be erased and hidden so as not to be in the way.

Here, the special chart change display game for the second remaining reservation is executed only in the change display area 615, and then the result of the loss is displayed. The number "2" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 that has been decreased by one is displayed in the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660. The number of changes displayed 677 is increased by one and "
It says "101G".

Next, in (Mi3), the result screen 692 continues, and the special chart change display game for the third remaining reserved ball is executed only in the change display area 615, after which the losing result is displayed as a stopped ball.
The number "1" is displayed in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660, which indicates that the number of reserved special charts 2 has decreased by one. The number of fluctuations display 677 has increased by one and is displayed as "102G".

Next, in (Mi4), the result screen 692 continues, and the special chart change display game for the fourth and final remaining reservation is executed only in the change display area 615, after which the result of the loss is stopped and displayed. The number "0" indicating the number of special chart 2 reservations, which has decreased by one, is displayed in the special chart 2 reservation number display section 660. The number of changes display 677 is increased by one and displayed as "103G".

In the above (M2) to (M4), the change time of the special chart change display game for the second to fourth remaining reserved balls may be shorter than the change time during the time-saving state. This allows the remaining reserved balls of the losing balls to be consumed in a short time, so the player will not be annoyed. Also, the player only needs to look at the result screen 692 once, so the result screen 692 will not be displayed for a long time.

Next, in (Y), the remaining reserved consumption mode ends and transitions to normal mode. "Normal mode" is displayed as the mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode. Also, a left hit instruction display 694 is displayed to encourage the player to hit with the left, and a win may occur in the starting winning hole 36 by hitting with the left. The continuation count display 680 remains at "6th day", and the continuation count per support is 6.
However, the number of times the support hit continues may be cleared to zero not only by a jackpot but also by the occurrence of normal mode. In this case, the number of times the support hit continues is the number of times the jackpot (
This is the number of consecutive hits that have occurred without going through normal mode (including big hits due to V winnings after small hits) and the number of consecutive hits that have occurred without going through normal mode. In addition, the number of consecutive hits (consecutive hits) is displayed as 6.
80 may be hidden.

Then, when a winning entry into the start winning hole 36 actually occurs, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen as the decorative special symbol 1 variation display game, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 in the lower right corner of the display screen.
It is being executed at 15. The number of changes displayed 677 has increased by one and is now displayed as "104G."
The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "
The first predetermined image 675 is an "○" symbol indicating that the special chart 2 variable display game is currently stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is an "×" symbol indicating that the special chart 2 variable display game is currently stopped.

In the reserved digestion area 640, a reserved display 683b indicating a reserved state (a start memory that was the execution right of this special chart variable display game) related to the currently running special chart variable display game is displayed. Note that the reserved display 683b here is related to the special chart 1 variable display game, so the reserved display 683b related to the special chart 2 variable display game (FIG. 92A (c) (
It is displayed in a triangle of a different form (shape) from that of the other symbols (e.g., (f)).

Next, in (Yu), one first start memory (special drawing 1 reserved) is generated in the first reserved display section 630a, and one corresponding reserved display 682a (first reserved display) is displayed in the first reserved display section 630a. In addition, the number "1" indicating the number of reserved drawings 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 reserved number display section 650.
is displayed.

The fourth embodiment has been described above, but if the final time-saving fluctuation and the fluctuation of the remaining reserve are all failure results, the operation prompt display and the operation corresponding to the failure result are executed at the final time-saving fluctuation, and the result screen is displayed from the fluctuation of the remaining reserve next to the final time-saving fluctuation, and the fluctuation related to the remaining reserve is made shorter than the fluctuation during the time-saving, so that the failure remaining reserve can be consumed in a short time. Also, the fourth embodiment has been described as a time-saving state (time-saving mode as the presentation mode) as the specific game state, but the specific game state may also be a probability variable state with normal power support (probability variable mode as the presentation mode).

[Actions and Effects of the Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (e.g., a special chart variation display game), and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to the game. The gaming machine 10 includes a start memory means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as a right to execute a game. The presentation control means performs display control of a start memory display corresponding to the start memory. The presentation control means sets the display mode of the start memory display to a first display mode (e.g., a flower character) for the start memory of a game executed in a first game state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability change state), and sets the display mode of the start memory display to a second display mode (e.g., a circle) for the start memory of a game executed in a second game state (e.g., a normal game state (transition state) in which the remaining reserve is consumed). In the first game state, when a start memory of a game executed in the second game state occurs, the start memory is set to a second display mode (e.g., a circle) or a third display mode (e.g., a ◇).

In such a gaming machine 10, the player can distinguish the start memory display (e.g., the reserved display 683c) corresponding to the start memory (e.g., the remaining reserved) consumed in the second gaming state (e.g., the normal gaming state) after the end of the first gaming state (e.g., the time-saving state, the probability-changing state) from the start memory display (e.g., the reserved display 683a) of the start memory consumed during the first gaming state.
Before the start of the second game state following the previous game state, it becomes easier to grasp the number of start memories (e.g., the number of remaining reserved memories) to be consumed in the second game state, and it is possible to recognize that the end of the first game state is approaching. Therefore, it is possible to save the start memories to be consumed in the next second game state without forgetting, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

[Fifth embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 94 to 96. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted. The fifth embodiment relates to the fourth pattern (fourth special pattern).

[Display Mode of Lamp Display Device 80]
FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a lamp display device 80 according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in the upper figure of Figure 94, lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1, 3, and 4 for special drawing 1 arranged in a straight line, and lamp display units 2, 5, and 6 for special drawing 2 arranged in a straight line, arranged in parallel.

As shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 94, the lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (full-color LEDs) capable of performing a variable display (cyclic lighting) in which the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is repeatedly lit in green, red, and off in a predetermined cycle (cyclic lighting cycle), and a lamp display unit 3-6 (single-color LED in this case) for notifying the start memory number (reserved number) of each special symbol variable display game. The predetermined cycle is set to, for example, 300 msec or 400 msec. Also, the lamp display unit 3-6
The LED may be a full-color LED, but may be, for example, an R (
In other words, it can be used by connecting the conductive wire of one terminal (R) out of the three terminals of RGB of a full-color LED.

The lamp display unit 80 is controlled by the performance control device 300. For this reason, the change time of the change display in the special chart 1 display 51, the special chart 2 display 52, and the normal chart display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, whereas the change time of the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the performance control device 300.

In the upper diagram of Fig. 94, lamp display unit 1 is arranged above lamp display units 3 and 4, and lamp display unit 2 is arranged above lamp display units 5 and 6. Note that the arrangement is not limited to this, and for example, lamp display unit 1 may be arranged below lamp display units 3 and 4, with the positions reversed.
Similarly, the lamp display unit 2 may be disposed below the lamp display units 5 and 6.

Between the lamp display unit 3 and the lamp display unit 4, a connecting portion 81a is provided as a decorative portion. The connecting portion 81a has, for example, a raised portion (ridge portion) or a recessed portion (groove portion) formed in a line, and the ridge portion or groove portion can easily make the player recognize that the lamp display units 3 and 4, which together indicate the reserved number of the special chart 1, are a set. Similarly, between the lamp display unit 5 and the lamp display unit 6, a connecting portion 81b is provided to make the player recognize that the lamp display units 5 and 6, which together indicate the reserved number of the special chart 2, are a set. The connecting portions 81a and 81b may be formed as flat lines, for example, by decorative stickers, so long as they can easily make the player recognize that the lamp display units 3 and 4 and the lamp display units 5 and 6 are a set. The connecting portions 81a and 81b may be formed as square frames, oval frames, or the like, so as to divide the lamp display units 3 and 4 and the lamp display units 5 and 6, respectively. In addition, the color of the inside and outside of the rectangular or elliptical frame may be changed to make the partitioned area easier to understand.

FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the fourth symbol in the lamp display units 1 and 2, and FIG.
This is a figure explaining the display of the number of reserved special drawings 1 or the number of reserved special drawings 2 on the lamp display unit 3-6.

As shown in the example (Example 1) of FIG. 95 (A), when the fourth symbol is being displayed (special symbol is being displayed), the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off → green light → red light → off → green light → red light →
The fourth symbol changes (switches) in the order of "off"..., for example, every 100 msec. In this case, the cyclic lighting period (one cycle of "off -> green light -> red light ->off") is 300 msec. In this way, the lamp display units 1 and 2 alternate between green and red, making it easy for the player to recognize that the fourth symbol is being displayed variably.

Also, as in another example (Example 2) of FIG. 95A, when the fourth symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may display the fourth symbol in a variable manner, for example, every 100 msec, in the order of off → green light → off → red light → off → green light → off → red light → off ... In this case, the cyclic lighting cycle (one of off → green light → off → red light → off)
In this way, when the lamp display units 1 and 2 alternate between green and red, by inserting a turn-off in between, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the green and red overlapping due to an afterimage or the like, and it is possible to improve visibility.

Also, as in another example (Example 3) of FIG. 95A, a variable display can be performed using an intermediate color (for example, purple (R+B), a mixed color) displayed by combining each element of a full-color LED. Specifically, when the fourth symbol is being displayed, the lamp display units 1 and 2 can display a variable display in which the state of the fourth symbol changes, for example, every 100 msec, in the order of off → green light → red light → purple light → off → green light → red light → purple light → off... In this case, the cyclic lighting period (one cycle of off → green light → red light → purple light → off) is 400 msec. In this way, the cyclic lighting state when the lamp display units 1 and 2 are switched can be highlighted by including not only green and red but also another color (for example, purple) that does not result in a stop, and the player can be informed that a variable display is being performed more clearly.

On the other hand, as will be described later in Example 1 of FIG. 95(B), when displaying the stop result of the fourth pattern, the lamp display units 1 and 2 do not use intermediate colors such as purple, but use each element (red (R), green (G),
It is preferable to use only the blue (A), red (B) and off lights.
In this game, by not using intermediate colors for the stop result of the fourth symbol, it is possible to avoid problems when some elements become unusable due to damage, etc. For example, problems can occur when results other than the winning result should be displayed in intermediate purple (R+B), but a winning result (red R) is displayed because some elements (blue (B)) are unusable (broken). However, if intermediate colors are not used and a miss (light off) is displayed because some elements are unusable (broken), but the jackpot actually occurs, the result is more favorable for the player than the display mode, and problems are unlikely to occur.

In addition, in Example 2 of FIG. 95A, by inserting a light-off state, purple (R+B) is displayed in Example 3.
By inserting the cyclic lighting period between the two lights, the switching period becomes longer, but the same cyclic lighting period (300m) as in Example 1 is achieved.
In this way, the cyclic lighting period and the switching timing (the timing of the change in the state) in the variable display of the fourth symbol on the lamp display units 1 and 2 can be appropriately set so that the player can easily recognize that the fourth symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the determination of the small win and the time reduction are also performed by lottery using the big win random number value in the same manner as the big win determination process of FIG. 16A (FIG. 1
6B, and the support hit judgment process in FIG. 16C). In the time-saving judgment as a lottery, if the big hit random number value matches the time-saving judgment value, time-saving is set as the judgment result. The time-saving judgment value is
It is different from the small hit judgment value and the big hit judgment value. In the case of the time-saving judgment result (time-saving result), in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern) is set as the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop pattern), and the decorative special chart command corresponding to the time-saving pattern is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Then, in the display device 41, the performance control device 300 displays the time-saving pattern as a decorative stop pattern (for example, "1, 1, 3", "1, 2, 3", "1, 3, 1"), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special chart change display game.

As shown in Example 1 of FIG. 95B, when the variable display of the fourth symbol stops (variation stop, special symbol stop), the lamp display unit 1 (fourth symbol LED for special symbol 1) turns off as the fourth symbol when the result (special symbol stop result) of the special symbol variable display game (special symbol 1 variable display game) is a miss, and emits red (R) when the result is a big win or a small win. In this way, the lamp display unit 1 of this embodiment turns off or emits red when the special symbol stops. In this embodiment, the time-saving judgment value for the special symbol 1 variable display game is set to none or outside the range of the big win random number value so that the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game does not become a time-saving symbol, and the lamp display unit 1 does not emit green (time-saving symbol). In addition, the support hit judgment process may not be executed (skip (omit)) so that the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game does not become a time-saving symbol.

On the other hand, the lamp display unit 2 (fourth pattern LED for special pattern 2) turns off as the fourth pattern when the result of the special pattern change display game (special pattern 2 change display game) is a miss, lights up in red (R) when the result is a big win or a small win, and lights up in green (G) when it is a time-saving pattern.
In this way, the lamp display unit 2 of this embodiment can be turned off or can emit red or green light when the special symbol stops. In addition, the lamp display unit 2 of this embodiment notifies the player of a special result (big win result or small win result) that results in a special game state advantageous to the player with red, a warm color that gives a relatively warm impression, and notifies the player of a specific result (time-saving pattern) that results in a specific game state advantageous to the player that is different from the special game state with cool or neutral colors (blue or green other than warm colors) that give a cold impression, so that the player can easily associate the magnitude of the winning of the stopped symbol (magnitude of game value) and increase the interest of the game. Here, warm colors have a longer wavelength (average wavelength) of light and a lower color temperature than cool or neutral colors. Note that neutral colors are neither warm nor cool colors, and green may be regarded as a neutral color or a cool color (note that blue is regarded as a cool color). In this embodiment,
Special chart 2 variable display game result can be a time-saving pattern (win a support hit), so that special chart 2
A time-saving judgment value is set for the variable display game, and a support hit judgment process is executed. Then, when the big win random number value matches the time-saving judgment value, the lamp display unit 1 can emit light in green (time-saving pattern).

In addition to illuminating the lamp display units 1 and 2, various lighting members (such as the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) provided in the gaming machine 10 may be illuminated. In this case, as a lighting effect to notify the lamp display unit 2 that it is a time-saving pattern, these lighting members may be illuminated not only in normal white light, but also in a display mode corresponding to the time-saving pattern (e.g., green), and the time-saving pattern may be illuminated in rainbow colors, similar to the jackpot result, to provide a definite notification. In addition, by deliberately illuminating these lighting members in a color that is not a time-saving pattern (e.g., red), a sense of surprise can be given to the player.

In this way, the lamp display unit 1 does not display a time-saving symbol (e.g., green) as the fourth symbol, but the lamp display unit 2 can display a time-saving symbol.
While the results of the special chart change display game will not be a time-saving pattern (a win on a support hit, a specific result),
The result of the second special chart variable display game can be a time-saving pattern (a win in a support hit, a specific result). On the other hand, as in the example (examples 1 and 2) of (A) in FIG. 95 above, during the variable display of the special chart 1 variable display game in the lamp display unit 1, circulating lighting is performed to include a display mode (green lighting) corresponding to the time-saving pattern, and the display mode is the same as the variable display of the special chart 2 variable display game in the lamp display unit 2.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of one of the special chart 1 variable display games (special chart 2 variable display game) among the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is a time-saving pattern (winning the support hit, specific result), a specific game state (specific game state C, time-saving state (time-saving mode)) in which the player is advantageous can be generated without the occurrence of a big win game state (special game state). In addition, the performance control device 300 can execute the other variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game) including the display mode (time-saving pattern of the fourth pattern (e.g. green)) corresponding to the time-saving pattern (winning the support hit, specific result) of one of the variable display games (special chart 2 variable display game) among the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game.

Therefore, there are three or more display patterns when displaying the fluctuations, making it easy to understand that a fluctuation display is being performed. Also, since the fluctuation modes of the lamp display units 1 and 2 can be made the same, control can be unified and development efficiency can be improved. Furthermore, by making the fluctuation modes of the lamp display units 1 and 2 the same, a sense of unity can be created in the fluctuation display of the special chart 1 fluctuation display game and the special chart 2 fluctuation display game, eliminating any sense of incongruity, and the performance control of the performance control device 300 can be simplified and processing can be lightened. Also, the lamp display unit 3 for notifying the start memory number (reserved number)
While -6 emits light in a single color (for example, red), lamp display units 1 and 2 alternate between a display mode corresponding to the time-saving pattern (green light) and a display mode corresponding to a big win or small win result (red light) and then turn off to display the changing fourth pattern in full color (circulating light). This makes it easy to see that lamp display units 1 and 2 are emitting light corresponding to the special pattern changing display game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition to the above-mentioned variable display modes in FIG. 95(A), the lamp display unit 1 that displays the fourth symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display game, in which the time-saving symbol is not displayed, may display the variable by turning the light on and off in red (light off → light on in red → light off, etc.). In this way, by displaying the variable by only the color used when the variable is stopped, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the time-saving symbol will not be stopped in the special symbol 1 variable display game, and the interest in the game can be increased. On the other hand, in the lamp display unit 2 that displays the fourth symbol in the special symbol 2 variable display game, in which the time-saving symbol is displayed, the variable display can be displayed by turning the light on in red, green, and off, as in Example 1 in FIG. 95(A). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the time-saving symbol will be stopped in the special symbol 2 variable display game,
This can increase the interest of the game.

Also, in the lamp display units 1 and 2, the variation display of the special chart 1 variation display game and the special chart 2 variation display game may be performed by turning the light on and off in red (light off → light on in red → light off...). Even in this mode, the variation display can be performed using only the color used when the variation stops. In this case, in the special chart 2 variation display game in the lamp display unit 2, the light turns green only when the game stops on the time-saving pattern. Therefore, since the lamp display unit 2 turns green only when the time-saving pattern (winning the support hit) is reached, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a time-saving pattern, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, by utilizing the fact that the lamp display units 1 and 2 are full-color LEDs, the gaming machine 10
When the system transitions to the AM initialization state (RAM clear mode), the lamp indicators 1 and 2 turn blue (B
). By providing a state (mode) in which the lamp display units 1 and 2 emit blue light in this way, it is possible to confirm that the blue elements (blue LEDs) of the lamp display units 1 and 2 are functioning. In addition, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit blue (B) light when the gaming machine 10 transitions to various states such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, or when checking the initial operation of various movable members (movable parts of the board presentation device 44, the protruding presentation unit 13 of the frame decoration device 18, and lighting members (LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and frame decoration device 18, etc.) provided in the gaming machine 10.

In addition, blue may be included as another color that does not result in a stop in the cyclic lighting of the variable display of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game in the lamp display units 1 and 2. By including a color that can be displayed only by a single element (blue element) as a color that does not result in a stop of the variable display game in this way, it is possible to increase the opportunities to confirm that each element of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is functioning normally, and the variable display mode can be emphasized, making it easy to inform the player that a variable display is being performed. For example, in Example 3 of (A) in Figure 95, if purple is replaced with blue, it is possible to check whether the light emission of all elements (RGB) of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is normal or abnormal.

Furthermore, in the example (Example 1) of FIG. 95B, the losing symbol is turned off when the stopping result of the variable display game is a losing one, but the losing symbol may be displayed by lighting up in blue. By using blue lighting for the losing symbol in this way, the stopping result of the variable display game can be easily notified to the player by using each element of the full-color LED, and it is possible to check whether the light emission of each element is normal or abnormal. In addition, these lighting modes and variable display modes can be used in appropriate combinations in the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96, the lamp display units 3 and 4 (special drawing 1 reserved LED 1, special drawing 1 reserved LED
2) can emit light in red (R), for example, and can be turned off, turned on, or blinking.
It displays the number of reserved special charts 1 (first start memory number, reserved number). Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special chart 2 reserved LED 1, special chart 2 reserved LED 2) can emit light, for example, in red (R), and display the number of reserved special charts 2 (second start memory number, reserved number) by turning off, turning on, or blinking. For example, as shown in FIG. 96, when the number of reserved is 0, both lamp display units 3 and 4 are turned off, when the number of reserved is 2, they are turned on, and when the number of reserved is 4, they are blinking. Also, when the number of reserved is 1, only the lamp display unit 3 is turned on (lamp display unit 4 is turned off), and when the number of reserved is 3, only the lamp display unit 3 is blinking (lamp display unit 4 is turned on). The blinking state is switched between display modes (off and on) every 100 msec, for example. Lamp display unit 5,
The number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed in the same manner in 6. In addition, the lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the reserved number when a jackpot occurs, but displays the reserved number in cases other than the jackpot state (including cases where a reach occurs on the display device 41, which will be described later).

As described above, the description has been given with reference to Figs. 94 to 96, but the following configuration is also possible as the fifth embodiment.

The lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color other than red (orange, etc.) when a big win or small win result is obtained. Also, the lamp display unit 2 may emit light in a cool or neutral color other than green (blue, blue-green (G+B), purple, etc.) when a time-saving result (time-saving pattern) is obtained. In this way, by emitting light in warm colors when a big win or small win result is obtained and emitting light in cool or neutral colors when a time-saving result is obtained, that is, by emitting light in a different manner (color) for a big win or small win result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the time-saving state is about to begin.

In addition, the lamp display units 1 and 2 that execute the variable display game as a performance are turned off and turn black in the case of a losing result, but black gives the image (impression) to the player of a low temperature and is classified as a cool color, and it is easy to associate the result of the variable display game with the lowest game value (profit). In addition, even if the losing result is a cool blue color, the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off (black)
Similarly, it is easy to associate that red is the one with the lowest game value. In this way, the game value of the results of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is shown in the order of blue (black) → green → red, that is, the order of cool colors → neutral colors → warm colors which give the impression of a higher temperature, is the same as the order of the jackpot expectancy of the colors used in general preview effects such as background effects and hold change previews on the display unit 41, and is linked to the jackpot expectancy of the colors. This makes it easier for players to associate that the game value related to the results of the lamp display units 1 and 2 increases in the order of cool colors → neutral colors → warm colors.
Contrary to the image of temperature, the so-called color temperature decreases in the order of cool colors (blue) → neutral colors (green) → warm colors (red).

In addition, the lamp display unit 2 may emit light in a color other than a cool color or a neutral color such as green (may emit light in a warm color) when the time-saving result is reached, and may emit light in a different manner (color) from the manner (color) of the big win result or the small win result. Furthermore, in the case of a big win result or a small win result, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a color other than a warm color such as red, for example, the color for the big win result or the small win result may be green, and the color for the time-saving result may be red. In this way, the manner (color) of the fourth pattern displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 can be appropriately selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving result (e.g., green) is not displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 1, and the time-saving result (e.g., green) is displayed as the fourth symbol only on the lamp display unit 2, but the opposite configuration is also possible. That is, the time-saving result can be displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 1, and the time-saving result can be prevented from being displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 2. In this case, so that the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game can become the time-saving symbol,
In addition, in order to prevent the result of the special chart 2 variable display game from becoming a time-saving pattern, the time-saving judgment value for the special chart 2 variable display game is set to none or outside the range of the jackpot random number value, or the support hit judgment process is not executed. In this way, the result of the special chart 1 variable display game becomes a time-saving pattern, and it becomes possible to enter the time-saving state during the normal game state, so that a result other than the jackpot result (time-saving result) occurs, and a player who has not been able to play a jackpot game can be given the opportunity to hold the balls for a long time.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the fourth variable display game of the main variable display game (main variable display game) of the lamp display units 1 and 2
The fourth pattern of a non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) may be made not to be displayed as a time-saving result (e.g., green), while the fourth pattern of a non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) may be made not to be displayed as a time-saving result (e.g., green).
In this case, in each of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, the time-saving judgment value in the main variable display game is set so as to match the jackpot random number value, and the time-saving judgment value in the secondary variable display game is set so as not to match the jackpot random number value. For example,
In the normal game state, the main variation display game becomes the special chart 1 variation display game, and the subordinate variation display game becomes the special chart 2 variation display game. In addition, in the specific game state, the main variation display game becomes the special chart 2 variation display game, and the subordinate variation display game becomes the special chart 1 variation display game.

In addition, even if the support hit is not won, when the number of times of the special chart variable display game (excluding the number of times in the probability variable state) executed after the end of the jackpot state reaches a predetermined number (so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling) (for example, 500 times), even if the result of the special chart variable display game is a miss, the lamp display unit 1, 2 indicates that the time-saving state (time-saving state by the so-called ceiling time-saving, play time) has started.
When entering the time-saving state by the ceiling time-saving in this way, the lamp display units 1 and 2 can emit light in a cool color or a neutral color such as green as the fourth pattern.

As shown in Example 2 of FIG. 95(B), the fourth symbol on the lamp display units 1 and 2 when the time-saving state is entered by the ceiling time-saving may be illuminated in a color (e.g., purple (R+B)) different from the color of the time-saving symbol when a support hit is won (e.g., green). In this way, by making the fourth symbol when the ceiling time-saving state is reached a display mode (purple light) different from the display mode (red light, green light, off) used for the big hit result, small hit result, time-saving symbol, and miss, it is possible to create an unexpected presentation and to easily notify the player that the ceiling time-saving state has been reached, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, the color of the time-saving symbol when a support hit is won may also be different depending on the number of time-saving times granted thereafter (e.g., when the number of time-saving times is 3,
Green for 0 times, yellow for 100 times of time saving).

In addition, when entering the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving, either of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 corresponding to the special pattern variation display game that has reached the predetermined number of times can be made to emit light in the same manner (color, for example, green) as when the above-mentioned time-saving pattern (time-saving result) is displayed as the fourth pattern.
The illumination state of the lamp display units 1 and 2 when the ceiling time-saving is reached may be different from the illumination state when the fourth symbol is the time-saving symbol. On the other hand, the time-saving symbol (e.g., green) as the fourth symbol in this embodiment can be illuminated only by the lamp display unit 2 as described above, and is set not to be illuminated by the lamp display unit 1.

As described above in the first embodiment, when entering the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may be turned off in response to the result of the special chart variable display game being a miss. In this case, while the lamp display units 1 and 2 are turned off, a miss pattern (which may be a time-saving pattern) or a small win pattern (if it is a small win without a V win) can be displayed as a stopping pattern on the special chart display or display device 41. The time-saving patterns displayed on the display device 41 are as follows:
For example, there is "3, 3, 5" where only the left and center symbols are lined up ("1, 1, 3" is also acceptable, as in the case of time-saving due to a support hit).

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 in which the time-saving state (normal power support state) can be generated a predetermined number of times (for example, 99 times) after the big win as shown in FIG. 54 or FIG. 88, the lamp display unit 2 is operated in the following manner.
A time-saving symbol (e.g., green) may or may not be displayed as the fourth symbol.

Specifically, if a support hit occurs during the time-saving state after the big win (during specific game state A), a time-saving symbol can be displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 2. According to this embodiment, by displaying the time-saving symbol as the fourth symbol, the player can recognize that a support hit has occurred during specific game state A, and this can be collected as data. Furthermore,
As described in the third embodiment, when the time-saving state (specific game state C) due to the support hit continues (overlaps) after the specific game state A, the player can easily grasp the number of time-saving times, i.e., how long the time-saving state due to the support hit after the specific game state A will continue. In addition, the time-saving pattern on the lamp display unit 2 when the support hit occurs during the specific game state A may be a color (e.g., light blue) different from the color (e.g., green) of the time-saving pattern when the support hit occurs when the specific game state A is not in the specific game state A (e.g., winning the support hit with the remaining reserve). In this way, by making the color of the time-saving pattern different when the specific game state A is in the specific game state A and when the specific game state A is not in the specific game state A, the player can easily recognize whether the time-saving number of times due to the support hit is all given or not, and the interest of the game can be increased.

On the other hand, if a support hit occurs during the time-saving state after the big win (during specific game state A), the time-saving symbol does not have to be displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 2. According to this embodiment, by not displaying the time-saving symbol as the fourth symbol, the player cannot recognize that a support hit has occurred during specific game state A, making it easier for him to concentrate on the game. Furthermore, the time-saving state (specific game state C) due to the support hit does not continue (does not overlap) after specific game state A.
In the case of a game machine with this specification, even if a support win is won during the specific game state A, the time-saving symbol is not displayed and the player cannot know that he has won, so that the player can be prevented from becoming disappointed because the number of time-saving times does not increase even though the support win is won.

Furthermore, if a support win occurs while the remaining reserved balls are consumed after the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol can be displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 2. Therefore, in both gaming machines in which the specific gaming state A and the specific gaming state C overlap or do not overlap, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of time-saving times in the specific gaming state C (time-saving state due to a support win) that has occurred can be consumed in full, which can increase the interest in the game.

Regardless of whether or not the time-saving symbol is displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 2, the display device 41 can display a time-saving symbol (for example, "1, 1, 3" or the like) as a decorative stop symbol. According to this embodiment, even if the time-saving symbol is not displayed on the lamp display unit 2,
The time-saving symbol on the display device 41 allows the player to recognize that he or she has won the support win. In addition, when the time-saving symbol is displayed on the lamp display unit 2, the time-saving symbol on the display device 41 and the winning of the support win can be displayed in an emphasized manner, making it easier for the player to recognize.

On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the time-saving symbol is displayed as the fourth symbol on the lamp display unit 2, the time-saving symbol may not be displayed as a decorative stop symbol on the display device 41. According to such an embodiment, the player cannot recognize that he or she has won the support prize from the decorative stop symbol on the display device 41, and can concentrate on the effects displayed on the display device 41, for example, and can easily concentrate on the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Actions and Effects of Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is provided with a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of displaying the first variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special chart 2 variable display game) as presentations. The gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when the result of the first variable display game or the second variable display game is a special result (e.g., a jackpot result). In the gaming machine 10, when the result of one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is a specific result (e.g., winning a time-saving pattern or a support hit), a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving state (time-saving mode), a specific game state C) advantageous to the player can be generated without the occurrence of a special game state. The presentation control means is capable of executing the other variable display game, including a display mode (e.g., a time-saving pattern of the fourth pattern (e.g., green)) corresponding to a specific result of one of the first and second variable display games.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the display modes during the variable display of the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be made the same, so that the control can be unified and the development efficiency can be improved. In addition, by making the display modes during the variable display of the first variable display game and the second variable display game the same, a sense of unity can be created and a sense of incongruity can be eliminated, and the presentation control of the presentation control means can be simplified and the processing can be lightened. Furthermore, since the other variable display game can be executed including the display correspondence corresponding to the specific result of one variable display game, the number of patterns of the display mode when the other variable display game is variable displayed can be increased, making it easier to understand that the variable display is being performed.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the performance control means (performance control device 300)
A display mode corresponding to a special result (e.g., a big win result or a small win result) (e.g., the red color of the fourth pattern), a display mode corresponding to a specific result (a time-saving result) (a time-saving pattern of the fourth pattern (e.g., green)
), and the display mode corresponding to results other than the special result and the specific result (miss (e.g., off))
Including the above, each of the first variable display game and the second variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game, special chart 2 variable display game) can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the number of patterns can be further increased by including three patterns in the display mode when the variable display game is performed, making it easier to understand that the variable display is being performed. Also, since the display modes corresponding to the special result, specific result, and loss result are included in the variable display, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when each result is obtained, and the interest of the game can be increased.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (special chart variable display game (special chart 1 variable display game, special chart 2 variable display game)) as a presentation, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big win result or a small win result), a special game state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player can be generated. When the result of the variable display game is a specific result (for example, winning a time-saving pattern or a support hit), a specific game state (for example, a time-saving state (time-saving mode), specific game state C) advantageous to the player can be generated without the occurrence of a special game state. The presentation control means is capable of displaying the result of the variable display game on an illuminating light-emitting section (e.g., an LED of the lamp display device 80), and displays a first display mode (e.g., red (R), a warm color) when the result (stopped pattern) of the variable display game is a special result, displays a second display mode (e.g., green (B), a color other than warm colors) when the result is a specific result, and displays a third display mode (e.g., off) when the result is a special result or a result other than the specific result.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the results of the variable display game are notified in different colors depending on whether they are a special result, a specific result, or a loss, making it easier for the player to grasp the stopping patterns and increasing the interest of the game.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 97 to 114. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted in the description. The sixth embodiment relates to a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation pattern group) for selecting a variation pattern of a variation display game.

[Game board]
With reference to FIG. 97, the game board 30 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the game board 30 in FIG. 97, another normal map start gate 34 is added near the normal winning port 35 in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, compared to the game board 30 in FIG. 2. Two normal map start gates 34 are present in the game area 32 at the right side and the lower left of the center case 40. The function and configuration of the normal map start gate 34 itself are the same as those in the first embodiment. That is, inside the normal map start gate 34, a gate switch 34a is provided for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a, a normal map variation display game is executed.

Since the normal map start gate 34 is present in the game area 32 on the lower left, even if the game ball is played left-handed (normal play) in which the game ball flows down the left side of the game area 32, the normal map variation display game is executed by the game ball passing through the normal map start gate 34. When the result of the normal map variation display game is a winning result, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state (a state where it is easy to win), and the normal variation winning device 3
However, in order to make the game ball win the normal variable winning device 37 in the right-hand game area 32, the player is required to have the skill to quickly switch the game ball's launch mode (hitting method) from left-handed to right-handed immediately after the game ball passes through the normal game start gate 34 on the lower left. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the normal game start gate 34 on the lower left and the normal variable winning device 37 in the right-hand game area 32 is converted to an open state, the normal variable winning device 37
There is no guarantee that the game ball will win the prize.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 98 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is similar to FIG. 88, but differs from FIG. 88 in that the normal power support becomes high support in the specific game state B (time-saving mode #3) generated by reaching the ceiling number of times, and the normal power support becomes medium support in the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) generated by the time-saving pattern. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure a part or all of the specific game state to be a probability-changing state (with normal power support/high probability of special pattern) in which the probability of a jackpot is high.

In the medium support mode, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to open than in the normal game state without normal electric support (electric support), but is more difficult to open than in the high support mode.
The profits that players get increase in the order of normal power support (no power support) < medium power support < high power support. And,
In the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in the normal game state, but is more difficult to convert to the open state than in the specific game state B.

In the specific game state A (time-saving modes #1, #2) that occurs following a jackpot, the normal power support may be the same type of high support as in the specific game state B, or may be another type of high support. In this other type of high support, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than in the specific game state C, and is more difficult or easier to convert to the open state than in the specific game state B. If the high support in the specific game state A and the specific game state B is the same type, control is simplified, while if they are different types, gameplay becomes more varied.

In the specific game states A and B, since the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, right-handed hitting is recommended as the launching mode of the game ball, aiming at the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the specific game states A and B, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning port 36, so that the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

As described above, the first start condition for enabling the special chart 1 variable display game is the winning of the first start winning slot 36 or the occurrence of the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory, special chart 1 reservation). The second start condition for enabling the special chart 2 variable display game is the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the occurrence of the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reservation).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 3
Although 7 is slightly more likely to open than in the normal game state, the disadvantage of not winning the start winning hole 36 becomes greater if right-handed hits are always continued during the specific game state C. For example, if the number of winning balls in the start winning hole 36 per unit number of shot balls in the case of left-handed hits is greater than the number of winning balls in the normal variable winning device 37 per unit number of shot balls in the case of right-handed hits, the disadvantage of right-handed hits becomes greater than the disadvantage of left-handed hits.

For this reason, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, a left hit aimed at the start winning hole 36 is basically recommended as the launch mode (hitting method) of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state C, the main starting area is the first start winning hole 36 and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, so that the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game.

As the presentation mode of the specific game state A, the time-saving modes #1 and #2 are the same as those in FIG. 54A and FIG.
In this embodiment, the time-saving numbers m1 and m2 for the time-saving modes #1 and #2 are each 4
The number of time-saving times m2 is a fixed value of 10 or 30, but it may be a variable value to increase the variety of the game. For example, the number of time-saving times m2 may be selected by lottery to be 20, 30, or 50. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the probability of a small win in the special chart 2 variable display game is 1
/15.79 and the time-saving count m2 is small. For this reason, the time-saving mode #2 does not necessarily result in a small win (a big win state of V passing), so it does not become a next-time continuation confirmed mode (confirmed mode).

The presentation mode of the specific game state B is the time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode of the specific game state C is the time-saving mode #4. The presentation modes are different, and the player can distinguish between the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) and the time-saving state due to the sudden time-saving (c time-saving) by the presentation. It is also possible to make the presentation mode the same for the specific game state B and the specific game state C, thereby standardizing the presentation and reducing development costs. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times m3 and m4 for the time-saving modes #3 and #4 are
are fixed values of 251 times and 30 times, respectively, but may be variable to increase the variety of games. For example, multiple time-saving symbols such as a time-saving symbol for 50 times, a time-saving symbol for 30 times, and a time-saving symbol for 20 times may be provided, and the average number of time-saving symbols m4 may be set to 30 times by drawing a lottery using a support symbol random number at 10%, 70%, and 20% respectively.

In addition, the time-saving modes #3 and #4 are different presentation modes from the time-saving modes #1 and #2.
The time-saving state resulting from a big win (specific game state A) and the time-saving state not resulting from a big win (specific game states B and C) can be distinguished by the presentation.
By making the presentation mode the same, it is possible to standardize the presentation and reduce development costs.

Next, we will explain the transitions from each game state.

In this embodiment, the ceiling number of times m5 is 580 times, and the number of times of the special chart variable display game executed under a predetermined condition (special chart low probability state, state that is not a probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot state during the specific game state A and the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode) will not reach the ceiling number of times. Therefore, during the specific game state A and the remaining reserved consumption mode, there is no transition to the specific game state B.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state or the specific game state C, when the number of times the special chart variable display game is executed under predetermined conditions after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is entered and the state transitions to the specific game state B (time reduction mode #3).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no support hit (time-saving result, time-saving pattern) in the result of the special chart 2 variable display game, and there is a support hit only in the result of the special chart 1 variable display game. In order to do this, in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 14),
3609) is executed, and conversely, in the big win flag 2 setting process (FIG. 15), the support hit determination process, etc. (A3707-A3709) is not executed. Therefore, basically, the main variable display game does not transition to the special game state C from the specific game state A, the transition state (remaining reserved consumption mode), and the specific game state B, in which the main variable display game becomes the special game 2 variable display game.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state where the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game, if the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is a support hit result (time-saving pattern), the game suddenly transitions to a specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) as a time-saving (c time-saving).
In a normal game state where the player gets little profit and the presentation tends to be monotonous, a special privilege resulting in a support winning result (time-saving pattern) is provided to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a transition condition is satisfied without a small win or a big win occurring in the specific game states B and C, the game transitions to a transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode) in which the remaining reserve is consumed.
The transition condition for transitioning from the transition state may be the same as that in FIG. 88 of the third embodiment. That is, the transition condition is that (i) the number of times the special chart 2 variable display game is executed in the specific game state is the number of time reductions m3, m
4 (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) the total number of executions of the special chart variable display game (the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game) in the specific game state is the time-saving number m3
, or exceeds a second predetermined number of times greater than m4 (first predetermined number of times). The second predetermined number of times may be the sum of the number of time-saving times and the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2. In addition, for the condition (i) for transitioning from the specific game state C to the transition state, the number of times the special game state 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is executed in the specific game state C may exceed the number of time-saving times m4.

[Time-saving number of times and the number of reserved times corresponding to the pattern]
99 is a table showing the number of time-saving times and the number of reserved times corresponding to the patterns, which are the types of winnings in the special chart variable display game, in the sixth embodiment. The patterns are patterns that result in a big win (including a big win due to a V win), and here, the time-saving patterns are excluded.

As shown in (A), in this embodiment, in a state without normal power support, the jackpot pattern of the special chart 1 variable display game only has pattern A1 (mainly a jackpot in a normal game state).
. The pattern A1 is the same as the pattern A in the first and third embodiments, except for the number of time-saving times (four times in this case). In addition, in the state with normal power support, the pattern of the jackpot of the special chart 1 variable display game is only the pattern P1 (mainly the jackpot in the specific game state C). For the pattern P1, the number of time-saving times is 30 times (m2) and the number of reserved pieces is four. The jackpot patterns A1 and P1 are not jackpots due to V winning, and are stop patterns determined by the jackpot pattern random number. It is also possible to configure the pattern A1 and the pattern P1 as the jackpot stop patterns related to V winning in the small jackpot of the special chart 1 variable display game, but in this case, if there is a small jackpot pattern random number in addition to the jackpot pattern random number, it is also possible to configure the pattern A1 and the pattern P1 as the small jackpot stop patterns determined by the small jackpot pattern random number.

In a state without normal power support, when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the only pattern is the A1, and the allocation is 100%. Therefore, in a normal game state, when the special chart 1 variable display game of the main variable display game is a jackpot, the game transitions to the time-saving mode #1 (time-saving count 4 times) of the specific game state A after the jackpot state. It is also possible to provide a pattern P1 in addition to the A1, and transition to the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A after the jackpot state of the special chart 1 variable display game (such as the dotted line in FIG. 98). Alternatively, a pattern P1 can be provided instead of the A1, and the special chart 1 variable display game can be set to the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A after the jackpot state of the special chart 1 variable display game.
When the variable display game becomes a jackpot, the game goes from the normal game state to the jackpot state and then to the specific game state A.
The mode may be changed to the time-saving mode #2.

In the state with normal power support, when the special chart 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the only pattern is the pattern P1, and the allocation is 100%. Therefore, when the special chart 1 variable display game of the main variable display game is a jackpot in the specific game state C, after the jackpot state, the game transitions to the time-saving mode #2 (time-saving count 30 times) of the specific game state A. In addition to the pattern P1, the pattern A1 is provided,
After the special chart 1 variable display game hits the jackpot state, the game may transition to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A. Alternatively, a pattern A1 may be provided instead of the pattern P1, and when the special chart 1 variable display game hits the jackpot, the game may transition from the specific game state C to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific game state A via the jackpot state.
It may be configured to transition to 1.

As shown in (B), for a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game with normal power support, the pattern is only one type of pattern S1, which gives a time-saving number m2 of 30 times after the jackpot, and the allocation is 100%. In this embodiment, the jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game is a V prize in a small jackpot, but this is not limited to this. In the specific game state A-C with normal power support, when the special chart 2 variable display game of the main variable display game becomes a jackpot, the transition is made to the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A. In addition to the pattern S1, two patterns with time-saving number m2 of 20 times and 50 times may be provided, and the time-saving number m2 of 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times may be selected by drawing a pattern by allocation.

In this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is different between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, and the small hit upper limit judgment value (A3900) is different between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game. The probability of a small hit in the special chart 2 variable display game is 1/15.79, while the probability of a small hit in the special chart 1 variable display game is 1/199.80. Therefore, in the specific game state A, specific game state B, and transition state (remaining reservation consumption mode) where the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, it is easier to hit a small hit and even a big hit due to a V winning with a small hit than in the normal game state and specific game state C where the main variable display game is the special chart 1 variable display game.

The pattern G1 of the jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game without normal power support (jackpot due to V winning of a small jackpot in the remaining reserve) is the same as the pattern G of the first embodiment. There is only one type of pattern, G1, which gives 30 times the number of time-saving times m2 granted after the jackpot, and the allocation is 100%. Therefore, when the special chart 2 variable display game of the main variable display game is a jackpot in the transition state (remaining reserve consumption mode), it transitions to the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A. Note that, since the pattern G1 and pattern S1 transition to the same time-saving mode after the jackpot,
The pattern G1 and the pattern S1 may be a common pattern. In addition to the pattern G1, two patterns are provided, one for the time-saving number m2 of 20 times and the other for the time-saving number m2 of 50 times, and the pattern is selected by lottery.
2 may be selected from 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times. In addition, a pattern A1 may be provided in addition to the pattern G1 to transition to the time-saving mode #1 of the specific gaming state A (see FIG. 98).
dotted line).

As shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the normal gaming state, the transition state, the special gaming state A, the special gaming state B, and the special gaming state C occur based on the individual occurrence conditions (transition conditions).
The transition conditions) may be different from each other.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the special chart 1 variable display game becomes a jackpot in the specific game state C, the game transitions to time-saving mode #2 after the jackpot ends, and 30 time-saving times in high support are obtained, just as in the case of the special chart 2 variable display game becoming a jackpot (in the case of the pattern S1, G1). Therefore, even if the specific game state C is not high support but medium support, it is very advantageous for the player and increases the interest of the game. In addition, the specific game state C in medium support does not change to a state with normal power support, so it is treated as a consecutive win in which the jackpot state and the specific game state continue without going through the normal game state.

As shown in the pie chart of the ratio of the round number upper limit value in (C), when there are multiple round number upper limit values (number of jackpot rounds), there may be a jackpot pattern corresponding to each round number upper limit value. For example, as shown in (C), when there are three types of round number upper limit values, 9R, 6R, and 3R, for the jackpot of the special chart 2 variable display game, the pattern S1-9R (distribution 15
%), pattern S1-6R (10% allocation), pattern S1-3R (75% allocation), pattern G1-9R (15% allocation), pattern G1-6R (10% allocation), pattern G1-3R (
In the case of a big win due to a V winning in a small win, the small win may be considered as one round and included in the round number upper limit, or the small win may not be included in the round number upper limit.

[Time-saving operation status]
FIG. 100 is a table summarizing the operation status of the time-saving function when a new time-saving function activation trigger occurs from each game state. The time-saving function activation trigger is a jackpot if the time-saving function is a jackpot via a jackpot (time-saving function a), reaching the ceiling number of times if the time-saving function is a ceiling time-saving function (time-saving function b), or a sudden time-saving function (
c Time Saving) involves setting and deriving (displaying) a time-saving pattern.

As mentioned above, in the normal game state (including remaining reserve consumption mode) and specific game states A-C, when a jackpot occurs as a trigger for the a-time reduction, the game will go through the jackpot state, and immediately after the jackpot ends, the a-time reduction will be activated and the game will transition to specific game state A.

In the normal game state (including the remaining reserved consumption mode), the specific game state A, and the specific game state C, when the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for the b time reduction, the b time reduction is activated and a transition to the specific game state B is possible. However, in the specific game state B, even if the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for the b time reduction, a new ceiling time reduction activation flag (A5115) is not generated, and a new b time reduction cannot be activated. In this way, the b time reduction is prohibited from being generated in the specific game state B in a duplicated manner, and the specific game state B is prevented from being substantially extended, thereby preventing excessive advantage from being given to the player. In this embodiment, since the ceiling number of times cannot be reached in the specific game state A and the remaining reserved consumption mode, there is substantially no transition from the specific game state A and the remaining reserved consumption mode of the normal game state to the specific game state B. This prevents excessive advantage from being given to the player.

As mentioned above, when the ceiling number of times is reached and the specific game state C (c time reduction) of the medium support transitions to the specific game state B (b time reduction), the presentation mode switches from time reduction mode #4 to time reduction mode #3, and the presentation changes. In this case, the way of hitting the game ball switches from a left-handed hitting state in which left hitting is recommended to a right-handed hitting state in which right hitting is recommended, and the main variable display game switches from the special chart 1 variable display game to the special chart 2 variable display game.

In addition, in the normal game state (excluding the remaining reserved consumption mode), when a time-saving symbol is drawn out by a support hit as a trigger for the c time-saving, the c time-saving is activated and transitions to the specific game state C. However, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the remaining reserved consumption mode of the normal game state, the main variable display game is the special chart 2 variable display game, and as described above, the support hit (time-saving symbol) does not occur in the special chart 2 variable display game, so the c time-saving is not activated and the specific game state C is transitioned to.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a time-saving pattern is derived as a c-time-saving trigger by the special chart 1 variable display game in the specific game state C, the operation of the c-time-saving is prohibited and a new c-time-saving cannot be activated, for example, by not executing the setting of the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations (A5126) and the support activation setting process (A5127). In this way, the occurrence of the c-time-saving is prohibited in the specific game state C in duplicate, which eliminates the situation in which the specific game state C is substantially extended and prevents the player from being overly advantageous. Note that, in the specific game state C,
When a time-saving pattern is derived in, it is also possible to reset the initial value of the time-saving variation count and execute the support operation setting process to operate a new c time-saving. However, even in this configuration, if the remaining number of time-saving times is greater than the initial value of the time-saving variation count (the number of time-saving times of the new c time-saving), the remaining number of time-saving times will suddenly decrease, so the new c time-saving may be made inoperable and canceled.

In addition, in the specific game states A and B, if the start winning slot 36 is won and there is no special game start memory, the special game 1 variable display game may be executed, but the operation of the c time reduction may be forcibly prohibited so as not to transition to the specific game state C.
In this case, even if the result of the special chart 1 variation display game is a support hit (time-saving pattern), the setting of the initial value of the number of time-saving variations (A5126) and the support operation setting process (A5127) are not executed.

[Display of the collective display device]
Fig. 101 is a diagram for explaining the display of the collective display device 50 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that the display of the collective display device 50 other than the display shown in Fig. 101 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, since there is no special probability state, the LED lamp D9 (third game state display unit 59) is different from the LED lamp D7 (first game state display unit 57) in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the light turns on or off to indicate whether the ball is being hit from the right or left (normal hit).

In a state without normal power support (no power support), that is, in a normal game state or transition state,
The LED lamps D7 and D9 on the collective display device 50 are off, indicating that the device is in the left-hand hit state (normal hit state), and the LED lamp D17 on the collective display device 50 is also off, indicating that the variable time reduction function is not activated (i.e., the non-time reduction state).

In the specific game state C, which is the time-saving c state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are off, indicating that the state is a left-hit state (normal hit state), while the LED lamp D17 is on, indicating that the variable time-saving function is activated (i.e., the time-saving state). However, exceptionally, if a win (normal hit) occurs in the normal pattern variable display game during the time-saving c state (specific game state C), the LED lamps D7 and D9 as right-hit LEDs are lit at the timing when the winning pattern stops to indicate that the state is a right-hit state in which the normal power is released. Therefore, in the left-hit state, the game area 32 at the lower left
When the game ball passes through the normal game start gate 34, the normal game variation display game is executed and becomes a win, and the normal game variation winning device 37 is converted to an open state by the center support, an instruction (suggestion) to hit to the right is notified to the player.

In addition, in the specific game state C, a left hit instruction display instructing a left hit and a right hit instruction display instructing a right hit may be displayed on the display device 41 in response to the left hit state and right hit state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50. In this way, even an unskilled player can easily understand that he or she is hitting to the right, and can easily receive the benefit of the normal power opening by the center support. In addition, the right hit instruction display on the display device 41 may be displayed not when the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit, but when the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) is actually opened, so as to benefit the player. In addition, in the specific game state C, when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a normal winning in a short time (for example, 50 msec or less) (in the case of the normal power opening pattern H1 described later), the right hit instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 in order not to disappoint the player.
It does not have to be displayed in.

In addition, since the right-hitting state in which right-hitting is recommended occurs exceptionally in the specific game state C, regardless of the left-hitting state or right-hitting state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9, the left-hitting instruction display may be always displayed on the display device 41. In this way, since a skilled player hits right in response to the opening of normal power, it becomes easier to receive benefits from the center support, and the operation of the gaming machine 10 may improve as the player tries to increase his/her skill.

Furthermore, since the left-hit state is the normal state in the specific game state C, the left-hit instruction display may not be displayed on the display device 41 so as not to cause discomfort to the player, or the left-hit instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 only for a specified period of time when transitioning to the specific game state C.

Furthermore, in a specific game state A which is time-saving a and a specific game state B which is time-saving b,
The lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that the player is in the right-hand hit state, and the LED lamp D17
lights up to indicate that the variable time reduction function is in operation.

During the big win state and the small win game state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that the state is a right-hit state, and the LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time shortening function is not in operation (i.e., the time shortening state). As an exception, in a specific game state, during a short-time small win game state without a V prize due to the small win result of the special chart 1 variable display game (during the small win opening in FIG. 113), the variable time shortening function is not turned off (the no time shortening flag is not saved) and remains in operation, so the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that the state is a right-hit state, and the LED lamp D17 is lit to indicate that the variable time shortening function is in operation (i.e., the time shortening state).
In addition, since a V prize will definitely occur during a long period of small win play state due to a small win result in the special chart 2 variable display game (during the small win opening in Figure 114), resulting in a big win, the variable time shortening function is turned off (the no time shortening flag is saved) and deactivated, and the LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time shortening function is not activated (i.e., the non-time shortening state).

[Characteristics of the map change display game and the normal power operation]
Figures 102 and 103 are figures showing the features of the normal map change display game and normal power operation in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 102, there are three types of winning symbols (winning stop symbols, winning symbols) in the normal symbol variable display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of normal power support, the normal symbol winning probability is always a constant value of 250/251, and is not controlled to change between low probability (low normal symbol probability) and high probability (high normal symbol probability). In the normal game state or the specific game state C of the medium support, the winning probability is 250/251.
It may be a low probability lower than the above.

The starting memory number (number of reserved regular maps) for the regular map variation display game is 4. The maximum count number of regular maps (
The upper limit of the count is 5. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 600 msec regardless of the game state.

The normal map fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, is 5000 msec in the normal game state and transition state without normal power support (power support), and 4900 msec in the specific game state C of the c time reduction.
msec for the specific game state A with time reduction a and the specific game state B with time reduction b, and 200 msec for the specific game state A with time reduction b. The normal map fluctuation time is shorter in the order of no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game states A and B). In this way, compared to the state without normal electric support (low support) in the normal game state and the transition state, in the specific game state C with medium support, it is slightly more likely to be in a state where it is easy to win with normal electric power (open state), and in the specific game states A and B with high support, it is extremely likely to be in a state where it is easy to win with normal electric power. In addition, the normal map fluctuation time is set based on the support state corresponding to each game state (i.e., no electric support, medium support, high support) in the normal map normal processing (A7920 in FIG. 36).

As shown in FIG. 103(A), by allocating 65,521 possible winning pattern random numbers (A7710) for normal patterns, winning stop pattern number 1 corresponding to winning pattern 1 is set with a probability of 65,321/65,521, winning stop pattern number 2 corresponding to winning pattern 2 is set with a probability of 100/65,521, and winning stop pattern number 3 corresponding to winning pattern 3 is set with a probability of 100/65,521 (A7912).

The LED lamps D8, D10, and D18 of the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal game fluctuation display are turned on/
Depending on the combination of lights out, the winning symbol for 1 is (light out, light on, light out), and the winning symbol for 2 is (light out,
The winning symbol for the winning symbol number 0 (A7909) is displayed as (off, off, off).
It will be displayed as follows.

The normal power opening pattern is the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) when a normal pattern hits once. In normal times, that is, in the normal game state and the transition state, the normal power opening pattern is 1 to 1.
For all symbols of 3, the pattern H1 is a short-time normal power release pattern, and since the pattern H1 is selected with a 100% probability, there is no normal power support (no power support).
In the specific game state B (a time reduction) and the specific game state B (b time reduction), the normal power release pattern is pattern H3, which is a long-term normal power release once for all symbols 1 to 3, and there is a 100% probability of pattern H3
will be selected, resulting in high support.

On the other hand, in the specific game state C (c time reduction), the normal power release pattern is pattern H1 for the winning symbol 1, and pattern H2 for the winning symbols 2 and 3, which opens the normal power twice.
Pattern H1 and pattern H2 are mixed. Pattern H1, which is a short-time normal power release, is 653.
The probability of selection is 21/65521 x 100%, and the pattern H2 of opening the normal power twice is 200
/65521×100% probability. In this way, in the specific gaming state C, the selection probability of pattern H1, which has a shorter normal power release time than pattern H2, is much higher than the selection probability of pattern H2, resulting in medium support. By making the medium support (specific gaming state C) slightly more advantageous than no power support (normal gaming state), the profits of the player and the gaming center are adjusted so that the profits of the player do not become too large.

As mentioned above, the patterns corresponding to hits 2 and 3 are the same in each game state.
Hits 2 and 3 may be combined into one hit.

As shown in FIG. 103(B), in the short-time opening pattern H1, the normal variable winning device 37 is 1
The normal power release time for pattern H1 (A8407) is 36 msec.
The normal remaining ball processing time (A8708) is 600 msec, the normal ending time (A890
3) is 100 msec, and the recovery time until the next map change display game becomes possible after the map ending is 4 msec (the interrupt period of the timer interrupt processing).

In the pattern H2 of normal power two-time opening, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened twice, and the normal power opening time is 36 msec for the first opening and 1624 msec for the second opening. The normal power opening time for the first opening (A8407) is the same as the normal power opening time of 36 msec for pattern H1. While pattern H2 is indistinguishable from pattern H1 for the first opening, the second opening surprises the player and increases the interest of the game. The normal power opening time for the second opening (A87
04) is considerably longer than the normal power release time of the first opening. Also, the normal power release time of the second opening of pattern H2 (1624 msec) or the total opening time of the first and second openings (36
The normal power release time (36 msec + 1624 msec) is longer than the normal power release time of 36 msec in pattern H1. The normal power remaining ball processing time, normal power ending time, and recovery time in pattern H2 are the same as those in pattern H1, making normal power control simple.

Furthermore, in the pattern H2, the wait time between the first and second openings (A
The time between the start of the normal power release and the end of the recovery time for pattern H2 (36 msec + 3000 msec + 1624 msec) is longer than the time between the first and second normal power releases, for example 3000 msec. When the player confirms that the game ball has passed through the normal power start gate 34 at the lower left and that the first normal power release has been completed, this long wait time allows the player time to switch from hitting left to hitting right, and hit right in time for the second discharge release.
The total time of pattern H1 (36 msec+704 msec) is longer than the total time of pattern H1 (36 msec+704 msec) and the total time of pattern H3 (2800 msec+704 msec).

In the long-time opening pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a long time only once.
The normal power release time (A8407) of pattern H3 is 2800 msec, which is longer than the normal power release time of 36 msec of pattern H1, and is longer than the normal power release time of the second release of pattern H2 (1624 msec) or the total release time (36 msec + 1624 msec). Therefore, pattern H3 makes it easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 than patterns H1 and H2. The normal power remaining ball processing time, normal game ending time, and return time of pattern H3 are the same as patterns H1 and H2, making it easier to control the normal power.

As described above, the total open time of normal electricity increases in the order of pattern H1 < pattern H2 < pattern H3, and the selection probability of pattern H1, which has the shortest total open time, decreases in the order of no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game state A, B). And, without electric support, the selection probability of pattern H1 is 100
%, and in the high support, the selection probability of pattern H3 is 100%. Also, as mentioned above, the normal variation time decreases in the order of no electric support > medium support > high support. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electric support < medium support < high support.

In this embodiment, the normal power release time, the winning start pointer value, and the winning end pointer value are set in accordance with the normal power stop pattern information (winning patterns 1-3) and the support state (no electric support, medium support, high support) according to each game state (A8405-A840 in FIG. 39).
7, A8704 in FIG. 41). Therefore, for the normal power release of pattern H1, the first and second normal power release of pattern H2, and the normal power release of pattern H3, the normal power release time is
For patterns H1 and H3, the hit start pointer value and the hit end pointer value are set to the same value (here, 0), and normal power is released only once. For pattern H3, the hit start pointer value and the hit end pointer value are set to different values (here, 0 and 2), and normal power is released twice.

In this embodiment, since the second normal power release occurs only in pattern H2, the wait time and the normal power release time of the second normal power release are determined based on the normal power stop pattern information of 2 and 3,
And, it is set in the normal power operation transition setting process only for the support state (medium support) corresponding to the specific game state C, i.e., only for pattern H2 (A8702 and A8704 in FIG. 41).

The normal remaining ball processing time and the normal ending time are set to the same value regardless of the normal stop pattern information (1-3 winning patterns) and the support state (no electric support, medium support, high support) according to each game state, that is, regardless of which of the patterns H1-H3 it is (A in FIG. 41).
8708, A8903 in FIG. 42). However, these may be set in accordance with the normal stop symbol information and the support state.

[Special drawing information setting process]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart information setting process according to the sixth embodiment. The special chart information setting process is executed in the special chart 1 change start process and the special chart 2 change start process (
A3404, A3504). Note that, in the process of Fig. 104, unlike Fig. 19 of the first embodiment, the distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation is eliminated for simplicity, but the distinction may be made.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection pointer table (A14
201), and using this variable group selection pointer table, obtain a variable group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A14202). As shown in FIG. 98, normal mode,
The remaining reserved consumption mode, time-saving modes #1-#4, and other presentation modes correspond to each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state A-C).
By the process of 2, a variation pattern table is set according to each game state as described below.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the variable group selection offset table (A
14203), and using this variable group selection offset table, offset data corresponding to the variable pattern discrimination flag and the stopping pattern pattern is obtained (A14204).

The variable symbol discrimination flag indicates the symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variable to be started, and discriminates whether the special symbol variable display game to be started is the special symbol 1 variable display game or the special symbol 2 variable display game. Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, the variable pattern table can be made different between the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game, as described later.
The stopping pattern is the result of the special chart change display game (big hit, small hit, support hit, miss)
Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, the variation pattern table can be made different in accordance with the result of the special chart variation display game.

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A14205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable allocation information area as variable allocation information (A14206).

[Variation pattern setting process]
Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the sixth embodiment. The variation pattern setting process is executed in the special chart 1 variation start process and the special chart 2 variation start process (A3406, A3506). Note that in the process of Fig. 105, the same procedure as Fig. 20 of the first embodiment is executed.
Unlike the above, for simplicity, the distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation is eliminated, but it is acceptable to distinguish them.
For simplicity, only one of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (for example, the variation pattern random number 2) is used.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable selection address table (variation group table) (A14301). Then, it obtains and prepares the address of the variable pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variable selection table) corresponding to the variable allocation information (A14206) (A14302). Here, the variable pattern table is a variable pattern group consisting of one or more variable patterns (variation numbers), and is set by obtaining its address (for example, the top address). As described above, the special chart information setting process (Fig. 104)
In the above, the variable allocation information is set based on the presentation mode, the variable symbol discrimination flag, and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the game state.
A fluctuation pattern table (group of fluctuation patterns) can be set in accordance with a specific game state A-C), special chart type (type of special pattern: special chart 1 or special chart 2), and the result of the special chart fluctuation display game (jackpot, small win, support win, miss).

After that, the variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the target (special chart 1 or special chart 2) and prepared (A14303). Then, the allocation process (A
14304), and obtain the variation number obtained as a result of the allocation, and save it in the variation number area (A14305). The variation number is associated with a predetermined variation pattern, and indicates the predetermined variation pattern (for example, normal reach miss A, SP3 reach big win B, etc.). In this way, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation number as the variation pattern is set by the allocation process as a lottery based on the variation pattern table.

[Variable start information setting process]
Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable start information setting process according to the sixth embodiment. The variable start information setting process is executed in the special chart 1 variable start process and the special chart 2 variable start process (A3407, A3507). In addition, in Figure 106, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Figure 23 of the first embodiment, and the explanation is omitted. In the process of Figure 106, unlike Figure 23 of the first embodiment, the distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation is eliminated for simplicity, but it may be distinguished.

If the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A4600b is "N"), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the time-saving mode #1 or the remaining reserved consumption mode is in effect (A4600c).
4600c is "Y"), the variation time value corresponding to the number of times the special chart 2 is changed after the big win (the number of times the special chart 2 variation display game is executed) is saved in the special chart game processing timer area (A4615
). As a result, in the case of a miss in the time-saving mode #1 or the remaining reserved consumption mode (no support hit), the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game is set for each special chart 2 variation number after the big win ends, and the number of rotations is controlled. The interest in the game may be improved by controlling the number of rotations in the time-saving mode #1 or the remaining reserved consumption mode.

In addition, in step A4600c, instead, the specific gaming state A (time-saving mode #1,
In step A4600c, it is determined whether the mode is the specific game state A or the remaining reserved consumption mode, and in the case of a miss in the specific game state A or the remaining reserved consumption mode, the number of rotations of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled. Alternatively, in step A4600c, it is determined only whether the mode is the remaining reserved consumption mode, and in the case of a miss only in the remaining reserved consumption mode, the number of rotations of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled. In step A4600c, it is determined only whether the mode is the time-saving mode #1, and in the case of a miss only in the time-saving mode #1,
The number of rotations of the variable time value of the special chart 2 variable display game may be controlled.

The game control device 100 determines that the variable display game to be started is not the special chart 2 variable display game but the special chart 1
If it is a variable display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y"), or if it is not in time-saving mode #1 or remaining reserve consumption mode (the result of A4600c is "N"), the processing of steps A14601-A14605 is executed.

The game control device 100 clears the random number storage area of the target variable pattern random number 2 (A1
Then, a fluctuation time value table is set (A14602), and a fluctuation time value corresponding to a fluctuation number indicating a fluctuation pattern is obtained using the fluctuation time value table (A1460
3). This allows a change time value corresponding to the change pattern to be obtained. Next, the change time value is saved in the special game processing timer area (A14604). After that, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change number (i.e., the change pattern) is prepared as a performance command (A14605). This allows the change command (MODE, ACTION) to be sent to the performance control device 300 by the next performance command setting process (A4610).

In addition, in FIG. 106, steps A4600a, A4600b, A4600c, A4
It is also possible to eliminate processes A4615 and A4616 and obtain the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation number (fluctuation pattern) in all cases (A14603).

[Settings of the fluctuation pattern table]
Figure 107 is a table showing the setting status of the fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table, fluctuation pattern group) (A14302) set based on the processing of Figures 104 and 105, etc., for each game state and special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). As described above, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table is set to select the fluctuation pattern of the special chart 1 fluctuation display game (first fluctuation display game) by lottery, and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table is set to select the fluctuation pattern of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) by lottery.

The special chart 1 variation pattern table for the special chart 1 variation display game is set to the same common variation pattern table A in the normal game state (normal mode) without electric support, the specific game state C (time-saving mode #4) with medium support, and the specific game state B (time-saving mode #3) with high support (A14302). Then, referring to this variation pattern table A, the variation pattern (variation number) of the special chart 1 variation display game is selected by lottery by the allocation process (A14304).

The special chart 2 variation pattern table for the special chart 2 variation display game is, in the normal game state,
The variation pattern table A is set in the same manner as the special chart 1 variation pattern table. On the other hand, unlike the normal game state, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special chart 2 variation pattern table is set to the same common variation pattern table C.

As shown in Figure 98, when transitioning from specific game state C to specific game state B due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the state remains in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), so for variable display games of the same special chart type (special chart 1 variable display games or special chart 2 variable display games), if the variable pattern table is kept the same, there will be less discomfort and it will not violate the game rules, etc.
Furthermore, if the variation pattern table is the same, the variation pattern or the variation time value of the variation display game will be common, reducing the sense of incongruity.

For this reason, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special chart 1 variation pattern table (
A common same variation pattern table A is set as the special chart 2 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group), and a common same variation pattern table C is set as the special chart 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group). In addition, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state C, the main variation display game remains the special chart 1 variation display game in the left-hand hitting state, so that there is little discomfort, the common same variation pattern table A is set as the special chart 1 variation pattern table in the normal game state and the specific game state C.

In addition, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B, the type (state) of the normal power support transitions from medium support to high support, and the content of the game changes significantly, so it is preferable to clearly switch the type of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation display game (special chart 1 fluctuation display game in the specific game state C, special chart 2 fluctuation display game in the specific game state B) according to the change in the normal power support. Therefore, in both the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table (first fluctuation pattern group) and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table (second fluctuation pattern group) are set differently, like the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table C.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 107, the specific game state A (a time reduction, time reduction mode #1, #2
In the special game state 1, the variation pattern table may be the variation pattern table A, as in the specific game states B and C, in order to ensure commonality of the presentation by the common variation pattern and to reduce development costs, or it may be a variation pattern table other than A in order to increase the presentation variation.
In the specific game state A, the special chart 2 variation pattern table may be variation pattern table C like the specific game states B and C in order to ensure commonality of presentation and reduce costs, or may be a variation pattern table other than C in order to increase the variety of presentation.

Alternatively, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern table may be the fluctuation pattern table A in the time-saving mode #2 of the specific game state A, as in the specific game states B and C, in order to ensure commonality of the presentation by a common fluctuation pattern and reduce development costs, or in the time-saving mode #1, since the number of time-saving times is extremely small compared to the time-saving mode #2 and the specific game states B and C, in order to distinguish the presentation, it may be other than the fluctuation pattern table A. Similarly, the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern table may be the fluctuation pattern table C in the time-saving mode #2, as in the specific game states B and C, in order to ensure commonality of the presentation and reduce development costs, or in the time-saving mode #1, it may be other than the fluctuation pattern table C in order to distinguish the presentation.

Also, the setting of the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 107 may be the same regardless of the result of the fluctuation display game. Alternatively, the setting of the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 107 may change depending on the result of the fluctuation display game (big win, small win, support win, miss). For example, if the result of the fluctuation display game is a miss, as shown in FIG. 107, but if it is a small win or a big win, a common fluctuation pattern table D may be used regardless of the special chart 1 and special chart 2 or the game state, and the fluctuation pattern or fluctuation time value may be made common regardless of the special chart 1 and special chart 2 or the game state.

[An example of a production screen]
108 is a diagram showing a presentation screen as a display screen of the display device 41 according to the sixth embodiment. (A) shows a presentation screen of a normal mode which is a presentation mode of a normal game state without normal power support, and (B) shows a presentation screen of a time-saving mode #4 which is a presentation mode of a specific game state C with medium support.

In FIG. 108(A), "High School Mode" or "High School Stage" is displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode, and a background image imitating a school is displayed. Here, the mode display 679 and the background image are still images, but they may be videos. The number of variations display 677 is "95G", indicating that the number of times the special chart variation display game has been executed since the end of the jackpot is 95. The number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.
The numbers "4" and "5" indicate the number of reserved special charts 1 (number of reserved special charts 1 start memories), respectively.
The number "0" is displayed, indicating the number of special chart 2 start memories.

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a and a right pattern 611b are displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns).
The left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c can be displayed in a variable manner.
The change display of the middle pattern 611c is shown in the left change display area 610A and the right change display area 6
10B, is displayed in the central variable display area 610C. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of seven patterns (decorative identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7 appear on the display screen in order, move vertically (up and down) across the display screen, and then disappear from the display screen. To save display area, the middle pattern 611c is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling.
The direction of the variable display is different from the vertical scroll of 11b, and the display is displayed by a rotational change that is visually recognized by the player as rotating around an axis. Note that instead of a rotational change, a forward/backward change (forward/backward scrolling) is used in which a series of overlapping patterns are displayed as if moving forward and backward by perspective or the like.
Also, the center pattern 611c may be scrolled vertically, like the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b.

The left pattern 611a is a character image 612a (character component,
The left pattern 611a is made up of a character image 612a (character portion) and a character image 613a (character component, character portion) showing a number (character).
The character images 613a and 612a are arranged so that their centers are aligned in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the character image 613a is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612a.
The right pattern 611b is composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a letter image 613b showing a number. In order to shorten the width of the whole right pattern 611b, the character image 612b and the letter image 613b are arranged so that their centers are almost aligned in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the letter image 6
13b is located on the central axis of the character image 612b. In order to save the display area, the middle design 611c is composed of only character images 613c indicating numbers.

In the normal mode, the identification information includes a plurality of numbers from 1 to 7, for example,
At least one number is a different color than the others, instead of the same color, such as 1 (green), 2 (blue), 3 (orange), 4 (blue), 5 (green), 6 (blue), and 7 (orange). The even numbers may be the same color (cool colors). The odd numbers may be a different color from the even numbers, and may include multiple colors such as green (neutral colors) and orange (warm colors). In this embodiment, when the decorative special pattern includes characters and numbers, the characters correspond one-to-one to the numbers and are different for each number, but this is not limited, and the same character may be used for different numbers.

Four pending displays 682a (first pending displays) are displayed in the first pending display section 630a (waiting area), which displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first pending display. The pending displays 682a have a display form imitating playing cards. In addition, in the pending consumption area 640, a pending change display 682b indicating a pending change (the start memory that was the execution right for this special chart variable display game) related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game is displayed in a display form imitating a turned over playing card. The pending consumption area 640 may be indicated by a pedestal. The second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game may be displayed as the second pending display (
Here, nothing is displayed in the second hold display section 630b, which displays as the second start-up memory display.

In FIG. 108B, a background image (background movie) of a moving image (movie) is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41. In addition, as a mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support, "Super mode" or "Super area" is displayed in two opposing places in the upper left corner and the lower right corner. Since the multiple mode displays 679 are displayed on a layer behind the reserved display 682a,
The mode display 679 in the lower right corner is hidden by the reserved display 682a on the front layer. However, the mode display 679 in the upper left corner, which is not hidden by the reserved display 682a, allows the player to fully recognize the current presentation mode. The mode display 679 is displayed diagonally, unlike the horizontal direction in FIG. 108(A), and may move diagonally in a strip-shaped area as part of the video of the background image or independently of the video. In this way, the mode display 679 is displayed in the time-saving mode #4.
Since the time-saving mode #4 is clearly different from the normal mode, the time-saving mode #4 can be easily visually distinguished from the normal mode.

The number of times of variation display 677 is "124G", which indicates that the number of times the special chart variation display game will be executed after the end of the jackpot is 124. The remaining number of times display 696 in the upper right corner of the display screen displays the remaining number of time-saving, that is, the number of variation display games that can be executed in the future in time-saving mode #4. The number "4" indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and the number "0" indicating the number of reserved special charts 2 are displayed in the special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen, respectively. Note that since it is a medium support, the number in the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 may often be other than "0" due to winning the normal variation winning device 37.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in Fig. 108(B), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are displayed by vertical scrolling, and the middle pattern 611c is displayed by rotating, as in the normal mode in Fig. 108(A). However, in Fig. 108(B), the change mode may be different from Fig. 108(A) so that it is clear that it is a middle support. For example, the middle pattern 611c may be displayed by vertical scrolling, and the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b may be displayed by rotating.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the center support in FIG. 108(B), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are composed of a character image showing a character and a letter image showing a number, as in the normal mode in FIG. 108(A). The center pattern 611c is composed only of a letter image 613c showing a number. However, in FIG. 108(B), in order to clearly show that it is a center support,
For example, the center pattern 611c may be composed of a character image and a text image, and the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b may be composed of text images only. When the same characters are used for the same numbers in the time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the display mode may be different within a range where the characters can be recognized as the same characters due to their common characteristics.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #4 of the medium support, the numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (red), 2 (red), 3 (red), 4 (red), 5 (red), 6 (red), and 7 (red).
As shown in the figure, the characters are all in the same warm color (here, red). The color of the characters is also the same color (red) as the numbers. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the game is in time-saving mode #4 with medium support, which is different from the normal mode without normal power support. Also, to make it easy to understand that the game is in time-saving mode #4, the LEDs of the board decoration devices 46, such as the upper performance unit 40c and the side performance unit 40d,
The LEDs of the frame decoration devices 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b may also emit light in the same color (red) as the numbers. In addition, since the time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode are both in a left-handed state and the special chart 1 variable display game is the main variable display game, it is important to make the time-saving mode #4 visually distinguishable from the normal mode.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #4, four reserved displays 682a (first reserved displays) are displayed in the first reserved display section 630a (waiting area) that displays the first start memory (special chart 1 start memory) before the variable display game is executed as the first reserved display. However, unlike the normal mode of FIG. 108 (A), the reserved display 682a has a star-shaped display form. This also makes it easy to distinguish the time-saving mode #4 from the normal mode. In addition, in the reserved consumption area 640, the variable reserved display 682b indicating the variable reserved related to the currently executed special chart 1 variable display game is displayed in a star-shaped display form.

In addition, when the normal variable winning device 37 is won by the middle support, the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory) before the variable display game is executed may be displayed as the second hold display (second start memory display) in the second hold display section 630b. Also, the distinction between the second hold display section 630b and the first hold display section 630a may be eliminated, and the second hold display may be displayed together with the first hold display in a common hold display section (
The display may be in a standby area.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #4 of the medium support, unlike the normal mode without normal power support,
The upper performance unit 40c, as a movable part (movable member), operates in front of the display screen of the display device 41 on the player side, vibrating by slowly repeating up and down movements along the display screen. This increases the player's expectations for the time-saving mode #4, which is a middle support and can be switched to the time-saving mode #2 with 30 time-saving times, and improves the interest of the game. In addition, by providing a performance (operation performance of the upper performance unit 40c) that can appear in the time-saving mode #4 but does not appear in the normal mode, it is possible to easily distinguish the time-saving mode #4 from the normal mode. In addition, the upper performance unit 40c may operate from the start of the change of the decorative special pattern in the special pattern change display game, and stop operating when the change ends or when a default performance occurs.

In addition, in the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support, a performance that can appear in normal mode (announcement performance)
Some of the effects do not appear. Effects that can appear in normal mode but do not appear in time-saving mode #4 include a change to a specific type of reserved display in the reserved change notice, a pre-reading effect by the movement of a movable role, a specific type of dialogue notice, and a specific type of step-up effect.

The above describes the difference in performance between the medium support time-saving mode #4 and the normal mode, but it is also possible to provide a difference in performance between the medium support time-saving mode #4 and the high support time-saving modes #2 and #3, so that the time-saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the time-saving modes #2 and #3. For example, the display mode of the mode display 679, the background image, the configuration mode and variable mode of the decorative special pattern, the color of the numbers and characters of the decorative special pattern, the performance that can appear, etc. may be different between the time-saving mode #4 and the time-saving modes #2 and #3.

[External information editing processing]
109A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the external information editing process according to the sixth embodiment. The external information editing process is executed in the timer interrupt process (A1319).
109A, the same steps as those in FIG. 44B of the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

If the time-saving signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (A9526).
Then, it is determined whether or not the game is in the time-saving mode #3 (b time-saving mode, specific game state B) (A9
527a). The initial value of the time-saving signal control timer is the value set in the time-saving signal control timer area in step A5702 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 27) described above (
For example, a fixed time of 128 msec.) If the game control device 100 is not in the time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9527a is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A9527c.

When the game control device 100 is in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9527a is "Y")
Then, it is determined whether the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (A9527b). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9527 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9527b is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9528), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, when the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) starts due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as an amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. After that, the output of the on data of the jackpot 3 signal continues only for the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time reduction signal control timer area.

When the game control device 100 is not in time-saving mode #3 (the result of A9527a is “N”)
, Determine whether or not it is other than time-saving mode #4 (c time-saving, specific gaming state C) (A952
7c). In the case of a gaming state other than the time-saving mode #4 (specific gaming state C) (A9527c
If the result of A9527c is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated. If the mode is time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C) (the result of A9527c is "N"), the on data of the jackpot 4 signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9529), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, at the start of the sudden time-saving (c time-saving) due to the time-saving pattern (support hit), the on data of the jackpot 4 signal is output to an external device such as an amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. After that, the output of the on data of the jackpot 4 signal continues during the time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C).

In addition, the game control device 100 may also determine whether or not the time-saving signal control timer is 0 in step A9527c. That is, in step A9527c, it may determine whether or not the mode is other than the time-saving mode #4 or the time-saving signal control timer is 0. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C) is in progress from the start of the time-saving mode #4 (specific game state C) until the timer initial value (for example, 128 m
The ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is output only for a fixed period of time (a fixed time of 100 sec).

[Output of jackpot signal (external information)]
109B is a time chart showing the on/off state of the jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information. (I) shows the state before and after entering the b time-saving mode (i.e., before and after the ceiling number of times is reached). (II) shows the state before and after entering the c time-saving mode (i.e., before and after the time-saving pattern is derived).

The jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal, the jackpot 3 signal, and the jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the machine type. In this embodiment, the jackpot 1 signal is turned on at the start of a jackpot or a small win, and turned off at the end of the jackpot or a small win. The jackpot 2 signal is turned on at the start of a jackpot or a small win, and turned off at the end of the jackpot or a small win. Furthermore, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on at the start of the high support time reduction (excluding the medium support time reduction) and turned off at the end of the remaining reserve consumption mode (when the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve is stopped).

The big win 3 signal is turned on at the start of a big win or a small win, and turned off at the end of a big win or a small win. Furthermore, the big win 3 signal is turned on at the start of the b time reduction (ceiling time reduction) and is turned on for a short fixed time (
For example, after 128 msec has elapsed, the signal turns off. The big win 4 signal turns on at the start of the mid-support time reduction (excluding the high-support time reduction) and turns off at the end of the mid-support time reduction.

In FIG. 109B(I), when the ceiling number of times is reached and the game enters the b time reduction mode, the game state is as follows:
The normal game state changes to the specific game state B. When the high support b time reduction is entered, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal (the on state of the jackpot 2 signal) is output as a signal regarding the start of the time reduction.
The output of the on data of the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long period of time until the remaining reserve consumption mode ends, that is, until the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops.

Also, when the b time reduction starts, the on data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to the external device for a short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) by the process of FIG. 109A. This allows the external device to recognize the occurrence of the b time reduction or the ceiling number of times reached, distinguishing it from the occurrence of the time reduction (a time reduction) or the c time reduction caused by the jackpot. Also, the external device can distinguish between the case where the jackpot 3 signal is generated by a jackpot or a small jackpot (when it continues for a long time) and the case where the jackpot 3 signal is generated by the b time reduction (when it continues for a short time).

In addition, in Figure 109B (I), since no big hit, small hit, or c time reduction occurs, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 4 signal remain off.

In FIG. 109B (II), when the time-saving pattern causes the game to enter the c time-saving mode (sudden time-saving mode), the on data of the jackpot 4 signal is output to the external device by the processing of FIG. 109A. As a result, the external device distinguishes the occurrence of the c time-saving mode (c time-saving mode) from the occurrence of the a time-saving mode (a time-saving mode) or the b time-saving mode due to the jackpot.
The output of the on data of the jackpot 4 signal continues for a long time until the end of the c time-saving (specific gaming state C).

In addition, in Fig. 109B (II), since the big hit, small hit, and b time reduction do not occur, the big hit 1 signal, the big hit 2 signal, and the big hit 3 signal remain off. In addition, even if the medium support c time reduction is entered, the on data of the big hit 2 signal (the on state big hit 2 signal) generated in the high support time reduction is not output.

[Test signal output]
FIG. 110A shows the test signals output to the test firing device, which are the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal (1 bit), the normal electric role 1 open extension state signal (1 bit), the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal (1 bit), the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 (4 bits), and the winning easy state confirmation signal (
110B illustrates an example of winning-prone state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to the medium support and the high support.

The normal electric normal pattern state signal, which indicates the state of the normal electric device 1 and the state of the normal pattern change, such as the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal, the normal pattern 1 change time shortening state signal, and the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, can change to on at the same time as or with a delay from the winning easy state signals 1 to 4, and the normal electric normal pattern state signal and the winning easy state signals 1 to 4
The time difference between the on-timing of the easy-win state confirmation signal and the on-timing of the easy-win state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more. The easy-win state confirmation signal may change to on at the same time as or after the easy-win state signals 1 to 4, and the time difference between the on-timing of the easy-win state confirmation signal and the easy-win state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more.

Figure 110A particularly illustrates an example where the game state transitions in the following order: normal game state → specific game state C (medium support, c time reduction) → specific game state B (high support, b time reduction) → jackpot state or transition state.

When a time-saving pattern is derived in the support of the special chart 1 variable display game in the normal game state, a specific game state C occurs, and the type of normal power support becomes medium support (easy winning state 2). At this time, first, the 4-bit easy winning state signal 1 to 4 indicating the type of normal power support changes from an indefinite state to 01H corresponding to medium support, and is output to the test firing device. Next, the easy winning state confirmation signal indicating that the normal power support state (easy winning state) has been confirmed is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and is output to the test firing device.
Next, the normal electric role 1 release extension state signal, which indicates that the normal power open time will be longer, and the normal pattern 1 change time shortening state signal, which indicates that the normal pattern change time will be shortened compared to the normal game state, are turned on as normal electric normal pattern state signals, which indicate the state of the normal power and the state of the normal pattern change, and are output to the test firing test device. In Figure 110A, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 → winning easy state confirmation signal → normal electric normal pattern state signal change in this order.

After that, when the number of times of the special pattern variation display game executed under a predetermined condition (special pattern low probability state) after the end of the jackpot state in the specific game state C reaches the ceiling number of times, the specific game state B occurs, and the normal power support becomes high support (winning ease state 1). At this time, the 4-bit winning ease state signal 1 to 4 indicating the type of normal power support changes from 01H corresponding to medium support to 00H corresponding to high support and is output to the test firing test device. Next, the winning ease state confirmation signal indicating that the normal power support state (winning ease state) has been confirmed changes to ON for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and is output to the test firing test device. Then, the normal electric role 1 opening extension state signal and the normal pattern 1 variation time shortening state signal are continuously maintained ON from the specific game state C and are output to the test firing test device.

Thereafter, when the specific game state B is changed to a big win state or a transition state, the winning likelihood state signals 1 to 4 become indefinite, and the normal electric role device 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal are turned off.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal game does not change and is always a constant value of 250 as shown in FIG.
Since the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than normal, is not turned on because the normal symbol hit probability is /251. However, if the normal symbol hit probability is high only when the high support is selected, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal turns on as shown by the dotted line and is output to the test firing test device. If the normal symbol hit probability is high in both the medium support and the high support, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal turns on for the same period as the normal electric role 1 opening extension state signal and the normal symbol 1 change time reduction state signal are turned on.
The high probability state signal is turned on and output to the test firing device.

111 and 112 are a table and a time chart showing the output of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 as test signals output to the test firing test device. Both launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are signals indicating a right shot in which the game ball should be shot into the game area 32 on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 111 (A), in the center support (specific game state C), when normal power is released in pattern H1 due to a normal hit, launch position designation signal 1 is turned on and output, but launch position designation signal 2 is turned off. On the other hand, in the center support, when normal power is released in pattern H2 due to a normal hit, both launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are turned on and output. In this way, since the output states of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are different for normal power release in pattern H1 and normal power release in pattern H2, the test firing test device can distinguish between these two types of normal power release. Note that in order to distinguish between normal power releases, when normal power is released in pattern H1, only one of launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 is turned on,
When the normal power supply is released in the pattern H2, it is also possible to configure only the other side to be turned on.
During a period when a normal winning does not occur even during the middle support or during a period when a normal game is being played, both the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned off.

As shown in Figure 111 (B), during electric support other than medium support (high support, specific game state A and specific game state B), during a small hit, or during a big hit, the right-hand hitting state is selected, so that both launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 are turned on and output.

For example, as shown in FIG. 112, when a small hit occurs during the normal power release of pattern H1, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned on at the start of the normal power release of pattern H1, the launch position designation signal 2 is turned on at the start of the small hit, and the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned off at the end of the small hit. When the normal power release of pattern H1 occurs during a small hit, the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small hit, and the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned off at the end of the small hit. When the normal power release of pattern H1 occurs just before the end of the small hit, the launch position designation signal 1 and the launch position designation signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small hit, the launch position designation signal 2 is turned off at the end of the small hit, and the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off at the end of the normal power release of pattern H1.

If a small hit occurs during normal power release of pattern H2, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of normal power release of pattern H2, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small hit. If normal power release of pattern H2 occurs during a small hit, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small hit, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of the small hit. If normal power release of pattern H2 occurs just before the end of a small hit, launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn on at the start of the small hit, and launch position designation signal 1 and launch position designation signal 2 turn off at the end of normal power release of pattern H2.

[Operation of the big prize opening, lever solenoid, etc.]
FIG. 113 is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 in the case of a small winning result of the special chart 1 variable display game. (A) shows a state where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a state where there is a remaining ball error. The operation related to the opening and blocking (closing) of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is controlled by the small winning opening process (A2612). The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, i.e., the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86, is controlled by the lever solenoid control process (A2618).

In FIG. 113(A), in the case of a small win result of the special chart 1 variable display game, unlike the case of a small win result of the special chart 2 variable display game, the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened once for a short time. This short time is, for example, the small win opening time (for example, 1000 msec
) or the time it takes for the required number of prizes to be awarded at the Kamidai prize entry gate, whichever is shorter.

During this short time, when the small prize of the upper large prize opening is opened, the lever solenoid 86b is opened for an even shorter time (
For example, the specific area 86 is opened by turning the power ON for only 100 msec.
Since the opening of 6 (V winning hole) is very short, the game ball almost never enters the specific area 86. Therefore, during the opening of the small win as a result of the special chart 1 variable display game, the big win due to the V winning almost never occurs.

A V win as a ball entering the specific area 86 is detected by the specific area switch 72 of the specific area 86. The specific area switch 72 is enabled when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on, and disabled when the processing of the remaining balls is completed. Also, while the specific area switch 72 is enabled,
As a test signal, the special electric device operation signal is turned on and output to the test firing device.

The upper large winning hole switch 39a (count switch) turns on in a pulsed manner when it detects a game ball that has entered the upper large winning hole. Immediately after that, the remaining ball discharge switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error.
When the game ball is detected by the game control device 300, irregular winning information indicating that the big win is due to an unexpected abnormal V winning is transmitted to the performance control device 300 together with an ending command at the end of the processing of the remaining balls. Then, the performance control device 300 executes processing corresponding to the irregular winning information, such as announcing that the V winning is abnormal.

The processing of the remaining balls starts from the end of the small win opening (when the upper large winning hole is closed) and ends when the remaining ball counter becomes 0 or when the remaining ball processing time has elapsed, whichever is later. The remaining ball counter is incremented by +1 after the game ball passes the upper large winning hole switch 39a, and incremented by -1 when the game ball (remaining ball) is detected by the remaining ball discharge hole switch 73 or the specific area switch 72.
In FIG. 113(A), before the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball and the remaining ball counter is already set to 0. Therefore, the small win remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, and at this point the specific area switch 7
2 will be invalid.

In this embodiment, the small win ending occurs after the remaining balls are processed, but the small win end processing is provided as the processing of game processing number "6" in the special game processing (FIG. 7), and the small win ending continues during the small win ending time (e.g., 2000 msec) set in the small win remaining ball processing (A2613). In the small win end processing, the game processing number "0" related to the special game normal processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area. When a big win occurs due to a V winning, a fanfare performance (B2102) corresponding to the fanfare command (A5806) is executed during the fanfare time.

In FIG. 113(B), similarly to FIG. 113(A), the upper large winning hole is opened for only a short time, and during this short time of opening of the small winning hole of the upper large winning hole, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on for a short time (for example, 10
The specific area switch 72 is turned on for only 1000 msec (e.g., 1000 msec) to open the specific area 86. The specific area switch 72 is enabled when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on. However, if there is a remaining ball error, the small hit remaining ball processing does not end even if the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed. For this reason, after a short on/off period in accordance with the on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (i.e., the opening pattern of the specific area 86), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long period of time, followed by an interval (e.g., 2900 msec), before turning off in response to the release of the remaining ball error (end of remaining ball processing). Here, the interval time is the sum of the small hit opening time (e.g., 1000 msec) and the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec), but
However, the on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b is set in common for the small win by the special chart 1 variable display game and the small win by the special chart 2 variable display game (FIG. 114).

Thereafter, until the remaining ball error is released, the small hit remaining ball processing continues, the lever solenoid 86b is maintained on, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an active state.
Then, while the specific area switch 72 is active, the special electric device operation signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device. When the remaining ball error is released and the small win remaining ball processing is completed, the small win ending will be the same as in Figure 113 (A).

In addition, after the game ball that entered the upper large winning hole is detected and the upper large winning hole switch 39a (count switch) is turned on and off in a pulse shape, the remaining ball error monitoring time (for example, 3000 msec)
When the remaining ball counter reaches 0, the remaining ball error flag is set to ON, and the remaining ball error is cleared. For example, the timer measurement for the remaining ball error monitoring time and the remaining ball error flag are set to ON and OFF by the winning port switch/status monitoring process (A1310
) is executed by providing a remaining ball monitoring process.

Fig. 114 is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 and the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 in the case of a small winning result of the special chart 2 variable display game. (A) shows a state where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a state where there is a remaining ball error.

In FIG. 114(A), in the case of a small win result of the special chart 2 variable display game, unlike the case of a small win result of the special chart 1 variable display game (FIG. 113), the upper large winning port of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened once for a short time (for example, 48 msec), and then the interval (for example, 2
The opening is repeated several times over a long period of time, with a gap of 4.860 msec between each opening.
This long period consisted of 19 releases of 8 msec and 18 blockages of 424 msec, totaling 8
544 msec or the time until the specified number of winnings are won into the upper large winning hole. In order to set such an opening pattern of the upper large winning hole, for example, in the small winning opening process, the opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39 may be controlled by a control pointer in the same manner as the normal power opening pattern.

Also, in FIG. 114(A), according to the above-mentioned on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b, the lever solenoid 86b turns on and off for a short time (e.g., 100 msec), then there is an interval (e.g., 2900 msec), and the lever solenoid 86b turns on again for a long time before turning off. The long time here is the shorter of 21000 msec and the time until the processing of the remaining balls is completed. In addition, in the case of a small win by the special chart 2 variable display game, the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (i.e., the opening pattern of the specific area 86) and the opening pattern of the upper large winning hole are similar until the upper large winning hole starts to open multiple times, and are linked approximately synchronously (the lever solenoid 86b and the upper large winning hole solenoid 39b are also linked approximately synchronously).

The upper large winning hole switch 39a (count switch) turns on in a pulsed manner when it detects a game ball that has entered the upper large winning hole. Immediately thereafter, or before the remaining balls are processed, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. Note that when the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, it is a normal V-winning jackpot, so irregular winning information is not sent to the performance control device 300. At the end of the remaining ball processing, only the ending command is sent to the performance control device 300.

The processing of the remaining balls starts when the small win opening ends (when the upper large winning port closes) and ends when the remaining ball processing time has elapsed or when the remaining ball counter becomes 0 (when the error is cleared), whichever is later. In Fig. 114 (A), the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball and the remaining ball counter has already become 0 before the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, so the small win remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 1900 msec) has elapsed, and the specific area switch 72 becomes ineffective at this point.

In this embodiment, the small hit ending occurs after the remaining ball processing, but the small hit ending continues for the small hit ending time (e.g., 4200 msec) set in the small hit remaining ball processing (A2613). Note that the small hit ending time in the case of a small hit by the special chart 2 variable display game is longer than that in the case of a small hit by the special chart 1 variable display game.

In FIG. 114(B), the upper large winning hole is opened in the same opening pattern as FIG. 114(A). The opening pattern of the upper large winning hole does not depend on the presence or absence of a remaining ball error.
In this case, the lever solenoid 86b operates in the same on-off pattern as in FIG. 114(A) until the small win is released, but because there is a remaining ball error, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) is
Even after the time period c) has elapsed, the lever solenoid 86b remains on for a long period of 21,000 msec.

After that, until the remaining ball error is released, the small win remaining ball processing continues and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an active state. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is active, the special electric device operation signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device. When the remaining ball error is released and the small win remaining ball processing is completed, the small win ending will be the same as in Figure 114 (A). The occurrence and release of the remaining ball error is as described in Figure 113 (B).

[Actions and Effects of the Sixth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment includes a gaming control means (e.g., a gaming control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information. The gaming control means can generate a first specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state B or specific gaming state A) that is advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state (e.g., specific gaming state C) that has a different generation condition from the first specific gaming state. The gaming control means can execute a first variable display game (e.g., a special chart 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and can execute a second variable display game (e.g., a special chart 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of a second start condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (e.g., special chart 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is made different from a second variation pattern group (e.g., special chart 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the second variation display game.

For example, the main variable display game may be different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state, such as the main variable display game becoming the second variable display game in the first specific game state and the first variable display game in the second specific game state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variable pattern group and the second variable pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the type of variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game can be clearly switched according to the type of specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that matches the type of specific game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
The variation pattern group (for example, special chart 1 variation pattern table) is made the same as that in the normal game state. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game is common to the normal game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, which reduces the sense of incongruity in the presentation and improves the interest of the game. Furthermore, the game control is also simplified. In addition, it does not violate the game rules, etc.

In the sixth embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
The variation pattern group (for example, special chart 2 variation pattern table) is made the same. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the second variation display game is common to the first specific game state and the second specific game state, which creates a sense of incongruity in the presentation, and can improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the game control is also simplified. In addition, it does not violate the game rules, etc.

The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., the gaming control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and is capable of generating a special gaming state (e.g., a big win state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a variable winning device (e.g., the normal variable winning device 37) that can convert the gaming ball between an easy-to-win state (e.g., an open state) in which it is easy to win and a difficult-to-win state (e.g., a closed state) in which it is difficult to win, and that is easier to convert to the easy-to-win state in a specific gaming state than in a normal gaming state. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (e.g. specific game state B, b time reduction) without the occurrence of a special game state when the number of times the variable display game is executed under a predetermined condition (e.g. special chart low probability) becomes a predetermined number (e.g. ceiling number of times), and can generate a second specific game state (e.g. specific game state C, c time reduction) without the occurrence of a special game state when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (e.g. time reduction pattern) different from the special result. The game control means can execute a first variable display game (e.g. special chart 1 variable display game) as the variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition, and can execute a second variable display game (e.g. special chart 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of a second start condition. A first control unit for selecting a variable pattern of the first variable display game in the first specific game state and the second specific game state.
The variation pattern group (e.g., special chart 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) is made different from the second variation pattern group (e.g., special chart 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the second variation display game. The variation winning device (e.g., normal variation winning device 37) is easier to convert to a winning-easier state in the second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, c time reduction) than in the normal game state, but is more difficult to convert to a winning-easier state than in the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, b time reduction).

The main variation display game (for example, the special chart 1 variation display game in the second specific game state, the special chart 2 variation display game in the first specific game state) and the type of normal power support (for example, high support in the first specific game state, medium support in the second specific game state) may differ between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the type of variation pattern selected in the special chart variation display game can be clearly switched according to the type of specific game state and, in turn, the type of normal power support. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that matches the type of specific game state and, in turn, the type of normal power support, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the sixth embodiment, the game control means can generate a third specific game state (e.g., specific game state A, time reduction a) that is advantageous to the player following the special game state (e.g., a jackpot state) with the occurrence of the special game state. The variable winning device (e.g., the normal variable winning device 37) can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C, time reduction c) in the first specific game state (e.g., specific game state B, time reduction b) and the third specific game state (e.g., specific game state A, time reduction a).
This makes it easier to convert the state into one in which it is easier to win.

Therefore, the normal power support in the second specific game state is set to medium support, and the first specific game state and the third specific game state are set to medium support.
The second specific game state can be made a special game state with a different characteristic from the other multiple specific game states (the first specific game state and the third specific game state) in the profits that the player can obtain and the way of hitting, which is the launching mode of the game ball, can be made to be different, which can add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is provided with a variable winning device (e.g., normal variable winning device 37) that can convert the game ball into an easy-to-win state where it is easy to win and into a non-easy-to-win state where it is difficult to win, and that can be converted into an easy-to-win state more easily in a specific game state (e.g., time-saving state, probability-changing state, normal power support state) than in a normal game state. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A or specific game state B) after the end of a special game state (e.g., a big win state), and can generate a second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C) without the occurrence of a special game state when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) different from the special result. The game control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device into an easy-to-win state in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state. The game control means can execute a first variable display game as a variable display game based on the establishment of a first starting condition, and can execute a second variable display game based on the establishment of a second starting condition. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variable pattern group (e.g., special chart 1 variable pattern table, variable pattern table A) for selecting a variable pattern of the first variable display game and a second variable pattern group (
For example, make it different from Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Table and Variation Pattern Table C).

For example, the main variable display game may be different between the first and second specific game states, such as the main variable display game being the second variable display game in the first specific game state and the first variable display game in the second specific game state. However, the first and second variable pattern groups are different from each other in both the first and second specific game states, and the type of the variable pattern selected in the special chart variable display game is determined by the type of the specific game state, and thus,
It is possible to switch according to the frequency with which the variable winning device becomes in a winning-prone state (for example, the type of normal power support). Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance according to the type of specific game state, and in turn, the frequency (degree) with which the variable winning device becomes in a winning-prone state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the game control means
In the specific game state (e.g., specific game state A or specific game state B), the variable winning device (e.g., normal variable winning device 37) is made easier to convert into a state in which winning is easier than in the second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C), and as the variable display game, a first variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of a first start condition, and a second variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of a second start condition, and in the second specific game state, the first variable pattern group for selecting the variable pattern of the first variable display game is made the same as that in the normal game state.

A second specific game state (e.g., specific game state C), which is more difficult to convert to an easy-to-win state than a first specific game state (e.g., specific game state A or specific game state B), may have a frequency (degree) of conversion of the variable winning device to an easy-to-win state closer to the normal game state than the second specific game state. Therefore, if the first variable pattern group is made the same as the normal game state in the second specific game state, the type of variable pattern selected in the first variable display game in the second specific game state will be common to the normal game state, reducing the sense of incongruity in the presentation, while the two specific game states with different frequencies of conversion to the easy-to-win state can increase the interest of the game. In addition, game control is simplified. In particular, in the second specific game state and the normal game state, the hitting style (
When the type of play (right or left hit) is the same and the main variation display game is common to the first variation display game, the advantage of making the first variation pattern group the same between the second specific game state and the normal game state and commonizing the types of variation patterns of the first variation display game becomes greater (if they are not common, the sense of incongruity will become greater).

[Seventh embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 115 to Fig. 121. Note that configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to sixth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted in the description. The seventh embodiment relates to wiring between circuit boards, etc.

[Circuit diagram of normal FFC connection]
Figure 115 is a circuit diagram showing wiring properly connected from the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) of the performance control device 300 to the LED board 862 (second circuit board).

The decoration control board 750 is configured as a part of the performance control device 300, and is connected to the FFC relay board 8
61, connected to the LED board 862. The LED board 862 controls the light emission of the lighting members (such as the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) provided in the gaming machine 10. The lighting members and the LED board 862 may be provided on various movable members (the movable role pieces of the board performance device 44, the protruding performance unit 13 of the frame decoration device 18), and the distance between the LED board 862 and the decoration control board 750 can be changed by the movement (operation) of the movable members. The decoration control board 750 may also be a board connected to the performance control device 300.

The decorative control board 750 has one terminal such as a serial data signal (game board SDA) terminal, a clock signal (game board SCL) terminal, a DC 12V terminal, a DC 5V terminal, and a ground (GND) terminal.
It is equipped with one connector CN11 having various terminals (11 terminals).

The game board SDA terminal is connected to the performance control device 300 via I2C communication method (or I ² C communication method).
The game board SCL terminal is a terminal that transmits (transmits) a serial data signal (game board SDA) according to the I2C communication method to the LED board 862. Similarly, the game board SCL terminal is a terminal that transmits (transmits) a clock signal (game board SC
L) to the LED board 862.
The decoration control board 750 has one DA terminal (terminal 6) and one game board SCL terminal (terminal 8). The decoration control board 750 may be provided with a terminal capable of receiving a signal from the LED board 862.

The DC 12V terminal and the DC 5V terminal are connected to the power supply unit 400.
The ground (GND) terminal is a terminal (ground terminal, earth terminal) that supplies a ground voltage (GND, 0 V) to the LED board 862. The connector CN11 has three DC 12 V terminals (terminals 1 to 3), one DC 5 V terminal (terminal 4), and five GND terminals (terminals 5,
7, 9-11).

The connector CN11 of the decorative control board 750 is connected via a harness 871 to a connector CN21 (11 terminals) of an FFC relay board 861 fixed by screws or the like inside the gaming machine 10. In this embodiment, the harness is an assembly component that bundles together a plurality of wires (electric wires such as signal wires, ground wires, and power wires), and is also called a wire harness or cable.

As shown in FIG. 115, the harness 871 is made up of a plurality (11 lines) of wires 871-1 to 871-11 corresponding to terminals 1 to 11 of the connector CN11.

Wires 871-1 to 871-3 of the harness 871 are wires (DC 12V wires) that are connected to terminals 1 to 3 of the connector CN11 and supply DC 12V. Similarly, wire 871-4 is wire (DC 5V wire) that is connected to terminal 4 of the connector CN11 and supply DC 5V. Wires 871-5, 871-7, 871-9 to 871-11 are wires (GND wires) that are connected to terminals 5, 7, 9 to 11 of the connector CN11 and supply ground voltage.
The wiring 871-6 of the harness 871 is connected to the terminal 6 of the connector CN11 and transmits (transmits) the game board SDA, and the wiring 871-8 of the harness 871 is connected to the terminal 8 and transmits (transmits) the game board SC
This is the wiring that transmits (transmits) L.

Of the three wires 871-1 to 871-3 that supply DC 12V, the outermost wire 871
The line 8-1 functions as a wiring (test line TD) for a connection test (connection determination) and supplies DC 12V (DC 12V (TEST)) during a non-test and normal connection.
71-1 is a decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) and an LED board 862 (second circuit board)
The test line TD is provided in parallel with the normal DC 12V wiring, and serves as a connection test wiring (connection determination wiring) that can determine whether the normal DC 12V wiring is properly (normally) connected between the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) and the LED board 862 (second circuit board).

Similarly, four wirings 871-5, 871-7, 871-9 to 871-
The outermost wiring 871-11 of the wirings 871-11 functions as a wiring for a connection test (test line TG), i.e., a wiring for a connection test (a wiring for connection determination), and supplies a ground voltage (GND (TEST)) when not being tested and when the connection is normal.

In this way, DC 12V and ground voltage are supplied by multiple (3 or 4) wires, not a single wire, between the decorative control board 750 and the FFC relay board 861. As a result, even if one or two wires of the harness 871 are bent too much or interfere with other components and break, the LED board 862 can continue to be controlled using the other unbroken wires.

Furthermore, by using the outermost wirings 871-1 and 871-11 of the harness 871, which are most susceptible to external forces and are therefore the most likely to be the starting point of a break, as wirings for connection tests, it becomes easier to detect whether the connection is normal or not.

In the FFC relay board 861, the terminals of the connector CN21 can be connected to a connector CN22 (12 terminals) by branching the wiring from some of the terminals into multiple branches, such as two or three branches.

Also, the wiring (test line TD) from the terminal 1 of the connector CN21 is connected to the terminal 12 of the connector CN22. On the other hand, the wiring (test line TG) from the terminal 11 of the connector CN21 is connected to the terminal 12 of the connector CN22.
is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN22. Therefore, by exchanging positions with each other within FFC relay board 861, the two wires (test lines TD, TG) connected to terminals 1 and 11 of connector CN21 become wires (test lines TG, TD) connected to terminals 1 and 12 of connector CN22.

The connector CN22 of the FFC relay board 861 is connected to a connector CN31 (12 terminals) of an LED board 862 that is movable and rearrangeable within the gaming machine 10, via a harness 872. The harness 872 is a flexible flat cable (FFC) that is flexible and can be deformed to bend in accordance with the movement and rearrangement of the LED board 862.

The harness 872 is composed of a plurality of (12) wires 872-1 to 872-12 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 12 of the connector CN22 and the connector CN31.
-4, 872-12 (DC 12V wiring) supply DC 12V, and wiring 872-1,
Five lines 872-6, 872-8, 872-10, and 872-11 (GND lines) supply ground voltage. In addition, line 872-5 (DC 5V line) supplies DC 5V.
7 transmits (transmits) the game board SDA, and wiring 872-9 transmits (transmits) the game board SCL.

Similarly to the harness 871, the harness 872 has outermost wiring 872-1,
The wiring 872-1 functions as a wiring for a connection test. The wiring 872-1 serves as a test line TG for a connection test, and supplies a ground voltage (GND(TEST)) when not being tested and when the connection is normal. The wiring 872-12 serves as a test line TD for a connection test, and supplies DC 12V (DC12V(TEST)) when not being tested and when the connection is normal.

The LED board 862 has a connector CN31 (12 terminals) corresponding to the wires 872-1 to 872-12 of the harness 872.

The harness 872 is bent and connected to the LED board 862, so that the arrangement of the wiring on the connector CN31 side of the LED board 862 is inverted upside down as shown in FIG.
G (wiring 872-1) is connected to terminal 12 of connector CN31 of the LED board 862. In addition, test line TD (wiring 872-12) connected to terminal 12 of connector CN22 is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN31.

In the harness 872 between the FFC relay board 861 and the LED board 862, DC 12V and ground voltage are supplied by multiple (4 or 5) wires, not a single wire.
Even if one to three wires of the harness 872, which is a flexible flat cable that is vulnerable to external forces, are bent too much or interfere with other components and break, the LED board 862 can continue to be controlled using the other unbroken wires.
Even if several of the 2V wires (4 wires) or GND wires (5 wires) are broken, as long as at least one wire each supplying DC 12V and ground voltage remains, control of the LED board 862 can be continued.

Furthermore, the positional relationship of the wiring for connection testing (test lines TD, TG) is switched within the FFC relay board 861. As a result, even if, for example, the four wirings (872-1 to 872-4) from the outside of the harness 872 to the fourth DC 12V wiring (872-4) are disconnected, DC 12V can be supplied to the LED board 862 using the test line TD (872-12) located on the opposite outermost side. In this way, in the harness 872,
By arranging the test line TD (872-12) on the opposite side to the normal DC 12V wiring (872-2 to 872-4) as a spare (backup) wiring, even if a break occurs on one side, control of the LED board 862 can be continued using the wiring arranged on the other side.

Furthermore, by using the outermost wiring 872-1, 872-12 of the harness 872, which is most susceptible to external forces and is therefore most likely to be the starting point of a break, as wiring for connection testing and reinforcement, it becomes easier to detect whether the harness 872 is properly connected to the LED board 862 and the FFC relay board 861 without being broken.

Furthermore, in the FFC relay board 861, the terminal 1 of the connector CN21 and the terminal 2 of the connector CN22
The test line TD that connects the terminal 12 to the terminal 12 is not connected to other wiring such as a normal DC 12V wiring, but is formed as an electrically independent circuit (series circuit, series wiring).
Similarly, the test line TG that connects terminal 11 of connector CN21 and terminal 1 of connector CN22 is formed as an electrically independent circuit (series circuit, series wiring) without being connected to other wiring such as normal GND wiring.

In this way, the test lines TD and TG are formed independently, while the test line T
The normal DC 12V wiring other than D is formed so as to be connected to other DC 12V wiring within the FFC relay board 861, and the normal GND wiring other than the test line TG of the ground voltage is formed so as to be connected to other GND
That is, in the case of normal DC 12V wiring and GND wiring, the wiring from terminals 2 and 3 and terminals 5, 7, 9, and 10 of connector CN21 are respectively joined (connected), and then branched into a plurality of wirings, such as three-way or four-way, to terminals 2, 3, and 4-way of connector CN22.
4 and terminals 6, 8, 10, and 11.

In this way, by coupling the normal DC 12V wiring (e.g., three wirings) and GND wiring (e.g., four wirings), it is possible to reduce the number of wirings in the FFC relay board 861 and to achieve a simple structure. Since the FFC relay board 861 is fixed in the gaming machine 10 and does not move, and the possibility of the internal wiring being broken is low, there is no need to supply power using multiple wirings like the above-mentioned harness 872 (FFC), and it can be consolidated into one.

Furthermore, within the LED board 862, the normal DC 12V wiring is connected to the test line TD, and the normal GND wiring is connected to the test line TG.

Then, by performing a connection test (continuity test) using the test lines TD and TG, it is possible to check whether the harnesses 871 and 872 are correctly connected (normally connected, conductive).

The connection test is performed on the harness 871, the FFC relay board 861, the harness 872, and the LE
The connection test is performed with all of the D boards 862 connected. The connection test can be performed, for example, by unplugging the connector of the harness 871 from the connector CN11 and measuring the resistance between the two wires on the side of the harness 871 that corresponds to the terminal of the connector CN11 of the decoration control board 750 with a tester (circuit meter).

For example, whether the DC 12V wiring is normally connected or not can be determined by checking the test line TD (wire 871-1) of the harness 871 and any of the normal DC 12V wirings (871-2, 87
This can be confirmed by measuring the resistance between the

In addition, whether the GND wiring is normally connected or not can be determined by checking the test line TG (wire 871-11) of the harness 871 and any of the normal GND wirings (871-5, 871-7,
This can be confirmed by measuring the resistance between the terminals (871-9, 871-10).

The resistance value when these wirings are connected normally is extremely small (approximate to the combined resistance of wirings and resistors in the circuit) compared to the extremely large resistance value (>xMΩ (∞, insulated state)) when they are not connected normally. Also, in the normal connection state, the DC 12V wirings (871-1 to 871-3) and the GND wiring (871-5) that are not connected
, 871-7, 871-9 to 871-11) will be a very large resistance. Therefore, if the resistance between the DC 12V wiring and the GND wiring, which will never be connected, is extremely small, the connection will not be normal (abnormal connection, short circuit).

In addition, in the connection test, the DC 5V wiring (wire 871-3), the game board SDA wiring (wire 8
71-5), and it is also possible to check whether the game board SCL wiring (wire 871-7) is not connected to other wiring (is independent), i.e., whether there is a very large resistance between it and other wiring; however, if there is a misalignment on both sides as will be described later in FIG. 116A, this check cannot be performed.

[Circuit diagram of FFC connection with both sides misaligned]
116A and 116B, a case will be described in which the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 in a misaligned state.

FIG. 116A is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 with one terminal shifted from the other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 116A, a wire 872-1 (test line TG) of a harness 872 is not connected (floating wire, wire independent from the circuit) to both the connector CN22 and the connector CN31. Then, as a result of a wire 872-2 being connected to a terminal 1 of the connector CN22 and a terminal 12 of the connector CN31, the wire 872-2 is connected to the GND (TEST
) function as wiring to supply

On the other hand, the wiring 872-12 (test line TD) is connected to the terminal 11 (GND
) and terminal 2 (GND) of connector CN31, and functions as a normal GND wiring. Similarly, wires 872-3 to 872-11 are also connected with a shift, one by one, and the power supply voltage (DC 12V, DC 5V, GND) and signal contents (game board SDA, game board SCL) of each wire 872-3 to 872-11 are shifted from the normal connection state.

As described above, in the circuit diagram of FIG. 116A, the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are misaligned, resulting in them being connected to terminals different from the terminals that should be connected, and the connection is not normal (FFC connection is misaligned on both sides).

Here, a case where a connection test is performed with both sides of the FFC connection misaligned as shown in FIG. 116A will be described.

The terminal 12 of the connector CN22 is not connected to the harness 872, and the connection of DC 12V (TEST) is interrupted. For example, the connector of the harness 871 is unplugged from the connector CN11, and the test line TD (wire 871-1) of the harness 871 and
When the resistance value between any of the normal DC 12V wirings (871-2, 871-3) is measured by a connection test, the resistance value is very large. Therefore, the wiring 872-12 for DC 12V (TEST), which should function as the test line TD in the harness 872, is
It is possible to detect that the wiring is not connected properly (the wiring is for ND).

On the other hand, the wire 872-2 of the harness 872 is connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 as described above, and the GND (TEST) connection is not interrupted. Therefore, a connection test cannot confirm a misalignment of the GND (TEST) connection in the harness 872. For example, when the resistance value between the test line TG (wire 871-11) of the harness 871 and any of the normal GND wires (wires 871-5, 871-7, 871-9, 871-10) is measured, the resistance value is small.

Like the wire 872-2 of the harness 872, the wires 872-3 to 872-12 are also connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31, and the normal DC 12V connection, normal GND connection, DC 5V connection, game board SDA connection, and game board SCL connection are not interrupted. The various wires are not connected (independent) to other (other types) of wires, and have a very large resistance value between them. Therefore, even if the resistance value between the various wires and other wires is measured in a connection test, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the connection is normal.

Furthermore, a wiring misalignment in which the wire 872-1 of the harness 872 is not connected to both the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 cannot be confirmed by a connection test.

However, as described above, the connection test requires the DC 12V (TEST) wiring 872
As a result of detecting that wire 871-12 is not connected properly, an opportunity is obtained to reconnect harness 872 properly, so that the connection misalignment of wires 872-1 to 872-11 as well as wire 871-12, i.e., the connection misalignment of the entire harness 872, can be similarly corrected.

FIG. 116B is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are connected to a connector CN22 and a connector CN31, shifted one by one to the opposite side from that in FIG. 116A.

For example, as shown in FIG. 116B, wiring 872-12 (test line TD) of harness 872
is not connected to either the connector CN22 or the connector CN31 (floating wiring, wiring independent from the circuit).
and terminal 1 of the connector CN31, the wiring 872-11 is DC 12V
It functions as a wiring for supplying (TEST).

On the other hand, the wiring 872-1 (test line TG) is connected to the terminal 2 (DC 12V
) and terminal 11 (DC12V) of connector CN31.
Similarly, the wirings 872-2 to 872-10 are also connected with a shift between them, and the power supply voltages (DC 12 V, DC 5 V, G
ND) and signal contents (game board SDA, game board SCL) are in a state that is out of alignment with the normal connection state.
The terminals on both ends of 2 are not in a normal connection state (FFC connection is misaligned on both sides) (Figure 11
(Opposite position from 6A).

Here, a case where a connection test is performed with both sides of the FFC connection misaligned as shown in FIG. 116B will be described.

Terminal 1 of connector CN22 is not connected to harness 872.
For example, if the connector of the harness 871 is unplugged from the connector CN11 and the resistance between the test line TG (wire 871-11) of the harness 871 and any of the normal GND wires (871-5, 871-7, 871-9, 871-10) is measured by a connection test, the resistance is very large.
2, the wiring 872- for GND (TEST) which should function as the test line TG
It is possible to detect that the power supply 1 is not connected properly (the power supply 1 has a wiring for DC 12V).

On the other hand, the wire 872-11 of the harness 872 is connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 as described above, and the connection of the DC 12V (TEST) is not interrupted. Therefore, a connection test cannot confirm a misalignment of the DC 12V (TEST) in the harness 872. For example, when the resistance value between the test line TD (wire 871-1) of the harness 871 and any of the normal DC 12V wires (wires 871-2, 871-3) is measured,
The resistance value becomes small.

Like the wire 872-11 of the harness 872, the wires 872-1 to 872-10 are also connected to the connectors CN22 and CN31, and are connected to the normal DC 12V and the normal GND.
The connections, DC5V connection, game board SDA connection, and game board SCL connection are not interrupted. And,
The various wirings are not connected (independent) to other (other types of) wirings, and have very large resistance between them. Therefore, even if the resistance between the various wirings and other wirings is measured in a connection test, it is not possible to confirm whether the connection is normal or not.

Furthermore, a wiring misalignment in which the wire 872-12 of the harness 872 is not connected to both the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 cannot be confirmed by a connection test.

However, as described above, the wiring 872-1 for GND (TEST) is
As a result of detecting that the wiring 871-1 is not connected properly, an opportunity to reconnect the harness 872 properly is obtained.
That is, any misalignment in the connection of the entire harness 872 can be similarly corrected.

[Regarding misalignment of one side of FFC connection]
In addition, when the harness 872 is normally connected to either the connector CN22 or the connector CN31, but is connected to the other connector with an offset connection, either the wiring 872-1 (test line TG) or the wiring 872-12 (test line TD) of the harness 872 will be unconnected to the other connector.

Therefore, when a connection test is performed, the test line (test line T
Since the resistance between the normal wiring (DC12V wiring or GND wiring) and the test line TD (G or TD) becomes very large, it is easy to detect that the connection is not normal.
Furthermore, the wiring 872-12 is connected and does not become a floating wiring.

[Circuit diagram of a normal connection state of an FFC connection in a comparative example]
Here, with reference to Figs. 120 and 121, a case where a connection test was performed using an FFC connection as a comparative example will be described.

Fig. 120 is a circuit diagram showing, as a comparative example, conventional wiring that is normally connected from the decoration control device 1750 of the performance control device 300 to the LED board 1862. Note that descriptions that overlap with Fig. 115 will be omitted as appropriate.

The decoration control device 1750 is connected to the LED board 1862 via the FFC relay board 1861. The decoration control device 1750 is connected to a connector CN11 having nine terminals (9 terminals).
The connector CN111 is connected to the connector CN121 (9
The terminal is connected to the power supply 1871 via a harness 1871.

The harness 1871 is made up of a plurality of (nine) wires 1871-1 to 1871-9 corresponding to terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN111.

The wires 1871-1 and 1871-2 of the harness 1871 are connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN111.
, 2 and supplies DC 12 V (DC 12 V wiring).
71-3 is a wiring that is connected to terminal 3 of the connector CN111 and supplies DC 5 V (DC 5 V
Wires 1871-4, 1871-6, 1871-8, and 1871-9 are connected to terminals 4, 6, 8, and 9 of the connector CN111 and supply ground voltage (GND wires).
The wiring 1871-5 is connected to the terminal 5 of the connector CN111 and transmits the game board SDA, and the wiring 1871-7 is connected to the terminal 7 and transmits the game board SCL.

Here, the conventional harness 1871 is different from the harness 871 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 115 and the like in that it has a test line TD (DC 12V (TEST)) and a test line TG (GND (TEST
In addition, the FFC relay board 1861 and the harness 1872 described below are not included.
The LED board 1862 also does not have the test line TD or the test line TG.

In the FFC relay board 1861, the wiring from some of the terminals of the connector CN121 is branched into multiple terminals, such as two or three, and connected to a connector CN122 (10 terminals).

The connector CN122 of the FFC relay board 1861 is connected to a connector CN131 (10 terminals) of an LED board 1862 that is movable and rearrangeable within the gaming machine 10 via a flexible flat cable (FFC) harness 1872.

The harness 1872 is composed of a plurality of (10) wires 1872-1 to 1872-10 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 10 of the connector CN122.
The three wires 1872-5, 1872-7, and 1872-8 supply 12V DC.
The four lines 1872-9, 1872-10 (GND lines) supply the ground voltage.
Wiring 1872-4 (DC 5V wiring) supplies DC 5V, wiring 1872-6 transmits the game board SDA, and wiring 1872-8 transmits the game board SCL.

The LED board 1862 is connected to the wiring 1872-1 to 1872-10 of the harness 1872.
It has a connector CN131 (10 terminals) corresponding to the above.

Here, in the conventional circuit, when a connection test was performed, the DC 12V wiring, GND wiring,
C5V wiring (wire 1871-3), game board SDA wiring (wire 1871-5), game board SC
It can be confirmed that the L wiring (wiring 1871-7) is not connected to other (other types of) wiring.

However, in a conventional circuit that does not have the test line TD or the test line TG, it is not possible to check the connection of the DC 12V wiring itself by a connection test as in the circuit of this embodiment, and it is not possible to check the connection of the GND
It is not possible to check the connection of the wiring itself.

For example, the DC 12V wiring from terminals 1 and 2 of connector CN121 is
861, the resistance between the two DC 12V wires of the harness 1871 is always small. As a result, the two DC 12V wires of the harness 1871 (wires 1871-1,
Even if the resistance value between harness 1871 and harness 1872 is measured by a connection test, it is not possible to confirm whether harness 1872 is connected properly.

Similarly, the GND wiring from the terminals 4, 6, 8, and 9 of the connector CN121 is also connected inside the FFC relay board 1861, and the four GND wirings of the harness 1871 (1871-4,
Even if the resistance value between harness 1872 and terminals 1871-6, 1871-8, and 1871-9 is measured by a connection test, the resistance value is small, so it is not possible to confirm whether harness 1872 is connected properly.

[Regarding the misalignment of the FFC connection in the comparative example]
Referring to FIG. 121, the terminals of the harness 1872 are misaligned one by one, and the connector CN1
22 and connector CN131 will be described.

[Comparative example: FFC connection misaligned on one side]
FIG. 121(a) shows a connector CN13 in which the terminals on one side of the harness 1872 are shifted one by one.
FIG. 1 is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the power supply 1 is connected to the power supply 1.

The harness 1872 is normally connected to the connector CN122, while the wiring 1871-2
1872-1 to 1872-10 are connected to terminals 2 to 10 of connector CN131 in a shifted state, and wiring 1872-1, which normally functions as a normal DC 12V wiring, is left unconnected.

On the other hand, normal DC 12V wiring is connected to the LED board 1862 via wiring 1872-2 and 1872-3.

When a connection test was performed, the DC 12V wiring from terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CN121 was connected inside the FFC relay board 1861, so that the two D
The resistance value between the C12V wiring becomes small, making it impossible to check whether the harness 1872 is connected properly.

In addition, it is possible to detect a small resistance value between the DC 12V wiring (wires 1871-1, 1871-2) and the DC 5V wiring (wire 1871-3) in the connection test, and to confirm that the harness 1872 is not connected properly. As shown in FIG. 121(a), the harness 1872 is shifted one by one and connected to the LED board 1862, so that the LED board 1
Within 862 the 5V DC wiring is connected to the 12V DC wiring.

Similarly, it is possible to detect low resistance between the GND wiring (1871-4, 1871-6, 1871-8, 1871-9) and the game board SDA wiring (wire 1871-5) and the game board SCL wiring (wire 1871-7) and to confirm that the harness 1872 is not connected properly. As shown in FIG. 121(a), the game board SDA wiring and the game board SCL wiring are connected to the GND wiring within the LED board 1862.

In addition, the terminals of the harness 1872 are shifted one by one to the opposite side from that in FIG. 121(a) to form the connector C
Similarly, when the terminals of the harness 1872 are connected to the connector CN122 one by one, it is not possible to perform a connection test between the DC 12V wiring or a connection test between the GND wiring.
It is not possible to perform a connection test between wires.

[Comparative example: FFC connection misaligned on both sides]
FIG. 121(b) shows a connector CN12 in which the terminals on both sides of the harness 1872 are shifted one by one.
2 is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the power supply 10 is connected to a connector CN131.

In the harness 1872, the wiring 1872-1 is not connected. In addition, the wirings 1872-2 to 1872-10, which are connected to the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN122 in a shifted state, are connected to the corresponding terminals 2 to 10 of the connector CN131.
A wire that is one step away from the wire that should have been connected to connector CN131 is connected, and the DC12V connection, GND connection, DC5V connection, game board SDA connection, and game board SCL connection are not interrupted. The various wires are not connected to other (other types of) wires (they are independent), and have a very large resistance value between them. Therefore, even if the resistance value between the various wires and other wires is measured in a connection test, it is not possible to confirm whether the connection is normal or not.

As a result, in the circuit diagram of the comparative example, even if the terminals at both ends of the harness 1872 are shifted one by one and connected to terminals other than the terminals to which they should originally be connected (even if a both-side shift state occurs), it is not possible to detect that the connection is not correct, as in this embodiment.

[Modified FFC connection circuit diagram]
Referring to Figures 117 to 119, circuit diagrams of modified FFC connections will be described.

Figure 117 is a schematic diagram showing the wiring connection configuration from the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) of a modified example to the panel decoration motor M1, the right drop board 866R, and the left drop board 866L (multiple second circuit boards).

As shown in FIG. 117, the decoration control board 750 of the modified example (which may be a part of the performance control device 300) is connected to the board decoration motor M1 via a fixed relay board 863 and a movable relay board 864.
The drop relay board 865 is connected to the drop relay board 865.
6R and the left dropped board 866L are connected.

The board decoration motor M1 is a driver of the decoration control board 750 (for example, the board performance movable body control circuit 3
34 (FIG. 4)) is driven and controlled based on a motor control signal (i.e., output signals from MCS1 to MCS4, etc.), and is operated by a movable performance unit (
The motor control signal is used to cause a movable part, such as a board effect device 44, to perform an effect. The motor control signal is A phase (0°), B phase (90°), /A phase (180°), /B phase (27
0°) coils (i.e., output signals of MCS1 to MCS4, etc.), and does not include signals of constant voltage drive voltage (DC 15V, etc.) or ground voltage signals.
In the case of V, control can be performed to pass current through the corresponding coil of the board decoration motor M1.

The decoration control board 750 also has two DC 15V terminals at the connector CN12 for supplying a voltage of DC 15V from the power supply device 400 to the panel decoration motor M1.
The V terminal is a common terminal for the A-phase and /A-phase coils, and the other DC15V terminal is a common terminal for the B-phase and /B
This serves as a common terminal for the coils of each phase.

The motor control signal is output (transmitted) from the driver of the decoration control board 750 via the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 to the panel decoration motor M1.

The falling right board 866R and the falling left board 866L have an LED driver circuit (IC chip, etc.) and are used to control light-emitting members (LEDs, etc.) that emit light to illuminate the logos and characters of the movable performance units that are moved by the board decoration motor M1. The falling right board 866R and the falling left board 866L are controlled to emit light based on a control signal (i.e., the game board SDA and the game board SCL) from a driver (not shown) in the decoration control board 750.

The fixed relay board 863 is a relay board fixed in the gaming machine 10, and the movable relay board 864
The drop relay board 865 is a relay board that can be moved and rearranged within the gaming machine 10.

The decorative control board 750 and the fixed relay board 863 are connected to a plurality of (for example, two) harnesses 873,
Similarly, the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 are connected by a plurality of (for example, two) harnesses 875 and 876.

The movable relay board 864 is connected to the board decoration motor M1 by a harness 877, and is connected to the drop relay board 865 by a harness 878. Similarly, the drop relay board 865 is connected to the drop right board 866R by a harness 879R, and is connected to the drop left board 866L by a harness 879L.

In addition, a panel motor sensor or the like that detects the rotational position, such as the initial position, of the panel decoration motor M1 may be connected to the decoration control board 750.

The decoration control board 750 may also be directly connected to another motor or a panel motor sensor that detects the rotational position of the other motor by another harness, without going through a relay board such as the fixed relay board 863. The decoration control board 750 may also be connected to a board that controls another component such as a panel decoration LED driver, upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b, or performance button switch 25a.

Next, a detailed circuit diagram of the FFC connection of the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119.

Moreover, FIG. 118 is a detailed diagram 1 (upstream side) showing details of the connection configuration of the modified FFC connection, and FIG. 119 is a detailed diagram 2 (downstream side) showing details of the connection configuration of the modified FFC connection.

As shown in FIG. 118, the decorative control board 750 has a connector CN12 having eight various terminals (8 terminals) and a connector CN13 having nine various terminals (9 terminals).

The connector CN12 has a DC15V terminal (2 terminals) and motor control signals MCS1 to MCS
The connector CN13 has an MCS terminal (output terminal, 6 terminal) that outputs DC1
2V terminal (2 terminals), DC5V terminal (1 terminal), GND terminal (4 terminals), and game board S
It has a DA terminal (1 terminal) and a game board SCL terminal (1 terminal).

The DC 15V terminal and the DC 12V terminal are terminals for supplying (powering) DC 15V and DC 12V from the power supply device 400 to the board decoration motor M1, the right drop board 866R, and the left drop board 866L.
Similarly, the DC5V terminal is a terminal for supplying DC5V, and the GND terminal is a terminal for supplying a ground voltage (ground terminal, earth terminal).

The MCS terminal is connected to a driver in the decoration control board (for example, the panel performance movable body control circuit 334 (FIG. 4
)) to the panel decoration motor M1, motor control signals MCS1 to MCS4, MCS1-T, MCS
A terminal that outputs (transmits) the motor control signal MCS1-T,
MCS4-T is a motor control signal that is output to the wiring for the connection test. The motor control signal MCS1-T is the same signal as the motor control signal MCS1, and the motor control signal MCS4-
T becomes the same signal as the motor control signal MCS4.

In addition, the game board SDA terminal transmits a serial data signal (game board SDA) to the right board 866R
and the game board SCL terminal is a terminal that transmits a clock signal (game board SCL) to the falling right board 866R and the falling left board 866L.

The connector CN12 of the decoration control board 750 is connected to the connector CN41 of the fixed relay board 863 via a harness 873.

As shown in FIG. 118, the harness 873 is composed of a plurality of (eight) wires 873-1 to 873-8 corresponding to terminals 1 to 8 of the connector CN12.

Wires 873-4 and 873-5 of the harness 873 are connected to terminals 4 and 5 of the connector CN12 and are wires (DC15V wires) for supplying DC15V.

Wires 873-2, 873-3, 873-6, and 873-7 are connected to connectors CN12.
are connected to terminals 2, 3, 6, and 7 of the motor control signals MCS1 to MCS4, and are used to output (transmit) the motor control signals MCS1 to MCS4 (MCS1 to MCS4 wirings (parallel communication lines)).

Moreover, the wiring 873-1 is connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN12 and outputs the motor control signal MCS
The MCS1 wiring outputs 1-T, but it is a test line for connection testing (MCS1-T wiring).
It also functions as a

Similarly, the wire 873-8 is connected to the terminal 8 of the connector CN12 and outputs the motor control signal MC
Although this is an MCS4 wiring that outputs S4-T, it also functions as a test line (MCS4-T wiring) for connection testing.

In the fixed relay board 863, the terminals of the connector CN41 are branched into a plurality of terminals, such as four or five terminals (not shown), to form a connector CN43 (24 terminals) and a connector C
Can be connected to N44 (20 terminals).

Also, the MCS1-T line, which is a test line from the terminal 1 of the connector CN41, is connected to the terminal 24 of the connector CN43. On the other hand, the MCS4-T line, which is a test line from the terminal 8 of the connector CN41, is connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN43.
Two test lines (MCS1-T wiring, MCS4-T
The test lines (MCS4-T) are connected to terminals 1 and 24 of the connector CN43 by exchanging their positions in the fixed relay board 863.
wiring, MCS1-T wiring).

The connector CN43 of the fixed relay board 863 is connected to the connector CN51 (
24 terminals) via an FFC harness 875.

The harness 875 is composed of a plurality of (24) wires 875-1 to 875-24 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 24 of the connector CN43 and the connector CN51.
875-5 is an MCS1 wiring, 875-6 to 875-10 are MCS2 wiring, 875-15 to 875-19 are MCS3 wiring, and 875-20 to 875-23 are MCS4 wiring. Also, 875-11 to 875-14 are DC 15V wiring.

The line 875-1 is a test line (MCS4-T line) that outputs the motor control signal MCS4, and the line 875-24 is a test line (MCS1-T line) that outputs the motor control signal MCS1.

The movable relay board 864 has a connector CN51 (24 terminals) corresponding to the wires 875-1 to 875-24 of the harness 875.

The harness 875 is bent so that the wiring arrangement is inverted upside down and connected to the connector CN51 of the movable relay board 864.

In the movable relay board 864, the test line for connection testing (MCS1-T wiring) outputs the motor control signal MCS1 and is connected to the normal motor control signal MCS1 wiring, and the test line for connection testing (MCS4-T wiring) outputs the motor control signal MCS4 and is connected to the normal motor control signal MCS4 wiring. Although not shown, the normal motor control signal MCS2 wiring, motor control signal MCS3 wiring, and DC15V wiring are also connected to be grouped into one or two wirings within the movable relay board 864.

As shown in FIG. 118, the DC 15V wiring is connected to the connector CN of the fixed relay board 863.
44 through a harness 876 to the connector CN52 of the movable relay board 864, and then the two may be combined and then connected to, for example, the terminal 4 of the connector CN53 (FIG. 118).
That is, the DC 15V wiring is connected to the movable relay board 8
118 which connects to connector CN51 of connector CN41 of movable relay board 864, and a lower route via harness 876. In this case, for example, terminal 4 of connector CN41 of fixed relay board 863 and terminal 3 of connector CN53 of movable relay board 864 are used as terminals for the upper route, and terminal 5 of connector CN41 and terminal 4 of connector CN53 are used as terminals for the lower route, making it possible to separate the harnesses that are the subject of a connection test and to create an easy-to-understand circuit configuration.

The connector CN53 of the movable relay board 864 is connected to the panel decoration motor M1 via a harness 877.

The harness 877 is connected to the connector CN53 and the terminals 1 to 5 of the connector CNM of the panel decoration motor M1.
The wiring 877-
Wiring 877-1 outputs the motor control signal MCS1, and wiring 877-2 outputs the motor control signal MCS2. Wiring 877-3 and 877-4 supply DC 15 V. Wiring 877-5 outputs the motor control signal MCS3, and wiring 877-6 outputs the motor control signal MCS4.

The wiring from the decoration control board 750 to the board decoration motor M1 is connected in the middle (for example, harness 875,
Even if the wiring is branched (at 876), it will eventually be returned to its original state before being connected to the panel decoration motor M1. Therefore, it is not difficult to connect the wiring to the panel decoration motor M1.

Here, the test line (MCS1-T wiring) for outputting the motor control signal MCS1 is an electrically independent circuit (
The test line (MCS1-T line) is connected inside the movable relay board 864 to the normal motor control signal MCS1 line other than the test line.

Therefore, in a connection test from the connector CN12 side of the decorative control board 750 in the harness 873, by measuring the resistance between the wiring 873-1 of the test line (MCS1-T wiring) and the wiring 873-2 of the normal motor control signal MCS1 wiring, it is possible to check whether the harness 873 and the harness 875 (particularly the motor control signal MCS1 wiring) are correctly connected. Note that the connection test can be performed from the connector CN12 side of the harness 873, for example, by unplugging the connector of the harness 873 from the connector CN12.

For example, when the harness 873 and the harness 875 are correctly connected (normally connected, electrically conductive), the resistance between the wires 873-1 and 873-2 is an extremely small value.

Similarly, in a connection test, by measuring the resistance between the wiring 873-8 of the test line (MCS4-T wiring) and the wiring 873-7 of the normal motor control signal MCS4 wiring, it is possible to check whether the harness 873 and the harness 875 (particularly the motor control signal MCS4 wiring) are connected correctly.
The resistance value between 73 and 7 is extremely small.

In addition, in a normal connection state, the wiring 873-1, 873-2 which is the wiring for the motor control signal MCS1
Since there is no connection between -2 and wirings 873-8 and 873-7 which are wirings for the motor control signal MCS4, the resistance value is very large. Similarly, in the normal connection state, the resistance value between wirings of different types (heterogeneous) is very large.

On the other hand, the connector CN13 of the decorative control board 750 is connected to the connector C of the fixed relay board 863.
It is connected to N42 via harness 874.

The harness 874 includes a plurality of (9) wires 87 corresponding to terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN13.
It consists of 4-1 to 874-9.

The wiring 874-2 of the harness 874 is connected to the terminal 2 of the connector CN13 and is connected to the DC12
A wiring 874-1 is a wiring (DC 12V wiring) that supplies V, and a wiring 874-2 is a wiring (DC 5V wiring) that is connected to terminal 3 of the connector CN13 and supplies DC 5V.

Wiring 874-4, 874-6, 874-8 are wiring (GND wiring) connected to terminals 4, 6, 8 to supply ground voltage. Wiring 874-5 is a wiring (game board SDA wiring) connected to terminal 5 of connector CN13 to transmit game board SDA, and wiring 874-7 is a wiring (game board SCL wiring) connected to terminal 7 of connector CN13 to transmit game board SCL.

Furthermore, the line 874-1 is a DC 12V line connected to terminal 1 of the connector CN13 and supplies DC 12V, but also functions as a test line (DC12V-T line) for connection testing.

Similarly, the line 873-9 is a GND line connected to the terminal 9 of the connector CN13 and supplies a ground voltage, but also functions as a test line (GND-T line) for a connection test.

In the fixed relay board 863, like the connector CN41, the terminals of the connector CN42 are also branched into a plurality of terminals, such as three or five terminals (not shown), to form a connector CN44 (
20 terminals). In addition, some of the wiring that branches into multiple branches can be connected to connector CN43 (24
The terminal may be connected to the

Also, the DC12V-T wiring, which is a test line from the terminal 1 of the connector CN42, is connected to the terminal 20 of the connector CN44. On the other hand, the GND-T wiring, which is a test line from the terminal 9 of the connector CN42, is connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN44.
Two test lines (DC12V-T wiring, GND-T) connected to terminals 1 and 9 of N42
By exchanging their positions within the fixed relay board 863, the test lines (GND-T wiring, DC12V-T wiring) are switched in position and connected to terminals 1 and 20 of the connector CN44.

The connector CN44 of the fixed relay board 863 is connected to the connector CN52 (
20 terminal) via an FFC harness 876.

The harness 876 is composed of a plurality of (20) wires 876-1 to 876-20 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 20 of the connector CN44 and the connector CN52.
-4 is a normal DC 12V wiring, wirings 876-5 to 876-10 are DC 15V wiring, and wirings 876-11 and 876-12 are DC 5V wiring.
, 876-14, 876-16, 876-17, and 876-19 are GND wiring, wiring 876-15 is game board SDA wiring, and wiring 876-18 is game board SCL wiring.

The wiring 876-1 is a test line (GND-T wiring) that supplies a ground voltage, and the wiring 876
-20 is a test line (DC12V-T wiring) that supplies DC12V.

The movable relay board 864 has a connector CN52 (20 terminals) corresponding to the wires 876-1 to 876-20 of the harness 876. The harness 876 is bent to invert the wiring arrangement upside down and connected to the connector CN52 of the movable relay board 864.

Within the movable relay board 864, between the connector CN52 and the connector CN54, the GND-T wiring of the test line is independent and not connected to other wiring such as normal GND wiring, and the DC12V-T wiring of the test line is independent and not connected to other wiring such as normal DC12V wiring.
The test line (DC12V-T wiring) from terminal 1 of connector CN52 is connected to connector CN54.
The test line (GND-T wiring) from terminal 20 of connector CN52 is connected to terminal 1 of
The normal GND wiring and the normal DC 12V wiring are connected to terminal 9 of connector CN54. Furthermore, the normal GND wiring and the normal DC 12V wiring are connected to be united within the movable relay board 864. Although not shown, the DC 5V wiring and the DC 15V wiring are also connected to be united within the movable relay board 864. Furthermore, the DC 15V wiring is connected to, for example, terminal 4 of connector CN53.

The connector CN 54 of the movable relay board 864 is connected to the drop relay board 865 via a harness 878 .

The harness 878 is connected to the connector CN54 and the connector CN61 of the drop relay board 865 (see FIG. 1
The wiring 878-1 to 878-9 are made up of a plurality of (nine) wires 878-1 to 878-9 corresponding to terminals 1 to 9 of the harness 874.
In addition, if the two test lines (DC12V-T, GND-T) are arranged on the outermost side, the wiring configuration of the wiring 878-1 to 878-9 is the same as that of the wiring 878-2.
The arrangement of the wiring, DC 5V wiring, etc. may be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 119, the drop relay board 865 has a connector CN61 (9 terminals) and a connector C
Connector CN61 has a connector N62 (12 terminals) and a connector CN63 (12 terminals).
These correspond to wiring 878-1 to 878-9 of harness 878.

In the drop relay board 865, the wiring from each of the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN61 can be branched into multiple parts, such as two branches (not shown), four branches, or eight branches, and connected to the terminals of either the connector CN62 or the connector CN63. Note that the terminal 12 of the connector CN62 and the terminal 1 of the connector CN63 are connected to each other and are not directly connected to the terminals of the connector CN61, but
It is indirectly connected via the harness 879R, the drop right board 866R, etc.

In addition, the test line (GND-T wiring) from terminal 1 of the connector CN61 is
On the other hand, the test line (DC12
The VT wiring) is connected to terminal 12 of connector CN63.

The connector CN62 of the drop relay board 865 is connected to the connector CN71R of the drop right board 866R.
(12 terminals) of the left dropped board 866L via an FFC harness 879R, and the connector CN63 is connected to a connector CN71L (12 terminals) of the left dropped board 866L via an FFC harness 879L.

The falling right board 866R has a connector CN71R (12 terminals) corresponding to the wires 879R-1 to 879R-12 of the harness 879R. Also, the falling left board 866L has a connector CN71L (12 terminals) corresponding to the wires 879L-1 to 879L-12 of the harness 879L. The harnesses 879R and 879L are bent to invert the wiring arrangement upside down. The harness 879R is connected to the connector CN71R of the falling right board 866R, and the harness 879L is connected to the connector CN71L of the falling left board 866L.

The harness 879R is composed of a plurality of (12) wires 879R-1 to 879R-12 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 12 of the connector CN62 and the connector CN71R.
2, 879R-3 is a normal DC 12V wiring that is not a test line, and wiring 879R-4, 8
79R-5 is the DC 5V wiring. Also, wiring 879R-6, 879R-7, 879R-
9, 879R-11 are normal GND wiring that is not a test line, wiring 879R-8 is the game board SDA wiring, and wiring 879R-10 is the game board SCL wiring. These various wirings are connected to the corresponding terminals 2 to 11 of the connector CN71R of the drop right board 866R.

Similarly, the harness 879L is connected to terminals 1 to 12 of the connector CN63 and the connector CN71L.
The wiring 8 is made up of a plurality of (12) wirings 879L-1 to 879L-12 corresponding to the wirings 8
79L-10 and 879L-11 are normal DC 12V wiring, not test wiring, and wiring 87
9L-9 and 879L-8 are DC 5V wiring. Also, wiring 879L-7 and 879L-6
, 879L-4, 879L-2 are normal GND wirings that are not test lines, and wiring 879L
The wiring 879L-5 is the SDA wiring of the game board, and the wiring 879L-3 is the SCL wiring of the game board. These various wirings are connected to the corresponding terminals 2 to 11 of the connector CN71L of the left drop board 866L.
The arrangement (sequence) is upside down relative to the R wiring 879R-2 to 879R-11.

Wiring 879L-12 is a test line (GND-T wiring) that supplies ground voltage.

Wiring 879R-1, 879R-12, and 879L-1 are test lines (DC12V-T wiring) that supply DC 12 V. The arrows in Fig. 119 show the direction of current in the DC12V-T wiring as an example to make the connection of the test lines easier to understand, but if the direction of the current is reversed, the arrows may also be reversed.

In the dropped right board 866R, terminals 1 and 12 of the connector CN71R are conductive, and the wiring 87
The current from the 879R-1, i.e., the current in the DC12V-T wiring, flows from terminal 12 to terminal 1 and to wiring 879R-12, as shown by the arrow in FIG.
The direction of the current in the wiring 879R-12 (right arrow in FIG. 119) is opposite to the direction of the current in the wiring 879R-12 (left arrow in FIG. 119). The current in the DC12V-T wiring flows from the terminal 12 of the connector CN62 of the drop relay board 865 to the terminal 1 of the connector CN63, the wiring 87
9L-1, and then flows to terminal 12 of connector CN71L of the dropped left board 866L.

The DC12V-T wiring is connected to the normal DC12V wiring in the left dropped board 866L,
The ND-T wiring is connected to the normal GND wiring within the left dropped board 866L.

In this way, in the circuit diagrams of the modified examples shown in FIGS. 117 to 119, the test line (MCS1-T
The wiring, MCS4-T wiring, DC12V-T wiring, and GND-T wiring) are formed as a single electrically independent circuit (series circuit, series wiring) on the outermost side of each harness (harnesses 873 to 876, 878 to 879L).

Therefore, even in the circuit diagram of the modified example, in the connection test, the motor control signal M
CS1 test line (MCS1-T, wiring 873-1) and normal MCS1 wiring (wiring 873
-2) can be used to check whether the MCS1 wiring is in a normal connection state. If the MCS1 wiring is in a normal connection state, the resistance between these wirings will be extremely small compared to when the wiring is not in a normal connection state.

Similarly, in the connection test, the test line (MCS
By measuring the resistance between the MCS4 wiring (wiring 873-8) and the normal MCS4 wiring (wiring 873-7), it can be confirmed whether the MCS4 wiring is in a normal connection state.

Furthermore, in the connection test, the test line of the motor control signal MCS1 (MCS1-T, wiring 87
It can also be confirmed that the resistance between the test line (MCS4-T, wiring 873-8) of the motor control signal MCS4 (MCS4-1, wiring 873-1) and the test line (MCS4-T, wiring 873-8) of the motor control signal MCS4 is a very large resistance value and that the connection is not established.

Similarly, it is preferable to confirm in the connection test that the resistance between the normal MCS1 wiring (wiring 873-2) and the normal MCS4 wiring (wiring 873-7) is a very large resistance value and that they are not connected.

In addition, by measuring the resistance between the DC12V-T wiring (wiring 874-1) of the harness 874 and the normal DC12V wiring (wiring 874-2), and between the GND-T wiring (wiring 874-9) and the normal GND wiring (wiring 874-8), it can be confirmed whether these wirings are normally connected.
The wiring (wire 874-9) is not connected, and the normal DC 12V wiring (wire 874
It is preferable to confirm by a connection test that there is no connection between the terminals 874-1 and 874-2) and the normal GND wiring (wiring 874-8).

In this way, by measuring the resistance value between wiring that should be connected and the resistance value between wiring that should not be connected through a connection test, it is possible to easily check whether the circuit diagram of the modified example is normally connected or not while keeping the FFC harnesses 875, 876, etc. connected.

Furthermore, by connecting the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 with multiple (two) flexible flat cables (harnesses 875, 876) instead of one, the flexibility of the connection is increased, and it is possible to expand the range of movement of the movable relay board 864. Furthermore, even if one of the multiple flexible flat cables (FFC) is bent too much and breaks, it is only necessary to replace the broken FFC, which reduces costs.

As shown in FIG. 117, multiple components such as the movable parts (such as the board decoration motor M1, the falling right board 866R, the falling left board 866L) are connected using multiple (e.g., two) harnesses (particularly FFC harnesses (harnesses 875, 876)). By connecting the motors and boards that move the movable parts using multiple harnesses in this way, it becomes possible to increase or decrease the number of harnesses in response to an increase or decrease in the number of components, making it easier to respond to an increase or decrease in the number of motors (particulars). Furthermore, even if the specifications of the performance of the gaming machine 10 are changed and the number of motors (particulars) is increased or decreased, the gaming machine 10 can be easily reused. Note that the movement (operation) of the movable parts causes the movement (operation) of the multiple components such as the movable parts (such as the board decoration motor M1, the falling right board 866R, the falling left board 866L) and the decoration control board 7 to be connected.
The distance between 50 and 50 can vary.

Furthermore, the harnesses 875, 876, 879R, and 879L of the modified FFC are
Wiring: MCS4 wiring, DC12V wiring, GND wiring, etc. are not single (1) but multiple (2)
As a result, even if a wire is broken due to being bent too much or interfering with another component, the control of the board decoration motor M1, the right drop board 866R, and the left drop board 866L can be continued using the other unbroken wires. For example, the harness 87
Even if several of the MCS1 wirings (four wires) or MCS2 wirings (five wires) of 5 are broken, as long as at least one wire of each remains, control of the panel decoration motor M1 can be continued.

Furthermore, in the fixed relay board 863, the positional relationship between the MCS1-T wiring and the MCS4-T wiring is switched. As a result, for example, the MCS1-T wiring arranged as the ninth wiring from the outside of the harness 875 is
Even if any of the nine wires (wires 875-1 to 875-9) up to the CS2 wire (wire 875-9) are broken, control of the panel decoration motor M1 can be continued using the remaining MCS2 wire (wire 875-10) and the MCS1-T wire (wire 875-24) located on the opposite side, at the outermost side.

Similarly, in the fixed relay board 863, the positional relationship between the DC12V-T wiring and the GND-T wiring is swapped. As a result, for example, the DC12V-T wiring arranged ninth from the outside of the harness 876
Even if any of the nine wires (wires 876-1 to 876-9) up to the C15V wire (wire 876-9) are broken, control of the falling right board 866R and the falling left board 866L can be continued using the remaining DC15V wire (wire 876-10) and the DC12V-T (wire 876-20) arranged on the opposite side, at the outermost side.

In addition, the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 need only be connected by harnesses (FFC) equal to or greater than the number of motors connected to the movable relay board 864, and the number of harnesses connecting the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 may be two or more by increasing the number of connectors.
In addition, between the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864, similar to the DC 15V wiring, the motor control signals MCS1 to MCS4 and the signals to the right drop board 866R and the left drop board 866L (game board S
DA, game board SCL) may be transmitted through a separate harness.

[Actions and Effects of the Seventh Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is capable of executing a game (variable display game) and a performance related to the game, and includes a first circuit board for control (for performance control) (e.g., a decoration control board 7
50) and a second circuit board (e.g., LED) capable of transmitting or receiving signals between the first circuit board.
board 862, board decoration motor M1, right drop board 866R, left drop board 866L), and wiring (wires 871-2 and 871-3 of harness 871, harness 872-3, etc.) connected via at least one connector (connectors CN11 to CN31, etc.) between the first circuit board and the second circuit board.
72, wiring 872-2 to 872-4, etc.), and connection determination wiring (test line TD (wiring 871-1, 872-12), test line TG (wiring 871-11, 872-1), etc.) that is provided in parallel to the wiring between the first circuit board and the second circuit board and that is electrically conductive (connected) to the wiring on the second circuit board when the wiring is properly connected between the first circuit board and the second circuit board (when the connection is normal).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to appropriately determine (confirm) whether the wiring is properly connected between the first circuit board and the second circuit board by using the connection determination wiring provided in parallel with the wiring. As a result, even if a disconnected wiring occurs, such as a state where both sides of an FFC connection are misaligned, which was previously impossible to determine, it is possible to confirm that the wiring is not properly connected by using the connection determination wiring, and therefore it is possible to obtain an opportunity to reconnect the wiring, and therefore it is possible to properly correct the connection misalignment of the entire wiring.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the distance between the first circuit board and the second circuit board is variable. With such a gaming machine 10, for example, a second circuit board can be provided on a displaceable movable part (component), and it can be properly determined (confirmed) whether the wiring is properly connected even for a second circuit board on a component whose distance from the first circuit board changes relatively. Also, even if a general-purpose flexible flat cable (FFC) with small terminal holes is used for the wiring between the first circuit board and the second circuit board so that it can follow the movement of a displaceable movable part, for example, the first circuit board (
Connection tests can be easily performed by placing a tester from the upstream side.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to determine whether or not the wiring between the first circuit board and the second circuit board is properly connected via the side of the connection determination wiring that corresponds to the terminal of the connector of the first circuit board and the side of the wiring that corresponds to the terminal of the connector that connects to the first circuit board. With such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to easily check whether the first circuit board and the second circuit board are properly connected by simply unplugging the wiring and the connector of the connection determination wiring on the first circuit board side and performing a connection test between the connection determination wiring and the wiring.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the connection determination wiring and the wiring are partially installed as a flexible flat cable, and the connection determination wiring is located on the outermost side of the flexible flat cable, sandwiching the wiring. With this gaming machine 10, the connection determination wiring is located on the outermost side of the flexible flat cable, which is most likely to be subjected to external forces and is therefore the most likely to be the starting point of a break, making it easier to determine whether the first circuit board and the second circuit board are properly connected without the wiring being broken.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a relay board that relays the connection determination wiring and the wiring, and the connection determination wiring and the wiring are not electrically connected to each other at the relay board.
Since the connection determination wiring and the wiring from the first circuit board are connected to the second circuit board without being conductive via the relay board, it is possible to easily check whether the wiring is properly connected across the first circuit board and the second circuit board by simply performing a connection test between the connection determination wiring and the wiring without removing the relay board.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the connection determination wiring and the wiring are partially installed as a flexible flat cable, and in the relay board that relays the connection determination wiring and the wiring, a connector on the first circuit board side and a connector on the second circuit board side and the flexible flat cable side are
According to this gaming machine 10, the positional relationship of the terminals for the connection determination wiring is reversed (inverted) between the connector on the first circuit board side and the connector on the second circuit board side, so that even if the wiring on one side of the flexible flat cable is broken, the connection determination wiring arranged on the opposite side can be used as a spare wiring,
Control of the second circuit board can continue.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the wiring is a conductor for voltage or ground (DC 12V wiring, GND wiring). In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the wiring is a serial communication line (gaming board SDA wiring,
In the gaming machine 10, the wiring is a parallel communication line for motor control. Therefore, with such a gaming machine 10, the connection determination wiring can be used in parallel with general wiring, so that the connection determination wiring can be used universally for various circuits.

It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical concept, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. For example, it is also possible to replace the time-saving state with a probability-changing state. For example, it is also possible to combine a plurality of embodiments and a plurality of modified examples in various ways. In addition, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and it is intended to include all modifications within the scope of the contents and meaning equivalent to the claims.

For example, when the above-mentioned embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of winning balls is replaced by the number of medals paid out. In the slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the role ratio is
The ratio of the number of medals paid out through various bonuses to the total number of medals paid out during a specified period (
%).

10 gaming machine 25 performance button 30 gaming board 32 gaming area 34 normal start gate 36 first start winning port (first start winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device (second start winning area)
38 First special variable prize winning device 39 Second special variable prize winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area 86 (V winning port)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed,
The game control means includes:
A gaming state including a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state advantageous to a player can be generated;
As the variable display game, a first variable display game can be executed based mainly on the establishment of a first starting condition by a hitting manner in which a game ball is launched to the left side of the game board , and a second variable display game can be executed based mainly on the establishment of a second starting condition by a hitting manner in which a game ball is launched to the right side of the game board,
A storage means is provided for storing a first start memory number, which is the number of times the first start condition is satisfied, and a second start memory number, which is the number of times the second start condition is satisfied, and the first start memory number and the second start memory number are displayable on a display means by using a numerical display and an image display.
The normal gaming state is a state in which the first starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second starting condition,
The specific gaming state is a state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first starting condition,
In the specific gaming state ,
A mode display corresponding to the gaming state is displayed on the display means;
When the second variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times, the specific game state is changed to the normal game state,
a result display is displayed on the display means when the specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state, and the mode display that has been displayed before the result display is displayed is made non-display, and the result display is displayed;
An image display of the second start memory number associated with the mode display is displayed for a period until the result display is displayed;
displaying an image of the first start memory number associated with the mode display for a period after the result display is displayed;
Throughout a display period during which the result display is displayed and a non-display period before and after the display period during which the result display is not displayed, the display means displays a numeric display of the first start memory number on the left side and a numeric display of the second start memory number on the right side,
When the display of the result display is completed, an arrow for guiding the launch of the game ball into the game area on the left side of the game board is displayed on the display means in a direction from the numerical display of the second start memory number to the numerical display of the first start memory number .
Amusement machine.

Images